Digital PDFs

XX-12EFE-11

October 1983

236 pages

Original

12MB

Document:	PDP-11 Systems and Options Catalog
Order Number:	XX-12EFE-11
Revision:	0
Pages:	236
Original Filename:	PDP-11_Systems_and_Options_Catalog_198310.pdf

OCR Text

Systems & Options Catalog
October-December 1983

The information in this document is subject to change
without notice and should not be construed as
a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation.
Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no
responsibility for any error that may
appear in this catalog.

This Product Catalog was designed, produced, and typeset
by Digital's Corporate Marketing Services using
an in-house text-processing system.

Correspondent, DATATRIEVE, DEC, DECmate, DECnet, DECmailer, DECstart,
DECword, DECword/DP, DECwriter, Digital logo, FALCON, FMS-11, lAS, Internet,
LA, Letterprinter 100, Letterwriter 1 00, MICRO/PDP-11 , MICRO/J-11 ,
MICRO/PDP-11, MICRO/T-11, MicroPower/Pascal, PACKETNET, PDP, P/OS,
Professional 325 and 350, PROVUE, Q-bus, Rainbow 100, ReGIS, RSTS, RSX,
RT-11 , UNIBUS, VAX, VMS, VT
are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation.

New Products From DIGITAL

MICRO/PDP-11-the performance of a minicomputer
in a compact, economical microcomputer. Now there
is Micro/RSX, especially designed for use on the
MICRO/PDP-11.

New Packaging for PDP-11/24s and PDP-11/44s- from
boxes to building blocks to complete packaged systems.

New Q-bus Mass Storage Packaging
-Adds 10MB to the MICRO/PDP-11
-Adds removable floppies to Q-bus systems

Table of Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . .
Overview and How to Use . . . . .
Ordering and Configuring Information.
Supporting Products .

Systems . ......... .
System Selection Chart . . . . . .
Q-bus System Chart. . . . . . . .
MICRO/PDP-11 Computer Models & Systems. .
PDP-11 /23-PLUS Computer Models & Systems.
UNIBUS System Chart. . . . . . . . . .
UNIBUS Rackmountable Computer Models .
UNIBUS Kernel Systems. . .
UNIBUS Building Blocks . . .
UNIBUS Packaged Systems .
UNIBUS Expansion Hardware.

Options . ...... .
Option Selection Chart. . . .
Processor Options and Memories .
Communication and Realtime Options
Communication Cables Chart .
Options Configuring Charts. .

Components . . . .
Component Selection Charts .
Microprocessor Chips. . . .
Single-Board Processors. . .
Processor Options and Memories .
Enclosures, Cables and Backplanes.
Microcomputer Development Systems and Tools.
Component Configuring Charts .

Disks &. Tapes ....... .
Disk Selection Chart. . . . . . . . .
Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed- and Removable-Disk Subsystems
Magnetic Tape Selection Chart . .
Magnetic Tapes . . . . . . . .
Magnetic Tape Configuring Charts.

Personal Computers.
Rainbow 1 00 . . . . . .
DECmate II . . . . . . . .
Professional 325 and 350 . .

Terminals &. Printers
Video Terminal Selection Chart .
Video Terminals . . . . . . .
...
Video Terminal Configuring Chart .
Hardcopy Terminal & Lineprinter Selection Charts
Hardcopy Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lineprinters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card readers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardcopy Terminal & Lineprinter Configuring Charts

Software ........ .
Software Selection Chart. . . . . . .
Operating Systems Selection Chart . .
PDP-11 Operating Systems . . . . .
Operating System Ordering Information.
Programming Languages. . . . . . .
Programming Languages Ordering Chart
Applications Packages. . . . . . . .

ii
. iv
viii
· 1-1
· 1-3
· 1-5
· 1-8
1-12
1-22
1-26
1-32
1-36
1-40
1-48
· 2-1
· 2-3
· 2-6
· 2-8
2-18
2-28
· 3-1
· 3-3
· 3-4
· 3-5
· 3-8
· 3-9
3-10
3-11
· 4-1
· 4-3
· 4-4
· 4-7
4-19
4-20
4-25
· 5-1
· 5-4
· 5-6
· 5-9
· 6-1
· 6-3
· 6-4
6-11
6-13
6-14
6-19
6-25
6-26
· 7-1
· 7-4
· 7-8
· 7-6
7-17
7-20
7-22
7-22

Table of Contents
Application Packages Ordering Chart.
Software Binary License Agreements

7-27
7-30

Networks . .... .

· 8-1
· 8-3
· 8-4
· 8-6
· 8-9
8-11

Networking Selection Chart. .
DECnet . . . . . . . . . .
Internets . . . . . . . . .
Packetnet System Interfaces .
Communication Software Ordering Information.

Customer Services.
Field Service. . . .
Software Services .
Educational Services

Index ....
AppendixA .

· 9-1
· 9-3
· 9-5
· 9-7
10-1
· A-1

Introduction
The success of Digital's products is built on the concept of architectural compatibility. One of the leading examples
of Digital's superior architecture is the PDP-11. This uniquely successful computer family is based upon a
compatible set of processors, ranging from a single chip to full multipurpose computer systems. All of these
processors are built using a common hardware architecture. You can upgrade or expand any Digital system by
adding memory, peripherals, or processors without introducing major incompatibilities into your system. PDP-11
minicomputers and microcomputers are engineered to provide increased functionality in smaller, more economical
packages, while still utilizing the same powerful software as their larger predecessors. Today's PDP-11 s provide a
full product range from chips to systems to networks.
Complementing these computers are a complete array of operating systems: realtime multitasking systems,
timesharing interactive multiuser systems, compact realtime single-user systems, small and midrange commercial
systems, multiuser data management systems, and a development and runtime system designed expressly for
microcomputers. With Digital's Operating System General License, you can choose the particular operating system
that best fits your application needs. Every operating system equips you with a full set of application development
tools, and every processor can support additional language compilers, networking options, and an ever-expanding
selection of application software.
The PDP-11 Systems and Options Catalog is released each quarter to provide you with the most accurate and upto-date information on currently available PDP-11 systems, options, and software products. Whether you are a new
or existing PDP-11 customer, this catalog will help you select the best Digital products to meet your computing
needs .

•

Introduction
How to Use This Catalog
The following Section Overview will help you find all of the appropriate product information you require, whether you
want to expand your current system, configure a new system, or perform your own integration of system
components. The catalog has been divided into nine major sections. There is also an index and appendix. Each
section begins with a product selection chart that includes page references so that you can quickly determine what
products are offered and where they can be found in that section. Configuration and site preparation charts contain
detailed technical speCifications (power requirements, mounting codes, etc.) for all products, and are located at the
end of each section.
Software Ordering Information is contained at the end of the Software and Networking Sections.

Section 1 - Systems describes the PDP-11 computer models and systems, beginning with the a-bus family of
computers-the MICRO/PDP-11, the PDP-11/23-PLUS and the PDP-11 123-S and following with the UNIBUS
family of computers- the PDP-11 /24 and PDP-11 /44. Each system model description includes features and
benefits, performance characteristics, expansion information, site preparation figures, ordering information, and a
checklist of supported options.
A diagram of the CPU box and a graphic system configurator are also included for each computer model. The CPU
box shows the location of modules bundled in the system (for example, the CPU and/or controller), the location of
dedicated modules (for example, memory and/or floating point processor) and expansion slots (for example, hex,
quad, extended a-bus quad or double). The system configurator is designed in the form of a worksheet to enable
you to write down the options you wish to purchase, and calculate the deduction of the DC power and bus loads
drawn by each option (see the sample worksheet on the next page).
If you run out of DC power in the CPU box before adding on all your options, you will need to purchase an expansion
box. Should you run out of room in the CPU cabinet for another expansion box, then it is necessary to purchase
another cabinet. These expansion products are also described in this section.

Section 2 - Options provides all the necessary information for selecting and configuring the processor, memory,
communication, and realtime I/O options that are available for the a-bus or UNIBUS systems you have selected. The
new flexible option ordering plan is described in detail at the beginning of this section. Please read it over carefully,
as many of the options have new order code designations.

Section 3 - Components includes a-bus chip and board-level products for customers who want to perform their
own system integration. A complete selection of a-bus processor and memory options, enclosures, backplanes and
development tools is included.
Section 4 - Disks and Tapes describes the disk and magnetic tape subsystems available for the a-bus and UNIBUS
systems. Included is a description of the Digital Storage Architecture (DSA) and both the UDA50 and RaDX1
controllers. Again, each product description includes complete performance characteristics and ordering information.
Section 5 - Personal Computers describes Digital's family of personal computers: DECmate II-tailored to meet the
needs of the small business and office environments; the Rainbow 1 OO-designed for popular industry-standard
personal computer applications, and the Professional 325 and 35O-designed to bring minicomputer performance
and professional applications to personal computing. These product descriptions include some of the hardware and
software options available for each model. For complete information on hardware and software options, consult the
Personal Computer Summer Catalog.
Section 6 - Terminals and Printers include Digital's wide variety of video terminals, graphics terminals, hardcopy
terminals, page and lineprinters that are available for a-bus and UNIBUS systems.
Section 7 - Software describes the seven Digital operating systems that can run on your PDP-11, plus optional
software-programming languages, information management, word processing, graphics, and application packages-you can add. License and ordering information is provided.

Section 8 - Networking provides information on Digital's network architecture and our communication software. The
communication software includes: DECnet-for Digital-to-Digital communication, either locally or remotely; Internets-for connecting Digital systems to non-Digital systems; and Packetnet System Interfaces-for connection of
systems through a public packet-switching network.

Section 9 - Customer Services summarizes some of the excellent support services Digital offers, including Field
Service, Software Services, and Educational Services to meet your hardware, software, and training needs.
Section 10 -Index will help you find the information you need quickly and easily.
Appendix A - Tables for translating the old a-bus and UNIBUS option order codes to the new ordering
nomenclature.

Introduction

iii

Introduction
The following terminology is used in this catalog for configuring and ordering PDP-11 products. A sample
configurator worksheet is included to illustrate how to add options to your system and to help define the terms used
in the product descriptions and in the ordering and configuring charts.

Ordering Information
The model numbers are the designations used to order products in this catalog. For products that are voltage/
frequency dependent the designations are in the following format. The 1 20VAC/60Hz variation of the model
appears first, followed by the 240VAC/SOHz system in parentheses. For example with model number H77S0BA(BD), the H77S0-BA deSignates the 120 VAC, 60 Hz model. The H77S0-BD deSignates the 240 VAC, SO Hz
model.
Communications and I/O options have new order code designations which indicate whether the options are
puchased with a new system or added to an existing system. The following terms describe this flexible option
ordering plan:
System option

Ordered with CPU. Includes the generic option and all the appropriate cabling, I/O connection panel
inserts and bracket hardware for installation on that CPU. Example: DZV11-DP.

Upgrade option

Ordered as an add-on to an existing system. Includes only the base option module. Requires a cabinet
kit for installation. Example: DZV11-M and CK-DZV11-DB

Base option

Board or peripheral without cables. Example: DZV11-M

Cabinet kit

Unique cable, I/O connection panel insert and bracket hardware required to install the option in a specific
cabinet or enclosure. Example: CK-DZV11-DB

External cable

Shielded cable which connects peripherals to the enclosure. These cables must be ordered separately
for communication options. The -xx deSignation in cable model numbers indicates that different length
cables or other product variations are available and that the order code corresponding to the desired
option must be specified (see Price List).

See Appendix A for conversion of the old option order codes to the new nomenclature.

Configuring Information
There are five factors to consider when you configure PDP-11 systems:
• Expansion Space - the space in a CPU or expansion box to accommodate a specific type of backplane or
module. Expansion space refers to physical space,for example, SU (System Unit) or Quad Slots (see CPU
Backplane Diagram below).
• Power Requirements-the amount of DC current and watts each option requires. The figures for available power
are supplied in the configurator worksheet.
• Bus Loads-the number of AC and DC busloads drawn by each option. The figures for available bus loads are
supplied in the configurator worksheet.
• Priority-the order in which options are placed in the backplane can affect system performance. For example, the
UDASO disk storage subsystem control unit is always configured as the last device on the UNIBUS backplane.
Note: Each system will be integrated with all modules in the correct prioritized order (not necessarily the order
shown in the sample configurator).
• I/O Connection Panel Insert Space-space in the I/O Connection Panel (located at the back of the system box)
used to carry connectors for communications and peripheral devices. Options vary in the number of connection
panel units of space they require. The number of available insert spaces is included in the configurator
worksheet.
Once you have selected those options that meet your system requirements, list them in the option column of the
configurator, refer to the option chart that lists the power and space requirements mentioned above, and begin
subtracting the figures given for each option from the figures provided with the system configuration.

iv Introduction

Introduction
In this sample configuration for a MICRO/PDP-11, a customer has selected 512 KB of additional memory (MSV11PL), added a floating point processor option (FPF11) and a single line communication device with modem control
(DLVE1-DP).
SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
POWER*
OPTION

KDF11-BP
MSV11-PK
DZV11-CP
RQDX1

11/23·PLUS CPU
256 KB PARITY MOS MEMORY
4 LINE MULTIPLEXER
CONTROLLER FOR RQDX1

36
6
230
4.5 31.5 0.3 5.7 26.1 203.9
3.5 28.0
17.3 186.6
1.1 26.9 0.4 5.3 10.2 176.4
7.0 19.9 0.2 5.1 37.4 139.0

SIZE A

SIZE B

SIZE C

AVAIL·
AVAIL·
AVAIL·
AVAIL·
AVAIL·
USED ABLE USED ABLE USED ABLE USED ABLE USED ABLE

2
2
4
3

35
33
31
27
24

20
19
18
17
16

2
2
2
2
2

4
3
2
2

DUAL
QUAD

or
or

.......E~f.:1L.......?:?...?:~ ....-::......-::....~?:? .~:~ ...9.....~~.............................g...................................
DUAL

QUAD
DUAL

AVAIL·
ABLE

PANEL INSERT SIZE

BUS LOADS
AC
DC

WATTS

....~~.Y.~.1.:P..~......~:?..1.?·.~....-::..... :~....1.~:9. .1~.1:Q ...1.....~~.............................~...................................

O~R

DUAL

@+12V

AVAIL·
AVAIL·
USED ABLE USED ABLE USED

CPU BACKPLANE
ABC
0

QUAD

@+5V

....p..~y.~~.:-.p.p.......1.:9... .?:~...J.:?...~:~...?:~. .!..f?:!_ ... ~..... ~.L ....1......1.9......1.......1 ...................................
DUAL

QUAD
DUAL

°t

DUAL

"The total power (+5V and +12V) cannot exceed 230 Watts. If only one Dual Slot is used, insert a bus grant continuity module
(G7272) in second Dual Slot.

Power Requirements
DC Amps Available

DC current available for system expansion @+5V and @+12Vfor a-bus systems and @+5V, @+15V,
and @-15V for UNIBUS systems.

AC Amps Available

AC current available for system expansion @120V within a specific system cabinet for peripheral
expansion.

DC Amps Drawn

DC current drawn from the system @+5Vand @+12Vfor a-bus systems and @+5V, @+15V, and @15V for UNIBUS options.

AC Amps Drawn

AC current drawn by the option @120V or @ 240V.

Bus Load Requirements
System Bus Loads
Available

The number of electrical loads remaining on the system a-bus or UNIBUS.

System Bus Loads
Drawn

The number of bus loads the option draws off the a-bus or UNIBUS.

Units of Measurement
b/in = bits per inch (formerly bpi)

K = 1024

b/s = bits per second

M = 10242 (1 ,048,576)

in/s = inches per second (formerly ips)

KB = Kbytes

cm/s = centimeters per second

MB = Mbytes

I/min = lines per minute

KB/s = Kbytes per second

I/in = lines per inch

MB/s = Mbytes per second

I/cm = lines per centimeter

Introduction

Introduction
Definitions
Space Requirements
SU (System Units)

Definition of space available in BA 11-type boxes for mounting backplane(s) to accommodate modules.
For example, a BA 11-KU(KV) box has five SUs worth of space that could accommodate up to two 0011OK backplanes and one 0011-CK backplane.

Backplane

Hardware interface containing edge connector slots for insertion of modules. These backplanes allow for
the connection of the module to the Bus and to a power supply source. For example: 0011-CK, 0011-

Dual-Height Module

A 13.2 cm x 20.3 cm (5.22 in x 8 in) module with two 36-finger connectors.

Quad-Height
Module

A 26.5 cm x 20.3 cm (10.44 in x 8 in) module with four connectors.

OK.

Hex-Height Module

A 39.6 cm x 20.3 cm (15.6 in x 8 in) module with six connectors.

Dual Slot

Space in the backplane capable of accepting one dual-height module.

Quad Slot

Space in the backplane capable of accepting one quad-height module on the Q-bus . The slot will also
accept one dual-height module and may accept two dual-height modules.

Hex Slot

Space in a UNIBUS backplane capable of accepting a hex-height or quad-height module.

1/0 Connection
Panel Insert

Space in the plate (I/O Connection Panel) located at the back of Q-bus system boxes and UNIBUS CPU
and expander cabinets for simple connection of modules and cables. There are three panel insert sizes
for Q-bus options: size A (2.54 cm x 10.1 cm, 1 in x 4 in), size B (6.6 cm x 8.1 cm, 2.6 in x 3.2 in) and
size C (10.1 x 1O.x cm, 4 in x 4 in). UNIBUS option panel inserts are in multiples of 5 cm x 10.1 cm (2 in
x 4 in) units.

Hex-Height Module

vi Introduction

Quad-Height Module

Dual-Height Module

New Cabinet and Cabling
Digital has implemented a design for shielding cabinet and cabling to reduce the potential of electromagnetic
interference from computer devices. This new cabling system is made up of three parts:
• First, a shielded CPU enclosure and an internal cable that originates at the option module or controller
• Second, a shielded liD Connection Panel that joins the internal and external cables and provides the transition
between option modules and externally connected devices.
• Third, an external cable that attaches to the peripherals

The liD Connection Panel (described in Section 1- Systems) completes the shielding envelope and provides the
filtering necessary to contain potential radio frequency interference within the cabinet. All cables entering or exiting
the cabinet must do so via the liD connector panel.
To Simplify the task of connecting Digital and Non-Digital devices to systems in the same way, a wide range of liD
connector panel hardware is offered through the Installed Base Marketing Group.

Shielded Cabinet and Cabling
Shielded CPU
Enclosure

Blank Inserts
,Option Connection
Panel Inserts

I/O Connection Panel

Power Controller

External cable/

Introduction

vii

Supporting Products

;',

C;;"

Effective July 5, 1983 to October 2, 1983

Orde~ Direct from

Please specify
r=;)when

~orderlng

from this catalog.

,r;~~

Y)~~cP~e"

Digital's Warehouse .~If'"l'

r!J.~ ,~~

,,~

.;tb

QrtI

To complement your Digital computer system, supporting products such as accessories, supplies, documentation
and selected hardware options are available for immediate delivery through the OECdirect catalog. Network and
personal computing products are also available through DECdirect. Featuring a colorful, informative format,
DECdirect makes buying high-quality Digital products easier. For your free copy, in the Continental U.S. and Puerto
Rico, call, toll-free, 80D-258-171 O. In New Hampshire, Alaska, and Hawaii, call 603-884-6660. The mailing address
is:
Digital Equipment Corporation
P.O. Box CS2008
Nashua, New Hampshire 03061

viii

Introduction

Supporting Products
Spares Kit Handbook
The Spares Kit Handbook is designed to help customers
identify the proper kit (or single part) to provide
spares for Digital products. It is divided into three
easy to use sections including a configurator which
a1phanumerically lists the hardware options or systems
supported by spare parts. This list enables the user
to determine which spares support specific options. A
brief description of the type of kit and its part
number are included.
If you are performing maintenance on your Digital system,
you can't afford to be without a copy of this handbook.

Expansion Products Handbook

Building or adding to your present system? The new
Expansion Products Handbook from Digital contains detailed information on:
• Expansion packaging and power hardware
• Backplane hardware
• Connector blocks
• Wire wrap modules
• General purpose interfaces
• Tools and test equipment
No system builder can afford to be without this valuable
reference tool. In addition, a separate price list is included.Sendforyourcopytoday.

Introduction

Supporting Products

Documentation Products Directory
Finally! A single reference source of selected Digital hardware and software documentation products. This new
directory makes necessary product information readily accessible and it can be used to determine what documentation products are required to support a particular hardware or software option.

Software Documentation Products

Other Features

• Software Documentation Kits
• Source Microfiche Kits
• Software Manuals, Handbooks, Reference Cards

• Ordering/Pricing Information
• Accessories & Supplies Group Discount Policy
• System Software Organization
• Understanding Digital's Software Numbering Scheme
• Glossary of Software Terms and Abbreviations
• Documentation Index by Ordering Part Number
• Documentation Index by Description

Hardware Documentation Products
• Hardware Manuals
• Maintenance Prints
• Diagnostic Kits

Introduction

Supporting Products

Hardware Documentation Kit
Handbook
DIGITAL's Hardware Documentation Kit Handbook contains listings of documentation kits designed to support
Digital's current, high volume products. The book is divided into two sections: Option level products and Systems.
A table of contents at the front of the book lists products
by their option deSignation, while the index in the back
sorts products by kit number to aid in referencing the
various kits. Packaged system matrices have been designed for each processor type.

Guide to Data Communications
Confused over which communication products to buy?
Digital's new guide to Data Communications makes seemingly difficult communications terms understandable enabling you to pick the data communication product that is
right for your application. The guide includes detailed
information on the following products:
• Acoustic covers
• Modems
• Multiple modems
• Digital's new Intelligent Communication Processor

Introduction

Supporting Products

The Cables Handbook is published by Digital Equipment Corporation for use by design engineers, consultants,
purchasing representatives, sales personnel, and others who deSign, sell, reconfigure, or maintain computer
systems. The handbook is divided into three major sections:
• Ethernet Cables and Physical Channel Hardware
• New Cable Products
• Traditional Cable Products and Connector Kits
Included in each section are cables that are used in external applications, outside of a cabinet or enclosure to
remote devices.
Although the cables featured were designed for specific Digital applications, many of the RS232-C and general
purpose cables can be used with computer equipment manufactured by other firms. All of the cables featured here
are available from Digital's Accessories and Supplies Group.
To request your copy of the new Cables Handbook write:
Digital Equipment Corporation
Circulation Department MK01 /W83
Continental Boulevard
Merrimack, NH 03054

xii

Introduction

Digital Reference Service
For Anyone with a Consistent Interest in what Digitalis, Does, and Offers.
Now, the handiest access ever to information about Digital Equipment Corporation. With the Digital Reference
Service you have a continuous, reliable and direct source of information on what we are, what we offer, and how we
operate. It's all here - our products, applications, and services - compiled by a team of Digital specialists
exclusively for our subscribers.

Information Tailored to Your Needs
Whatever your purpose, the Digital Reference Service tells you what you want to know about Digital Equipment
Corporation. It provides an overview of Digital's worldwide operations, and provides useful pointers to the sales
channels and support organization maintained by Digital. You'll also find a listing of our sales and service offices
throughout the world.
Major segments of the Digital Reference Service are devoted to Digital's crossmarket products. Our Reference
Service explains what software is available. And which hardware goes with it. It describes all the processors,
peripherals, and add-on options that we offer.
For those who need information about products designed with a particular marketplace or application in mind, the
Reference Service presents the full range of our market-specific product offerings as well. For the commercial
world, it discusses all the products and services specifically tailored for applications in banking, telephone
communications, and small-business accounting - to name a few. For the technical environment, it covers such
areas as medicine, engineering, research, education, and manufacturing.
We provide information about Digital's office information products, personal computing products, terminals, and the
full spectrum of our accessories and supplies. Also described in detail are Digital's customized hardware,
microcomputer products, refurbished equipment, and our OEM products and programs.
As a subscriber to the Digital Reference Service, you'll always have instant access to the latest information about our
customer training programs and facilities, our hardware and software support services, and our software referral
programs. You'll also find descriptions of Digital's special sales channels, retail stores, and Authorized Distributorship Programs.
Also available are price lists for our products and services, keyed to the product descriptions which comprise a
major portion of the Digital Reference Service.

Designed for Easy Use
We've organized data by product and by market. Many technical summaries and cross-reference tables highlight
important product features and provide quick cross-references between CPUs and operating systems, operating
systems and languages, CPUs and supported peripherals, etc. Photographs and charts support detailed product
descriptions and provide configuration and environmental guidelines.
A compact master index directs you to the information you want quickly and efficiently. Extensive cross-referencing
between volumes automatically leads you to more information about your area of interest. And updating your Digital
Reference Service set is easiest of all, with virtually total replacement of the binder contents every quarter.

Format Defined by EDP Professionals
The Digital Reference Service is the culmination of several years of research, many interviews with EDP consultants
around the world, and proven success in satisfying subscriber needs.
Whether you're a large user of computers, an OEM, a software house, or an EDP consultant, there is no other
source which puts all the facts about the world's largest manufacturer of interactive computers at your fingertips.
You can obtain your Digital Reference Service starter kit at no extra cost with your first-year subscription to our
annual update service. It includes a set of handsome binders and the first of four quarterly "full set replacement"
packages which you will receive throughout your subscription year. You are also entitled to receive newsletters
which provide both product and application-oriented information which develops between quarterly updates. To
order your Digital Reference Service starter kit, including full one-year update service, Simply fill in the handy order
card on the reverse page, and mail it, with your check or purchase order for the amount of $295 * ($35 * additional
for price lists), to:
Digital Equipment Corporation
Reference Service (Dept. 12)
CF01-2/K21
200 Baker Avenue
West Concord, MA 01742
Please provide full subscriber information including name, title, mailstop, and address.

Introduction

xiii

Digital Reference Service

Your Personal Guide to Digital's Organization, Products and Services

Guide to DIGITAL

One-Stop Information Source

Always Current

• Organization and Support
• Full Spectrum of Product
and Service Offerings
• DIGITAL's OEM Products, Referral
Services, Leasing Programs
• Configuration, Environmental,
and Compatibility Information

• Tailored to Your Needs
• Organized by Product Family,
Applications and Performance
• Extensive Product Overview
and Cross-reference Tables

• Quarterly, Full-set Replacement Updates
• Compiled Exclusively for Subscribers
by DIGITAL Specialists
• Subscriber Newsletters Between Updates

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Ordering Information:

o I would like to enter ___ subscription(s) to the Digital Reference Service and subscribe to the quarterly
update service, including the newsletter, at the annual cost of $295 each. My check or purchase order is enclosed.
o Please include in my subscription(s) ___ quarterly price lists, for which I have included $35 * each. My
check or pur,chase order is enclosed.
If this order is for more than one set, please include the name and mailing address of each subscriber. Allow at least
6 weeks for delivery.

* Above prices valid in the U.S. only and subject to change without notice.
Mr./Mrs'/Ms'/Miss _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
My company's major business is:

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
xiv

Manufacturing
Retail/Distribution
Services Industry
EDP Consultant! Accounting Firm
Insurance
Banking/Finance
Digital OEM Distributor
Government!Education
Computer Mfg./SaJes
Computer Services/SW House
Introduction

Title
Firm
Address
City
State

Zip

Phone

DiC)it;~I'c',

pm"'- 1 1 s,!'stems are based on a compatible set of processors. all uSlrlC) :1 U),~lrrl,J"

cormTK)f1 instrlJctiorl set, and all capable of supporting any of seven PDP-11 ope:r ;ltlrlCI;,/:;t, .'1:,

offer the wiciest selection of operating systems, languages, data management commIJilic:l!i("[h ,1',.1 .li
~rl
~:.oftv/;jrl' in the ir1Cjw~try With over 300,000 systems installed worldwide. till' r1Dr-' 1 1 I', ':
Il:ir!icornputer in history PDP-l1s can also be easily connected to our larger VA>; S,/:-;((:III:; to :·':1: ·,'i':\:· '.,'
to otrH?r vendors' rTlalrlframes, and Into an Ethernet.
lJ~;inq thi,; section irl conjunction with ttle Software section of this catalo~J it I~; CdS,/ to iincJ i: II
11:!:'!I.'.'dlf' ,1'11.1 ~;(lttV/d(" th:lt will meet your exact requirements The system sr'ir:ctIUII ,:11,1:: "I' 'i·
Ik' !J:J)rJ ~()r ~l (jlJlck CCHTlpdflsorl of PDP-11 systems

rh,} .'-)',;c;tc:IIS :;ec:tioll is ciivicJr:cj into two parts Q-bus systems and UNIBUS systerm; 1Iii: t,;/,) : ,I
PI,)V;Cj(· ';,III!I-11 : 1. 1 .;pc~ed ;lIlli melTlory addressability The major difference [x:t\'/I"'II til' I':;' II
/(11 :"iv 'I; ~y-:rlp' :',:rdl Ijc'JIU::, whicll Cll!l be added to the system

TIl(: O-lith \\';.t:.: IrdrocilJCccJ irl 1 S)75 Its simple desi~Jn permits the irnplC:rTll:Hltatlull C1 ''/f':\ .1'
',>::,liPlltCf ';vstCiT1~;. :;ucll (IS tile MICRO/PDP-11 and tile PDP-11/23-PLUST Iw I(lrllt;~)t r \1, lil,
'-3V:~1(:'rll:~ ,:,uPPC1r t rl(llJl' d 10MB capacity per drive The f3stest networkirl~J intE=~rf:-lcc flIl1:':.1 1 LJ,\ :
ill" l.'ll/fent ljf~ll!.:rdtiu~1 of OtJus microcomputers is capable of sLJPp()rtin~J ,I tu L' ccri(:IJlf"111 I.
11;';')n til(: ~lr1pllc;ltl()11

1)1::;

Systems
The UNIBUS, the original PDP-11 bus, was introduced in 1970. Applications that require high-speed communications or large disk capacity (up to 456 MB per drive) are typically based on UNIBUS PDP-11 systems, such as the
PDP-11/24 and PDP-11144 (many UNIBUS peripherals are also supported on Digital's VAX-11 . family of 32-bit
superminicomputers). The PDP-11/44 can support up to 48 concurrent users.
All PDP-11 packaged systems include, as minimum components, a CPU, memory, console terminal interface, and a
disk subsystem. Most include the PDP-11 Operating System General License which allows you to run any or all
Digital PDP-11 operating systems on your computer. Software media, documentation, and support services for each
operating system may be ordered as needed. Refer to the Operating System Ordering Chart in the Software
Section of this catalog. None of these systems include a console terminal. You can select the terminal that best suits
your application from the wide variety of video and hardcopy models described in the Terminals & Printers section
of this catalog.

CPU Selection Chart
Processor

Integer
Performance
(Relative)

Mass Storage Devices

Maximum
Memory

Page

Floppy

Hard Disk

Tape

MICRO/PDP-11

4MB

RX50
2 X 0.4 MB

RD51
10MB
RL02
10MB

TSV05

1-8

PDP-11/23PLUS

4MB

RX02
2 XO.5 MB
RX50
2 X 0.4 MB

RL02
10MB
RD51

TSV05

1-12

PDP-11/24

4MB

RX02
2 XO.5 MB

RA80
121 MB

TU77

1-26

RA60
205MB

TU80

RA81
456MB

TE16

RL02
10MB
PDP-11/44

1.0

4MB

RX02
2 XO.5 MB

RA80
121 MB

TU77

RA60
205MB

TU80

RA81
456MB

TE16

1-30

RL02
10MB

Systems

1-3

The Q-bus Family of Multiuser Systems

The Q-bus family includes not only the base and packaged systems described here, but a range of chips, singleboard computers, and components which are more fully described in the Components section.
Two Q-bus multiuser systems are offered: the PDP-11 123-PLUS and the MICRO/PDP-11 . Because they utilize the
same PDP-11 123-PLUS CPU, they have many features in common. They execute an identical instruction set,
support many of the same devices, and support the same memory and performance enhancement options.
The MICRO/PDP-11 is designed for small, multiuser applications where size and cost are of paramount concern.
The PDP-11 123-PLUS is more expandable and can handle a wider range of concurrent functions, more communications, and more mass storage. The smallest and lowest priced PDP-11 123-PLUS CPU package is the PDP-11 123S, in an 8.8 cm (3.5 in) rack-mountable box.

Q-bus Computer Features:
• Physical memory addressing up to 4 MB (backplane space permitting) for improved performance in multiuser
applications.
• Optional non-volatile CMOS memory for use in environments where power conditions are uncertain.
• Two asynchronous EIAICCITT interfaces: one for the console terminal and one for expansion.
• Parity MOS memory expansion in 256 KB or 512 KB increments.
• Optional Commercial Instruction Set chip for faster DIBOL and COBOL-81 program compilation and execution.
• Optional floating point instruction chip or a floating point processor board for faster BASIC and FORTRAN
program execution.
• Two CPU operating modes: kernel and user.
• Diagnostic bOotstrap which tests memory, CPU, and the console terminal on startup, then boots the system from
a designated disk or DECnet line.
• 1/0 Connection Panel to simplify cable management.

1-4

Systems

The Q-bus Family of Multiuser Systems
MICRO/PDP-11 Selection Chart
Model

Memory

Mass
Storage

Enclosure

License
Included

Page

11A23-F

256KB

2 RX50s

Floor/Table

1-10

11A23-R

256KB

2 RX50s

Raekmount

1-10

11C23-F

256KB

RX50/RD51

Floor/Table

1-10

11C23-R

256KB

2 X RX50/RD51

Raekmount

1-10

SX-RASOO

256KB

2 X RX50/RD51

Floor/Table

Yes

1-10

PDP-11/23-PLUS Selection Chart
Model

Memory

Mass
Storage

Enclosure

License
Included

Page

11/23-BC(BO)

256KB

13.3 em (5.25 in)
Raekmount

1-16

11/23-BE(BF)

512 KB

13.3 em (5.25 in)
Raekmount

1-16

11 T23-BK(BL)

512 KB

2 RL02s

H9642 Cabinet

1-12

11 V23-BE(BJ)

256KB

1 RX02

H9642 Cabinet

1-12

SX-RXMMA

512 KB

2 RL02s

H9642 Cabinet

Yes

1-12

PDP-11/23-S Selection Chart
Model

Memory

Mass
Storage

Enclosure

License
Included

Page

11/23-SC(SO)

32KB

8.8 em (3.5 in)
Raekmount

1-18

11/23-SE( SF)

64KB

8.8 em (3.5 in)
Raekmount

1-18

Systems

1-5

The Q-bus Family of Multiuser Computers
Q·bus Options Checklist
The following is a list of system options for the MICRO/PDP-11, the PDP-11 123-PLUS, and the PDP-11 123-S.
These options may also be ordered as field upgrades: order a base option and cabinet kit. The options and all
ordering details are completely described in Section 2-Options, Section 3-Components, Section 4 -Disks and
Tapes, and Section 6 - Terminals and Printers.

Processor Options

o KEF11-AA
o KEF11-BB
o FPF11

Memory Options
Floating point chip
Commercial Instruction Set chip
Floating point processor

o MCV11-DC
o MSV11-PK
o MSV11-PL

32 KB CMOS memory
256 KB parity memory
51 2 KB parity memory

Communication Options

o DLVE1-DP
o DLVJ1-LP
o DLVK1-H
o DMV11-AP
o DMV11-BP
o DMV11-CP
o DMV11-FP
o DPV11-AP
o DUV11-AP
o DZV11-DP

EIA single line interface with full modem control
4-line EIA interface
EIA to 20mA converter
DECnet interface (RS232)
DECnet interface (V.35)
DECnet interface (Integral Modem)
DECnet interface (RS423/449)
Synchronous interface (56 KB/s max)
Synchronous interface (9.6 KB/s max)

Realtime Options
0 AAV11-C

o ADV11-C
o AXV11-C
o IEQ11
o KWV11
o DRV11-BP
o DRV11-JP
o DRV11-LP

4-line EIA multiplexer (modem control)

Peripherals

o RLV22-AP
o RXV21-EP
o RXV21-ES
o RXV21-ET
o RXSD-AA
o RXSD-R,-D
o RDS1-R,-D
o RQDX1
o TUS8-EB
o TSVOS
o LPV11-AP
o LPV11-BP
o LPV11-EP
o LPV11-FP

Cartridge disk subsystem
Floppy disk subsystem 120VAC/60Hz
Floppy disk subsystem 120VAC/50Hz
Floppy disk subsystem 240VAC/50Hz
Dual mini-diskette drive
Dual mini-diskette drive
10MB Winchester drive
RX50/RD51 disk controller
Cassette subsystem
Magnetic tape subsystem (PDP-11 123-PLUS only)
Lineprinter (64 character set, 300 I/min)
Lineprinter (64/96 character set, 300 I/min)
Lineprinter (64 character set, 600 I/min)
Lineprinter (64/96 character set, 600 I/min)

Expansion Hardware

o BA11-SE(SF)
o BCV2A-03

1-6

Systems

Expansion box
Bus expansion cable and terminator

Digital to analog converter
Analog to digital converter
Analog 1/0 device
IEEE converter
Realtime clock
DMA parallel interface
Four 1 6-line parallel interfaces
Parallel interface

The Q-bus Family of Multiuser Systems
The products in this catalog are designed for world-wide use. Some products, however, need minor changes to
accommodate national languages, local electrical power, etc. Country kits provide a convenient method of bundling
the appropriate documentation, labels, diagnostics, and power cords for major geographic areas. The result is that,
with the proper country kit, systems can be used world-wide with a minimum of difficulty.

Country Kits for the MICRO/PDP-11
MICROI
PDP-11

RQDX1 Controller
and Extender

RX50-R,-D
Externally Mounted
Subsystem

RD51-R,-D
Externally Mounted
Subsystem

USA, Canada (English)

-AA

-CA

-OA

-EA

Australia

-AZ

-CZ

-OZ

-EZ

Canada (French)

-AC

-CC

-DC

-EC

Denmark

-AD

-CD

-DO

-ED

Finland

-AF

-CF

-OF

-EF

France

-AP

-CP

-op

-EP

Germany

-AG

-CG

-OG

-EG

Holland

-AH

-CH

-OH

-EH

Italy

-AI

-CI

-01

-EI

Norway

-AN

-CN

-ON

-EN

Spain

-AS

-CS

-OS

Country

-ES
\

Sweden

-AM

-CM

-OM

-EM

Switzerland (French)

-AK

-CK

-OK

-EK

Switzerland (German)

-AL

-CL

-OL

-EL

United Kingdom

-AE

-CE

-DE

-EE

To facilitate international distribution, 15 country kits are offered. A country kit includes a user-friendly checkout
diskette, miscellaneous labels, power cable, hardware, and a 7.6 m (25 ft) null modem cable. Order a country kit in
the specified language from the Country Kit Chart. The order code is S001 plus the two-letter suffix from the chart.
For example, to order a country kit for the RQOX1 for Holland, type S001-CH.

Systems

1-7

MICRO/PDP-ll

The MICRO/PDP-11 family of small, multiuser computers consists of both floppy-disk and fixed-plus-floppy systems.
They are packaged to fit easily under a desk or worktable, on a tabletop, or as a rack mountable box enclosure, and
can be expanded to support up to 1 0 users.
The 13.3 cm (5.25 in) RD51 Winchester disk drive, included in some MICRO/PDP-11 models, has a formatted
capacity of 10MB. The RX50 floppy diskette subsystem, included in all models, accepts two single-sided 13.3 cm
(5.25 in) diskettes, each with a capacity of 400 KB (these are the same diskettes used by Digital's Professional
series of personal computers, described in the Personal Computers Section in this catalog.) The RODX1 controller
handles both the RD51 and the RX50 and performs Direct Memory Access (DMA) block-mode transfers for
maximum system efficiency.
The major sub-assemblies -floppy subsystem, system enclosure, processor and memory component form for system integrators and OEMs.

are available in

To facilitate international distribution, 15 country kits are offered. A country kit includes a user-friendly checkout
diskette, miscellaneous labels, power cable, hardware, and a 7.6 m (25 tt) null modem cable. Order a country kit in
the specified language from the Country Kit Chart on the preceding page. The order code is SQ01 plus the twoletter suffix from the chart. For example, to order a country kit for the RODX1 for Holland, type SQ01-CH.

All Multiuser MICRO/PDP-11 s include the standard Q-bus computer features plus:
• 256 KB parity MOS memory expandable up to
4 MB, backplane space permitting
• One 13.3 cm (5.25 in) dual 400 KB RX50 diskette
subsystem (800 KB total)
• Compact BA23 system chassis
• Power cord

Some systems also include:
• PDP-11 Operating System General License
• One 13.3 cm (5.25 in) 10MB RD51 Winchester disk
subsystem
• DZV11 four-line asynchronous multiplexer (for a total
of 6 lines)

1-8

Systems

MICRO/PDP-ll
System Memory Expansion
This system can be expanded in increments of 256 KB or 512 KB. While memory management and 22-bit
addressing can support a maximum of 4 MB of memory, actual memory in the CPU backplane is determined by the
number of available quad slots.

Configur.ing MICRO/PDP-11 Multiuser Systems
In addition to the routine factors of option power requirements and available backplane slots, the utilization of the 1/0
Connection Panel must be considered.

Power Requirements and Bus Loads
Each MICRO/PDP-11 option requires a certain amount of DC current and AC and DC bus loads. To configure a
system, subtract the power requirements and bus loads of the options from the available amps at + 5V and at
+ 12V and the available AC and DC bus loads (the figures for available power and bus loads are supplied in the
configurator worksheet).

Priority Scheme
The extended Q-bus is designed to support 4 levels of interrupts, 4 through 7. Most options support only level 4
interrupts. Options at the same level have position dependent priority. The CPU is always placed in the first slot
followed by the memory module(s). Those options closest to the CPU have the highest positional priority. When
configuring options, it is important to consider priority since this can dramatically affect system performance.

Backplane Slots
The MICRO/PDP-11 has the first three slots configured to accept one option each (quad or dual). The next five slots
can accept one quad option or two dual'options. When configuring options, make sure that Dual width options get
placed adjacent to one another to make efficient use of slot space. If for priority reasons you have a Dual option,
followed by a Quad option, a bus grant continuity card (G7272) is included in your country kit to run signals to the
Quad option.
Consult the MICRO/PDP-11 Handbook for more information on priority schemes.

1/0 Connection Panel Insert Space
The 1/0 Connection Panel for the MICRO/PDP-11 is a 30.4 cm x 12.7 cm (12 in x 5 in) plate located at the back of
the system box. It is used to carry connectors for communication and peripheral cables. These cables connect the
computer to terminals and mass storage devices outside of the chassis. The panel is designed to simplify cable
management.
MICRO/PDP-11 options have panel inserts which come in two sizes: size A (2.5 cm x 10.1 cm, 1 in x 4 in) and size
B (6.6 cm x 8.1 cm, 2.6 in x 3.2 in). The panel has space for two A inserts and four B inserts. An adapter plate is
included for converting two B inserts to three A inserts. The MICRO/PDP-11 options consist of two distinct parts: 1 )
the module, for example, the DZV11 and 2) the cabinet kit, consisting of one size B panel insert with 4 EIA
connectors and the cable to connect the module to the panel insert. Mounting hardware is also included.
Refer to the Option Configuring Charts at the end of Section 2 and at the end of the Disks and Tapes Section for
the power requirements, bus loads, backplane and liD Connection panel insert sizes for each option.

Cabinet

Option

~
module

cable
BC

J=L

Distribution
Panel

Interface
Cable

Peripheral

Filter

B Size used for DZV11
Serial lines-one for
console terminal

May be used for two 8

~ Inserts or three A inserts.

Baud Rate
Selection Switches ----;~--!!I....

Systems

1-9

MICROjPDP-ll
SX-RASOO SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
POWER
OPTION

@+5V

@+12V

BUS LOADS
AC
DC

WATTS

PANEL INSERTS
SIZE B
SIZE A

AVAIL·
AVAIL·
AVAIL·
AVAIL·
AVAIL·
AVAIL·
AVAIL·
USED ABLE USED ABLE USED ABLE USED ABLE USED ABLE USED ABLE USED ABLE

CPU BACKPLANE
ABC

4 LINE MULTIPLEXER

RX/RD
KDF11-BIE
MSV11-PK
DZV11-DP

CONTROLLER FOR RD/RX

RQDX1

11/23-PLUS CPU
256 KB PARITY MOS MEMORY

36
1.2 34.8 3.0
4.5 30.3 0.3
3.5 26.8
1.1 25.7 0.4
7.0 18.7 0.2

230
6
3.0 42 188
2.7 26.1 161.9
17.3 144.6
2.3 10.2 134.4

2
2
4

30
30
28
26
22

2.1 37.4 97

20
20
19
18

17
16

4
4
3
2
2

QUAD

DUAL

QUAD

DUAL

QUAD
DUAL

°t

DUAL

QUAD
DUAL

or
DUAL

*The total power (+ 5V and + 12V) cannot exceed 230 Watts. If only one Dual Slot is used, insert a bus grant continuity
module (G7272) in second Dual Slot.

Ordering Information:

Site Preparation Specifications:

11A23-F

Floor Stand Systems

MICRO/PDp-11 Floor/Table System
Base (floppy only). Includes CPU, 256
KB parity MOS memory, RX50 dual
diskette subsystem.

11A23-R

Same as 11 A23-F, but includes rack·
mount hardware instead of plastic cov·
ers and floor stand.

11C23-F

MICRO/PDp-11 Floor/Table System
Base. Includes CPU, 256 KB parity
memory, RX50 dual diskette susbsys·
tem, RD51 Winchester disk subsystem.

11C23-R

Same as 11 C23-F, but includes rack·
mount hardware instead of floorstand
and plastic covers.

SX-RASOD-EX
f

SX-RASOD-FA

MICRO/PDp-11 Floor/Table Packaged
System. Includes the 11 C23 features
plus a PDP-11 Operating System Gen·
eral License and a DZV11 multiplexer
for a total of six terminal ports.
Same as SX·RA500·EX but also in·
cludes BQ01-AA country kit (USA and
English·speaking Canada).

• Height: 61.25 cm (24.5 in)
• Width: 25 cm (10 in) at base
• Depth: 71.5 cm (28.6 in)
• Weight: 31.8 kg (70 Ib)
• Watts: 320
• Receptacles required:
NEMA #5-15R(120VAC/60Hz),#6-15R(240VAC/
50Hz)

Table Top Systems
• Height: 15.2 cm (6 in)
• Width: 56.5 cm (22.25 in)
• Depth: 72.4 cm (28.5 in)
• Weight: 32 kg (70 Ib)
• Watts: 320
• Receptacles Required:
NEMA #5-15R (120VAC/60Hz),#6-15R (240VAC/
50Hz)

Rack Mount Systems
• Height: 13.3 cm (5.25 in)
• Width: 47.5 cm (29 in)
• Depth: 64.8 cm (25.5 in)
• Weight: 24 kg (53Ib)
• Watts: 320
• Receptacles Required:
NEMA #5-15R (120VAC/60Hz), #6-15R (240VAC/
50Hz)

1-'0

Systems

2
2
2
2
2
2

_computershelp
you work.
This me helps you
work as aream.
HERE'S THE INFORMATION.

PASS ITON

\. ;:=-,

1IIITAl'S lEW
TEAM COMPUTER
Digital Equipment Corporation, the world's second
largest computer company, has created the ideal solution for people who work closely together. The new
MICRO/PDP-ll'" Team Computer system.
1his system unites up to 10 people productively and
economically. And with over 2,000 software packages
to choose from, you can use it for anything from word
processing to accounting to engineering.
The idea behind it is ingeniously simple. With the
Team Computer, 10 people get their own tenninals and
their own private files. And because they're all connected
to the same computer, they can also share information
whenever they need to.

Think about it.
You can share the workload on big projects. Get reports out quicker. Exchange messages faster than phone
calls. Since all the information you need is collected in
one place, you can pull together more effectively to
get the job done.
You can even get information from other Team
Computers, personal computers and mainframes.
But the best news is the price. The basic computer
starts at $9,200. Then you just add the terminals and
software you need.
And since the computer fits under a desk, you don't
even have to worry about making room for it.

CallI-BOO-DIGITAL, ext. 650, for our free Team
Computer brochure.
And tum your work
into teamwork.

MICROIPDP-l1 Team Computer

Systems

1 -11

PDP-ll/23-PLUS Multiuser Systems

The PDP-11 /23-PLUS is a multiuser microcomputer that delivers minicomputer performance by providing memory
size and powerful software usually found only on larger, more expensive systems. The PDP-11/23-PLUS is an ideal
system for multi-user commercial applications requiring 20-40 MB of disk storage. Its small size, fast response time
and large memory make it a good choice for realtime applications such as process control or data acquisition.

All Multiuser PDP-11/23-PLUS Systems
include the standard Q-bus system features
plus:
• 256 KB or 512 KB of parity MOS memory
• One RLV22 disk subsystem (one controller
and two 10.4 MB RL02 removable-cartridge disk
drives) OR one RXV21 diskette subsystem (one
controller and two 0.5 MB RX02 drives)
• Cabinetry: One 106 cm (41. 7 in) high
H9642 cabinet
• BC22D-25 cable for console terminal
(console terminal not included)

1-1 2

Systems

Ordering Information:
Systems
11 T23-BK(BL)

PDP-11/23-PLUS System Base. 51 2
KB MOS memory, two RL02 disks,
plus controller. Software license not included.

11 V23-BE(BJ)

PDP-11/23-PLUS System Base. 256
KB MOS memory, one RX02 dual diskette subsystem (1 MB total). Software
license not included.

S X - R X M M A - PDP-11/23-PLUS Packaged System.
EK(EN)
Same as 11 T23-BK(BL). Includes the
PDP-11 Operating System General Ucense.

PDP-ll/23-PLUS Multiuser Systems
CPU Cabinet Expansion
There is a 13.3 cm (5.25 in) high by 68 cm (26.8 in) deep area of mounting space available below the CPU box for
expansion. This is typically used for a SA11-SE(SF) B-slot expansion box to accommodate additional memory and
communication or realtime options.
The SA 11-SE(SF) is a cabinet-mountable expansion box with bezel required for expansion of the PDP-11 /23-PLUS
system. It houses two fans for side-to-side cooling of the logic modules and H7861 power supply, H9276
backplane with card frame assembly, and an H403S AC input box. The H9276 is a nine-slot Extended Q-bus
backplane that provides eight quad slots of mounting space when used as an expansion box. The power supply is
rated at 36 amps @ +5V and 5 amps @ + 12V.
System expansion is limited to a single SA 11-SE(SF). It must be mounted in the CPU cabinet. Customers planning
to field install the 1 20VAC expansion box in the CPU cabinet should purchase a replacement power controller (874C or 874-D). When the SA 11-SE(SF) box is ordered with the system, Digital supplies the appropriate power
controller at no extra cost.
Note: Cable not included. Order the SCV2A-03 Extended Q-bus cable and expansion assembly for connecting the
CPU box to the expansion box.
BA11-SE(SF) EXPANSION BOX

3
4

36 amps +5V,
5 amps +12V

6
7
8

System Memory Expansion
Memory expansion is available in 256 KS or 512 KS increments for a system maximum of 4 MS, backplane slots
permitting.

System Disk Expansion
Two more RL02 removable-cartridge disk drives may be added to the dual-RL02 systems (11 T23 and SX-RXMMA)
for a total of four. An additional H9642 cabinet will be required.

Configuring PDP-11123-PLUS Systems
In addition to the routine factors of option power requirements and available backplane slots, the utilization of the I/O
Connection Panel must be considered.
Refer to the Options Configuring Charts at the end of Section 2 and at the end of the Disks and Tapes Section for
the power requirements, bus loads, backplane and I/O Connection Panel insert sizes for each option.

Power Requirements
Each PDP-11 /23-PLUS option requires DC current and AC and DC bus loads. To configure a system, subtract the
power requirements and bus loads of the options from the available amps at + 5V and at + 1 2V and AC loads (the
figures for available power are supplied in the configurator worksheet).

Backplane Slots
The PDP-11/23-PLUS CPU box provides 6 Extended Q-bus Quad slots for expansion. The SA 11-SE(SF)
expansion box provides an additional 8 quad slots for adding options. The system can be expanded using a SA 11-S
expansion box.

Systems

1-13

PDP-ll/23-PlUS

PDp-11/23-PLUS 1/0 Distribution Panel

J'f- -~- -~ J3r:=A=:J J4f---~ --1
J8

J6D

J7D Jl0
Jl1

-- ---

B/C
J12~-_-BiC~~~
-- -- -B/C

--A---

- -8/C---

Console

__Ei/C __
__ BLC __
__ BlC __

. __6/.(:__
J14

--~1g---ec--

J15

An adapter plate is also included to convert four size A inserts (J8-J11) to one size C insert.

Utilization of 1/0 Connection Panel
Cabinet
Option

module

cable

Dlstnbutlon
Panel

Peripheral

Filter

1/0 Connection Panel
The lID Connection Panel for the PDP-11 123-PLUS is a 28.3 cm (11.5 in) by 44.1 cm (18 in) plate located at the
back of the system box. It is used to carry connectors for cables. These cables connect the computer to terminals
and mass storage devices outside the CPU box. The panel is deSigned to Simplify cable management.
PDp-11 123-PLUS options have panel inserts which come in two sizes: size A 2.54 cm x 10.1 cm (1 in x 4 in) and
size C (4 in x 4 in). The panel has space for nine size A inserts (J1 ,-2,-3,-4,-5,-8,-9,-1 0,-11) and four size C
inserts (J12,-13,-14,-15). For ease in ordering options, adapters are included with cabinet kits to enable mounting
size B (6.6 cm x 8.1 cm, 2.6 in x 3.2 in) in size C (10.1 cm x 10.1 cm, 4 in x 4 in). The two connectors labelled J6
and J7 are for the two serial lines provided with every system. An adapter plate is also included to convert four size
A inserts (J8-J11) to one size C insert. The PDP-11/23-PLUS options consist of two distinct parts: 1) the module,
for example, the DZV11 and 2) the cabinet kit, conSisting of the panel insert, in this case one size B with 4 EIA
connectors and the cable to connect the module to the panel insert. Mounting hardware is also included. (See
diagram below.) The Configuring worksheet has space provided for figuring available panel insert space.

1-1 4

Systems

PDP-ll/23-PLUS

SX-RXMMA AND 11 T23 SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
POWER
OPTION

@+5V
USED

AVAILABLE

BUS LOADS

@+12V
USED

AVAILABLE

USED

AVAILABLE

CPU BOX

PANEL INSERTS

USED

AVAILABLE

36_0

USED

AVAILABLE

SIZE C
USED

AVAILABLE

SIZE A

5_0

"/23-PLUS CPU

KDF11-B

4_5 31.5

4.7

512 KB PARITY MOS MEMORY

MSV11-PL

3.6 27.9

4.7

CONTROLLER FOR RL02 DISK DRIVES

RLV12

5.0 22.9

4.6

EXTENDED LSI-11 QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED LSI-" QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED LSI-11 QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED LSI-11 QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED LSI-" QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED LSI-" QUAD SLOT

11 V23-BE SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
BUS LOADS

POWER
OPTION

@+5V
USED

AVAILABLE

@+12V
USED

AVAILABLE

USED

CPU BOX

AVAILABLE

USED

36.0

PANEL INSERTS
SIZE A

AC
AVAILABLE

USED

AVAILABLE

SIZE C
USED

AVAILABLE

5.0

11/23-PLUS CPU

KDF11-B

4.5 31.5

4.7

256 KB PARITY MOS MEMORY

MSV11-PK

3_5 28.0

4.7

CONTROLLER FOR RX02

RXV21

1.8 26.2

4.7

EXTENDED LSI-" QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED LSI-" QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED LSI-11 QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED LSI-" QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED LSI-11 QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED LSI-11 QUAD SLOT

Site Preparation Specifications:
11 T23 and SX-RXMMA

Site Preparation Specifications:
11V23

• Height: 106 em (41.7 in)
• Width: 54 em (21.3 in)
• Depth: 76.2 em (30 in)
• Rear Door Clearance: 48.3 em (19 in)
• Weight: 170.3 kg (375 Ib)
• Watts: 840
• Btu/hr: 2864
• Receptacles:
NEMA #5-15R (120VAC/60Hz)
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

• Height: 106 em (41.7 in)
• Width: 54 em (21.3 in)
• Depth: 76.2 em (30 in)
• Rear Door Clearance: 48.3 em (19 in)
• Weight: 139.6 kg (288 Ib)
• Watts: 380
• Btu/hr: 1297
• Receptacles:
NEMA #5-15R (120VAC/60Hz).
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

Systems

1 -1 5

PDP-ll/23-PLUS Rack-mountable Computer

~D~DD~D PDP 11/23 PLUS

The PDP-11 123-PLUS is available in two rack-mountable variations: a standard 13.3 cm (5.25 in) PDP-11 123-PLUS
and an 8.8 cm (3.5 in) PDP-11/23-S.
The PDP-11 123-PLUS rack-mountable CPU box includes:
• 11 123-PLUS CPU
• 256 or 512 KB memory
• Two serial line units
• Line frequency clock
• Boot and diagnostic ROMs
• Nine slot backplane (seven unused slots)

Site Preparation Specifications:
• Height: 13.3 em (5.25 in)
• Width: 48.3 em (19 in)
• Depth: 68 em (26.8 in)
• Weight: 20 kg (45Ib)
• Watts: 550
• Btu/hr: 1877
• Receptacles:
NEMA #5-15R (120VAC/60Hz),
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

Ordering Information:
11/23-BC(BD)

CPU with 256 KB memory

11/23-BE(BF)

CPU with 512 KB memory

H349

I/O Connection Panel (must be ordered
separately)

1-16

Systems

PDP-ll/23-PlUS Rack-mountable Computer

11/23-BC(BD) SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
OPTION

POWER·
@+5V
@+12V

BUS LOADS

PANEL INSERT SIZE
AC

SIZE A

SIZE C

AVAILAVAILAVAILAVAILAVAILAVAILUSED ABLE USED ABLE USED ABLE USED ABLE USED ABLE USED ABLE

CPU BOX
B
C
11/23-PLUS CPU

256 KB PARITY MaS MEMORY
EXTENDED Q-BUS QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED Q-BUS QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED Q-BUS QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED Q-BUS QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED Q-BUS QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED Q-BUS QUAD SLOT
EXTENDED Q-BUS QUAD SLOT

KDF11-8
MSV11-PK

36.0
4.5 31.5 .3
3.5 28.0 0

5.0
4.7
4.7

1
1

20
19
18

2
2

32
30
28

0
0

0
0
0

0
0

0
0
0

Systems

1-1 7

PDP-ll/23-5 Rack-mountable Computer

•••

The PDP-11/23-S is an 8.8 cm (3.5 in) high, rack-mountable processor offered in two versions, one with NMOS
RAM memory, the other with non-volatile CMOS RAM memory. The 1/0 Connection panel (H3012) for this model
accepts the same system options as the MICRO/PDP-11 and the PDP-11 123-PLUS. The PDP-11 /23-S is not
orderable in a system configuration.
The PDP-11 123-PLUS includes:
• 11 123-PLUS CPU
• 64 KB NMOS RAM or 32KB CMOS RAM memory
• Two serial line units
• Line frequency clock
• 18-bit addressing
• Space for 5 dual-height Q-bus options
• 1/0 Connection Panel with removable templates

Site Preparation Specifications:
• Height: 8.9 cm (3.5 in)
• Width: 48.3 cm (19 in)
• Depth: 38.1 cm (15 in)
• Weight: 18.1 kg (40 Ib)
• Watts: 150 (typical)
• Btu/hr: 51 0
• Receptacles:
NEMA #5-15R (1 20VAC/60Hz)
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

Ordering Information:
11/23-SC(SD)

CPU with 32 KB CMOS memory

11123-SE(SF)

CPU with 64 KB NMOS memory

,---.,
L ___
...J

A
A

PDP-11/23-S 1/0 Connection Panel with Blank Inserts

1-1 8

Systems

PDP-ll/23-S Rackmountable Computer

11/23-SC(SD) SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
POWER-

BUS LOAD
DC

+12

3.5

PANEL INSERTS
AC

SIZE A

SIZE B

6
6
6

SLOT SELECTION

OPTION

SIZE

#1 AlB/C/D

KDF11-B

QUAD

4.5 13.5

3.2

2C/D

MCV11-DC·

DUAL

1.2 11.3

3.2

A
3

2 AlB
3 AlB
3C/D
4C/D
4 AlB
-Not to exceed 110 Watts.

11/23-SE(SF) SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
POWER-

BUS LOAD

+12

3.5

PANEL INSERTS
AC

SIZE A

SIZE B

6
6
6

SLOT SELECTION

OPTION

SIZE

#1 AlB/C/D

KDF11-B

QUAD

4.5 13.5

3.2

2C/D

MSV11-DD

DUAL

1.7 11.8

2.8

A
3

2 AlB
3 AlB
3C/D
4C/D
4 AlB
*Not to exceed 110 Watts.

-,
r ___ ...J
L

Ao,

~c\

)p --(nc\

~ rT{ ~

~p $ I

I $

-$- I

I $

~P -$-

PDP-11/23-S 1/0 Connection Panel with Panel Insert Units

Systems

1-1 9

The PDP-ll UNIBUS Family of Computers

Today Digital offers the PDP-11 /24 and the PDP-11 /44, based on its highly successful UNIBUS technology.
Together these products provide a wide range of minicomputer solutions from small dedicated control, communication, and computational applications, to larger, multi-user business and scientific timesharing systems. The UNIBUS
is a bidirectional, asynchronous interconnect that links these versatile processors with the industry's most
comprehensive set of mass storage systems and communications interfaces. It provides the configuration flexibility
and growth capacity that make these processors ideal solutions for a broad spectrum of applications.
The PDP-11 /24 and the PDP-11 /44 execute a common instruction set, run under the control of any of Digital's
PDP-11 operating systems, and make available the problem solving power of Digital's proven languages, data
management, communications, and networking products.
Both the PDP-11/24 and the PDP-11/44:
• Provide high performance Floating Point and Commercial Instruction Set processor options.
• Offer memory expansion up to 4 MB for enhanced multi-user and realtime performance.
• Permit memory expansion in 1 MB increments.
• Support the microprocessor-based DSA (Digital Storage Architecture) for high density mass storage and reduced
CPU overhead.
• Support the microprocessor-based network communications options for comprehensive system configuration
and resource sharing.
• Offer enhanced system reliability and availability through self-diagnostics and power monitoring, and optional
battery backup and auto restart.
• Include ASCII console logic for system control/debugging with optional console terminal.
• Include two EINCCITT serial interfaces, one for the console terminal and one for expansion.
• Provide compatibility with existing UNIBUS peripheral devices for smooth system upgrades.
• Offer unmatched c~mfiguration flexibility and system growth capacity.
The PDP-11 /24 was designed to provide the basis for compact, low cost application solutions. Its features include a
single board CPU with space for optional Commercial Instruction Set and Floating Point Processor chips. It offers an
optional hardware Floating Point Processor that delivers up to 6 times the performance of the FPP chip. The PDP11/24 provides sophisticated memory management coupled with the extended memory addreSSing option, the
KT24, that provides 4 MB memory addressing. These features combine to give the PDP-11 /24 capabilities that
were previously only available on larger, more powerful PDP-11 s.

1-20

Systems

UNIBUS Family of Computers
The PDP-11 144 was designed to provide a higher level of performance and greater total system capacity, at a
moderate price. It delivers roughly twice the performance of the PDP-11/24, and it is ideally suited for larger, multiuser, departmental level applications. The PDP-11 144's unique features include an 8 KS high speed cache memory,
standard 22-bit extended memory addressing, separate Instruction and Data address space support and three
operating modes. In addition, the PDP-11/44 offers high performance hardware Commercial Instruction Set and
Floating Point Processor options. The PDP-11 144 provides the kind of configuration flexibility and growth capacity
that is characteristic of all PDP-11 s.
The PDP-11 124 and PDP-11 144 are available in four levels of integration:
• The Rack-mountable Computers provide Significant expansion space and memory expansion up to a maximum
of 4 MS.
• The cabinet-mounted Kernel Computers provide a base for OEM system integration.
• The System Building Blocks allow the choice of system and load devices from a variety of disk and tape
subsystems and include the PDP-11 Operating System General License.
• The Packaged Systems include all the necessary hardware and software components (with the exception of the
console terminal) for a complete system.
.
The standard features of all PDP-11 124s and PDP-11 144s are highlighted below. More detailed information is
included in the individual system descriptions.

PDP-11/24 Computer Features:
• Single board CPU with power supply
• 1 MS ECC MOS memory
• Memory expansion up to 4 MS, in 1 MS increments
• Sophisticated memory management
• Two operating modes: kernel and user
• Integral bootstrap with diagnostics
• ASCII console logic
• Line frequency clock
• Two serial line asynchronous
EINCCITT interfaces: one for the
console terminal and one for expansion
• Nine-slot CPU backplane
• 13.3 em (5.25 in) or 26.6 cm (10.5 in) box

PDP-11/44 Computer Features:
• High performance CPU with power supply
• 8 KS high-speed cache memory
• 1 MS ECC MOS memory
• Memory expansion up to 4 MS, in 1 MS increments
• Sophisticated memory management unit
• Three operating modes: kernel,
supervisor and user
• Separate Instruction and Data
address space
• ASCII console logic
• Integral bootstrap with diagnostics
• Line frequency clock
• Two serial line asynchronous
EINCCITT interfaces: one for the
console terminal and one for expansion
• DC voltage monitor
• Fourteen-slot CPU backplane
• 26.6 cm (10.5 in) box

Systems

1-21

UNIBUS Family of Computers
PDP-11/24 Selection Chart
Model

Memory

Mass
Storage
Included

Enclosure

License
Included

Page

11124-CC(CO)

1 MB

None

13.3 em (5.25 in)
Raekmount

1-26

11124-0C(OO)

1 MB

None

26.6 em (10.5 in)
Raekmount

1-28

11 X24-FA(FB)

1 MB

None

H9642 Cabinet

1-32

SX-FX10D-EK(EN)

1 MB

None

H9642 Cabinet

Yes

1-36

SX-FX20D-EK(EN)

1 MB

None

H9645 Cabinet

Yes

1-36

SX-FXGMB-EK(EN)

1 MB

RA80/RL02

H9645 Cabinet

Yes

1-42

SX-FXMMB-EK(EN)

1 MB

(2) RL02s

H9645 Cabinet

Yes

1-40

PDP-11/44 Selection Chart

1-22

Model

Memory

Mass
Storage
Included

Enclosure

License
Included

Page

11144-0A(OB)

1 MB

None

26.6 em (10.5 in)
Raekmount

1-30

11 X44-FA(FB)

1 MB

None

H9642 Cabinet

1-34

SX-4010D-EK(EN)

1 MB

None

H9642 Cabinet

Yes

1-38

SX-4020D-EK(EN)

1 MB

None

H9645 Cabinet

Yes

1-38

SX-40GMB-EK(EN)

1 MB

RA80/RL02

H9645 Cabinet

Yes

1-46

SX-40MMB-EK(EN)

1 MB

(2) RL02s

H9645 Cabinet

Yes

1-44

Systems

UNIBUS Family of Computers
UNIBUS Options Checklist
The following is a list of system options for the PDP-11 124 and PDP-11 144 systems. These options may also be
ordered as field upgrades: order a base option and cabinet kit. The options and all ordering details are described in
Section 2-0ptions, and Section 4-Disks and Tapes.

PDP-11/24 Processor Options

o KEF11-AA

Floating Point Chip

o KEF11-BB
o FPF11

Commercial Instruction Set
Floating Point Processor

PDP-11/44 Processor Options

o KE44-A
o FP11-F

Commercial Instruction Set

o DMP11-BP

DECnet multi-point interface
(V.35/DDS)

o DMP11-CP

DECnet multi-point interface
(Integral Modem)

o DMP11-EP

DECnet multi-point interface
(RS422/CCITT V.24)

o PCL11-B
o KMS11-BD

Floating Point Processor

o DEUNA-AA

Multipoint parallel interface
8-line synchronous communication
front·end processor
Ethernet communication controller

PDP-11124 Memory Options

o MS11-PB
o KT24

1 MB ECC MOS memory

Realtime I/O Options

Physical Address Extension Module 0 ADK11-KT

PDP-11144 Memory Options

48-channel(single-ended) or 24-channel
(differential) expander switch
Parallel interface

o DZ11-DP

8-line asynchronous EIA
multiplexer (modem control)

o DZ11-HP

8-line asynchronous 20mA
multiplexer

o DR11-C
o DR11-KT
o DR11-WP
o DRS11
o DRU11
o 05511
o IEC11
o IEV11
o KW11-K
o KW11-P

o DH11-AP

1 6-line asynchronous DMA
multiplexer (modem control)

Peripherals

o DH11-DP

16-line asynchronous 20mA
multiplexer

o DUP11-AP

FUII- or half-duplex synchronous
interface (modem control)

o DMR11-AP

DECnet point-to-point interface
(RS232-C)

o MS11-PB

1 MB ECC MOS memory

Communication Options

o DL11-AP
o DL11-HP
o DL11-DP

o DMR11-FP

o DMR11-BP

EIA interface (modem control)
20mA serial line interface
EIAICCITT serial line interface
(RS232-CR, modem control)

DECnet point-to-point interface
(RS423/CCITT V.24)
DECnet point-to-point interface
(V.35/DDS)

o DMR11-CP

DECnet point-to-point interface
(Integral Modem)

o DMR11-EP

DECnet point-to-point interface
(RS422/CCITT V.24)

o DMP11-AP

DECnet multi-point interface
(RS232-C)

o DMP11-FP

DECnet multi-point interface
(RS423/CCITT V.24)

AD11-K converter and KW11-K realtime clock

o AM11-K

o RUASD-AA
o RUAS1-AA
o RUA6D-CA
o RL211-AK
o RX211-BK
o TUSD-AA
o TJE16-AA
o TJU77-AB
o TU5S-DA

Parallel interface
General purpose DMA parallel interface
Digital output
Buffered DMA parallel interface
Digital input
IEEE interface
IEEE interface
Dual programmable realtime clock
Programmable realtime clock

1 21 MB fixed Winchester disk
456 MB fixed Winchester disk
205 MB removable disk
10MB cartridge disk
Dual floppy diskette subsystem
Magnetic tape (25/100 in/s)
Magnetic tape (45 in/s)
Magnetic tape (1 25 in/s)
Cartridge tape (30 in/s)

Systems

1-23

UNIBUS Family of Computers
Configuring UNIBUS Systems
I/O Connector Panel
The liD Connector Panel (IOCP) provides the transition between internal cabling and the external shielded cabling to
peripheral devices. All cables that enter or exit cabinets must pass through the 10CP.
The liD panel system is comprised of three components: an internal cable that originates at the option module or
controller, a shielded external cable that attaches the I/O panel to the peripheral, and an liD Connector Panel Insert
that mounts in the 10CP and joins the internal and external cables. With the 10CP, the Connector Insert provides the
shielding and filtering necessary to contain potential interference within the cabinet.
The liD panel is provided as part of the CPU system cabinet. The Connector Insert and internal cable are provided
with the specific option.
The capacity of the liD panel varies with the cabinet and CPU type. The type and style of inserts varies depending
on the amount and type of connectors required by the option. Each 110 panel accepts multiple inserts. Unused I/O
panel space is filled with blank inserts to maintain shielding continuity.

Horizontal 1/0 Connection Panel
Standard on H9642 CPU Cabinets

Blank panel unit total of 12 panel units
available for option connection

Dedicated panel unit
for SLU connector

. ~~ I'i~
~J~j~

li/

Dedicated panel space /
for 877 power controller

1·24

Systems

UNIBUS Family of Computers

Vertical 1/0 Connection Panel
Standard on H9645 CPU Cabinets

Dedicated panel space
for RL02 connector

Dedicated panel space
for 2 SLU connectors~_ _--L.J I
~-l---- Blank panel unit-

total of 12 panel units
available for option connection

Dedicated panel space
for 877 power controller

Systems

1-25

PDP-ll/24 Rack-mountable Computers

PDP-ll 124 5.25 inch Rack-mountable Computer
The PDP-11 124 is offered in a 13.3 cm (5.25 in) industry-standard, rack-mountable variation. This compact
enclosure accommodates a maximum of 1 MB of memory.

Site Preparation Specifications:

11124-CC(CD)
The 11 124-CC(CD) includes the following:
• PDP-11 124 CPU and power supply
• KT24 Physical Address Extension (PAX) module
• 1 MB ECC MOS memory (MS11-PB)
• 13.3 cm (5.25 in) rack-mountable box

1-26

Systems

• Height: 13.3 cm (5.25 in)
• Wiath: 42.2 cm (16.6 in)
• Depth: 69 cm (26 in)
• Weight: 20 kg (45Ib)
• Watts: 1 76 as configured
500 in maximum configuration
• Btu/hr: 598/1700
• Receptacles:
NEMA #5-15R (120VAC/60Hz), #6-15R(240VACI
50Hz)

PDP-ll/24 Rack-mountable Computers

11/24-CC(CD) SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
DC POWER
OPTION

@+5V

@+15V

@-15V

BUS LOADS

AVAILAVAILAVAILAVAILUSED ABLE USED ABLE USED ABLE USED ABLE

CPU BOX

/'
1

11/24 CPU
PHYSICAL ADDRESS EXTENSION

1 MB-ECC

:5a.

11/24
KT24
MS11-PB

32
3
2
6.0 26 .6 2.4 .1 1.9
4.5 21.5 .001 2.4 .001 1.9
4.8 16.7 0 2.4 0 1.9

20
19
18
17

1
1
1

lI:::

<I:

[Il

:::l

a.
U
v

"'-

UNIBUS
TERMINATOR

QUAD SLOT

CARRY TO NEXT BOX ~

NOTE:
Maximum memory capacity is 1 MS11-PB module or 3 MS11-LD modules. The second slot in the 11/24 backplane
is reserved for the 11/24 physical address extension option (KT24).

* Each MS11-LO or MS11-PB consumes one bus load in the PDP-11/24. Each MS11-LD or MS11-PB consumes
no bus loads in the PDP-11 144.

Systems

1-27

PDP-ll/24 Rack-mountable Computers

PDP-ll 124 10.5 inch Rack-mountable Computer
The PDP-11/24 is available in a 26.6 cm (10.5 in) rack-mountable variation that provides significantly more
expansion space. This box configuration offers memory expansion to a maximum of 4 MB using MS11-PB memory
modules. Power and space for the addition of 4 System Units are provided.

11/24-DC(DD)
The 11 124-DC(DD) includes the following:
• PDP-11 124 CPU and power supply
• KT24 Physical Address Extension (PAX) module
• 1 MB ECC MOS memory (MS11-PB)
• Four System Units of additional expansion space
• Rack-mountable 26.6 cm (10.5 in) box

Site Preparation Specifications:
•
•
•
•
•

Height: 26.3 cm (10.4 in)
Width: 42.2 cm (16.6 in)
Depth: 69 cm (26 in)
Weight: 40.9 kg (90 Ib)
Watts: 262 as configured
1350 in maximum configuration
• Btu/hr: 890/4600
• Receptacles:
NEMA #5-20R (120VAC/60Hz),#6-20R (240VACI
50Hz)

1-28

Systems

PDP-ll/24 Rack-mountable Computers

11124-DC(DD) SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
DC POWER
OPTION

@+5V
USED

CPU BOX

/
1
UJ

AVAILABLE

@+15V
USED

103.5

AVAILABLE

@-15V
USED

3.0

AVAILABLE

BUS LOADS
USED

3.0

AVAILABLE

11/24 CPU

11/24

6.0 97.5

2.4

2.9

PHYSICAL ADDRESS EXTENSION

KT24

4.5

.001

2.4 .001

2.9

1 MB ECC MOS MEMORY

MS11-PB

4.8 88.2

2.4

:J
Q.

'"«

c.>
CD

::J

c.>

'"
2

UNIBUS
TERMINATOR

QUAD SLOT

CARRY TO NEXT BOX ~

"--

NOTE:
System units 3 to 6 can be used for module expansion by adding DD11-CK or DD11-DK backplanes.
The DD11-CK occupies one SU and allows 2 quad and 2 hex slots for expansion. The DD11-DK occupies two SU and
gives 2 quad and 7 hex slots for expansion.
Maximum memory capacity is 4 MS11-PB modules.
*Each MS11-LO or MS11-PB consumes one bus load in the PDP-11/24. Each MS11-LD or MS11-PB consumes
no bus loads in the PDP-11 /44.

Systems

1-29

PDP-ll/44 Rack-mountable Computer

The PDP-11 144 is available in a 26.6 cm (10.5 in) rack-mountable version. It offers memory expansion up to 4 MB
in the four pre-wired slots in the CPU backplane. The PDP-11/44 computer provides ample power and expansion
space for configuration flexibility.

11144-DA(DB)
The PDP-11 144-DA(DB) includes the following:
• PDP-11 144 CPU and power supply
• 1 MB ECC MOS Memory (MS11-PB)
• Three system units of additional expansion space
plus one hex and one quad slot
• Rack-mountable 26.6 cm (1 0.5 in) box

Site Preparation Specifications:
• Height: 26.3 cm (10.4 in)
• Width: 42.2 cm (16.6 in)
• Depth: 69 cm (26 in)
• Weight: 42.2 kg (93Ib)
• Watts: 379 as configured
1350 in maximum configuration
• Btu/hr: 1290/4100
• Receptacles:
NEMA #5-20R (120VAC/60Hz), #6-15R (240VAC/
50Hz)

1 -30

Systems

PDP-ll/44 Rack-mountable Computer

11/44-DA(DB) SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
DC POWER
OPTION

@+5V
USED

CPU BOX

AVAILABLE

@+15V
USED

AVAILABLE

@-15V
USED

3.0

103.5

AVAILABLE

BUS LOADS
USED

3.0

AVAILABLE

CIM

RESERVED FOR CIS (KE44-A)

RESERVED FOR FLOATING POINT PROCESSOR
(FP11-F)

11144 CPU

11/44 CPU

1 MB MOS MEMORY

MS11-PB

4.8

c..
~

<
al

c..

..,.

RESERVED FOR MEMORY
RESERVED FOR MEMORY

RESERVED FOR MEMORY
HEX SLOT

UNIBUS
TERMINATOR

QUAD SLOT

5
SU

6
SU

CARRY TO NEXT BOX ~

'---

Note: System units 4 to 6 can be used for module expansion by adding DD11-CK or DD11-DK backplanes. The
DD11-CK occupies (1) SU and allows (2) quad and (2) hex slots for expansion. The DD11-DK occupies (2) SU and
gives (2) quad and (7) hex slots for expansion.
* Each MS11-LD or MS11-PB consumes one bus load in the PDP-11/24. Each MS11-LD or MS11-PB consumes
no bus loads in the PDP-11/44.

Systems

1-31

PDP-ll/24 Kernel Computer

The POP-11 124 is available in a cabinet-mounted model. It provides a foundation for building tailored system
configurations and includes the 11 124-0C(OO) box product housed in an H9642 CPU cabinet.
This configuration includes:
• POP-11 124 CPU and power supply
• KT24 Physical Address Extension (PAX) module
• 1 MB ECC MOS memory (MS11-PB)
• Four System Units of additional expansion space
• lID Connection Panel
• H9642 CPU cabinet with power controller
• 26.6 cm (10.5 in) mounting space at the top of the cabinet that will accommodate one of the following: RA80,
RA81,RL02,RX02,TU58

Site Prepa[ation Specifications:

Ordering Information:

CPU Cabinet

11X24-FA(FB)

• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 54.1 cm (21.3 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 135 kg (298 Ib)
• Watts: 262 as configured
1350 in maximum configuration
• Btu/hr: 890/4600
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (120VAC/60Hz),
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

1-32

Systems

PDP-11/24 Kernel in standard H9642
cabinet

PDP-ll/24 Kernel Computer

11 X24-FA(FB) SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
DC POWER
OPTION

@+5V
USED

CPU BOX

11/24 CPU
PHYSICAL ADDRESS EXTENSION

1
UJ

1 MB MOS MEMORY

:5c..

11/24

KT24
MS11-PB

AVAILABLE

@+15V
USED

103.5
6.0 97.5 .6
4.5 93 .001
4.8 88.2 0

AVAILABLE

@-15V
USED

AVAILABLE

3.0
3.0
2.4 .1 2.9
2.4 .001 2.9
2.4 0 2.9

BUS LOADS
USED

AVAILABLE

1
1
1

20
19
18
17

PANEL
UNITS
USED

AVAILABLE

:.::

()
c(

In
:::J

c..

()
~

UNIBUS
TERMINATOR

QUAD SLOT

CARRY TO NEXT BOX ~ L....-Note: Maximum memory capacity is 4 MB using MS11-PB modules. The second slot in the 11/24 backplane is
reserved for the physical address extension option (KT24).
* Each MS11-LD or MS11-PB consumes one bus load in the PDP-11/24. Each MS11-LD or MS11-PB consumes
no bus loads in the PDP-11 144.

Systems

1-33

PDP~ 11/44 Kernel Computers

The PDP-11 /44 is available in a cabinet-mounted variation. This configuration is built around the 11 /44-DA(DB) box
product and housed in an H9642 CPU cabinet. The kernel is intended to provide a foundation for building system
configurations tailored for unique applications.
This configuration includes: •
• PDP-11 /44 CPU and power supply
• 1 MB ECC MOS memory (MS11-PB)
• Three system units of additional expansion space
• I/O Connection Panel
• H9642 cabinet with power controller
• 26.6 cm (10.5 in) mounting space at the top of the cabinet which will accommodate one of the following: RA80,
RA81,RL02,RX02,TU58

Site Preparation Specifications:
Cabinet
• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 54.1 cm (21.3 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 137 kg (302Ib)
• Watts: 379 as configured
1350 in maximum configuration
• Btu/hr: 1290/4600
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (120VAC/60Hz),
#6·15R (240VAC/50Hz)

Ordering Information:
11X44-FA(FB)

1-34

PDP-11/44 Kernel in H9642 cabinet

Systems

PDP-11/44 Kernel Computers

11X44-FA(FB) SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
DC POWER
OPTION

@+5V
USED

CPU BOX

AVAILABLE

@+15V
USED

103.5

AVAILABLE

@-15V
USED

AVAILABLE

BUS LOADS
USED

USED

3.0

AVAILABLE

PANEL
UNITS
AVAILABLE

CIM

RESERVED FOR CIS (KE44-A)

RESERVED FOR FLOATING POINT
PROCESSOR (FP11-F)

:5CI.

:.:
()
<
CD

11/44 CPU

1 MB MOS MEMORY

MS11-PB

4.8

:::l
CI.
()

....

RESERVED FOR MEMORY
RESERVED FOR MEMORY

RESERVED FOR MEMORY
HEX SLOT

UNIBUS
TERMINATOR

QUAD SLOT

4
SU

5
SU

6
SU

CARRY TO NEXT BOX ~ ' - - -

Systems

1-35

PDP-ll/24 Building Blocks

The PDP-11 /24 is offered in two building block variations that consist of a 26.6 cm (10.5 in) box computer, a
cabinet with power controller, and the PDP-11 Operating System General License. The standard width cabinet
(H9642) variation provides expansion mounting space for one 26.6 cm (10.5 in) or 13.3 cm (5.25 in) disk or tape
option. The wide cabinet (H9645) provides expansion mounting space for two 26.6 cm (10.5 in) or 13.3 cm (5.25
in) devices. The expansion mounting space may be used for Digital mass storage devices or customer equipment.
Select from the list of storage products included under ordering information. Note: The RA60 requires a deeper
cabinet (H9642-AP(AR)) and therefore, cannot be mounted in either of these cabinets.
The PDP-11 /24 Building Blocks include
the following:
• CPU and power supply
• 1 MB ECC MOS memory (MS11-PB)
• I/O Connection Panel
• PDP-11 Operating System General License
• BC22D EIA cable for console terminal
• H9642 or H9645 CPU cabinet
with power controller
• KT24 Physical Address Extension module

Ordering Information:
SX-FX10o-

EK(EN)

PDP-11/24 Standard cabinet building
block

Cabinet
TU58-DA
accommodates RUA80-AA
one:
RUA81-AA
RL211-AK
RX211-BK
SX-FX20o-

PDP-11 124 wide cabinet building block

EK(EN)
Cabinet
Same list as above. Due to AC power
accommodates limitations, a maximum of one RA801
two:
RA81 is allowed per cabinet.

1-36

Systems

Site Preparation Specifications:
H9642 Cabinet
• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 54.1 cm (21.3 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 137 kg (302Ib)
• Watts: 262 as configured
1350 in maximum configuration
• Btu/hr: 890/4600
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (120VAC/60Hz),
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

Site Preparation Specifications:
H9645 CPU Cabinet
• Height: 106 cm (41 .7 in)
• Width: 73.6 cm (29 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 162 kg (358Ib)
• Watts: 262 as configured
1350 in maximum configuration
• Btu/hr: 890/4600
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (120VAC/60Hz),
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

PDP-ll/24 Building Blocks

SX-FX1 OD-EK(EN) AND SX-FX200-EK(EN) SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
DC POWER
OPTION

@+5V
USED

CPU BOX

11/24 CPU

PHYSICAL ADDRESS EXTENSION-

1
UJ

1 MB MOS MEMORY

:5CL

11124

KT24
MS11-PB

AVAILABLE

@+15V
USED

103.5
6.0 97.5 .6
4.5 93 .001
4.8 88.2 0

AVAILABLE

@-15V
USED

AVAILABLE

3.0
3.0
2.4 .1 2.9
2.4 .001 2.9
2.4 0 2.9

BUS LOADS
USED

AVAILABLE

1
1
1

20
19
18
17

PANEL
UNITS
USED

AVAILABLE

:.::

()

CD
:l

()
~

UNIBUS
TERMINATOR

QUAD SLOT

CARRY TO NEXT BOX ~

Note: Maximum memory capacity is 4 MB using MS11-PB modules. The second slot in the 11/24 backplane is
reserved for the physical address extension option (KT24).
* Each MS11-LO or MS11-PB consumes one bus load in the PDP-11 /24. Each MS11-LD or MS11-PB consumes
no bus loads in the PDP-11/44 ..
Systems

1-37

PDP-11/44 Building Blocks

The PDp·11/44 is offered in two building block variations that consist of a 26.6 cm (10.5 in) box computer, a
cabinet with power controller, and the PDp·11 Operating System General License. The standard width cabinet
(H9642) variation provides expansion mounting space for one 26.6 cm (10.5 in) or 13.3 cm (5.25 in) disk or tape
option. The wide cabinet (H9645) provides expansion mounting space for two 26.6 cm (10.5 in) or 13.3 cm (5.25
in) devices. The expansion mounting space may be used for Digital mass storage devices or customer equipment.
Select from the list of storage products included under ordering information. Note: The RA60 requires a deeper
cabinet (H9642·AP(AR)) and therefore, cannot be mounted in either of these cabinets.
The PDp·11/44 Building Blocks include
the following:
• CPU and power supply
• 1 MB ECC MOS memory (MS11·PB)
• 1/0 Connection Panel
• PDp·11 Operating System General License
• BC22D EIA cable for console terminal
• H9642 or H9645 CPU cabinet
with power controller

Ordering Information:
SX-4010o-

EK(EN)

PDp·11/44 Standard cabinet building
block

Cabinet
TU58·DA
accommodates RUA80·AA
one:
RUAS1-AA
RL211-AK
RX211-BK
SX-4020o-

PDp-11/44 wide cabinet building block

EK(EN)
Same list as above. Due to AC power
Cabinet
accommodates limitations, a maximum of one RASOI
two:
RAS1 is allowed per cabinet.

1-3S

Systems

Site Preparation Specifications:
H9642 Cabinet
• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 54.1 cm (21.3 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 137 kg (302 Ib)
• Watts: 379 as configured
1350 in maximum configuration
• Btu/hr: 1290/4100
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5·30R (120VAC/60Hz),
#6·15R (240VAC/50Hz)

Site Preparation Specifications:
H9645 CPU Cabinet
• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 73.6 cm (29 in)
• Depth: SO cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 162 kg (35Slb)
• Watts: 379 as configured
1350 in maximum configuration
• Btu/hr:1290/41 00
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (120VAC/60Hz).
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

PDP-ll/44 Building Blocks

SX-4010D-EK(EN) AND SX-40200-EK(EN) SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
DC POWER
OPTION

@+5V
USED

CPU BOX

CIM

AVAILABLE

@+15V
USED

103.5

AVAILABLE

@-15V
USED

AVAILABLE

BUS LOADS
USED

3.0

AVAILABLE

PANEL
UNITS
USED

AVAILABLE

RESERVED FOR CIS (KE44-A)

RESERVED FOR FLOATING POINT
PROCESSOR (FP11-F)

:5Il.

x:
<
lD

11/44 CPU

1 MB MOS MEMORY

MS11-PB

4.8

(,)

:J
Il.

(,)

RESERVED FOR MEMORY
RESERVED FOR MEMORY

RESERVED FOR MEMORY
HEX SLOT

"'-

UNIBUS
TERMINATOR

QUAD SLOT

4
SU

5
SU

6
SU

CARRY TO NEXT BOX ~ I.....-.Note: System units can be used for module expansion by adding DD11-CK or DD11-DK backplanes. The DD11-CK
occupies (1) SU and allows (2) quad and (2) hex slots for expansion. The DD11-DK occupies (2) SU and gives (2)
quad and (7) hex slots for expansion.

* Each MS11-LD or MS11-PB consumes one bus load in the PDP-11/24. Each MS11-LD or MS11-PB consumes
no bus loads in the PDP-11 144.

Systems

1-39

PDP-ll/24 Dual Rl02 Packaged System

The PDP-11/24 Dual RL02 system configuration provides all the standard features of the PDP-11/24 DC(DD) box
product plus 20.8 MB of disk storage capacity.
The PDP-11 /24 Dual RL02 System includes:
• PDP-11 /24 CPU and power supply
• KT24 Physical Address Extension (PAX) module
• 1 MB ECC MOS memory (MS11-PB)
• Four System Units of additional expansion space
• H9645 wide CPU cabinet with power controller

• Two RL02 10.4 MB removable-cartridge disk
drives and controller
• One BC22D-25 EIA cable for a console terminal
(console terminal not included)
• I/O Connection Panel
• PDP-11 Operating System General License

CPU Cabinet Expansion
The CPU cabinet provides side mounting space for an optional H7750 battery backup unit and the I/O Connection
Panel provides mounting space for option panel inserts.

Memory Expansion
Three additional MS11-PB memory modules may be added for memory expansion in 1 MB increments (maximum
memory capacity is 4 MB).

Mass Storage Expansion
The RL02 disk controller can accommodate up to four RL02 disk drives. Two additional drives may be added to this
system configuration. An H9642 disk cabinet is required.

Site Preparation Specifications:

Ordering Information:

H9645 CPU Cabinet

SX-FXMMBEK(EN)

•
•
•
•
•

Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
Width: 73.6 cm (29 in)
Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
Weight: 230 kg (5061b)
Watts: 544 as configured
1 500 in maximum configuration
• Btu/hr: 1850/5100
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (120VAC/60Hz),
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

1-40

Systems

PDP-11/24 Dual RL02 Packaged System

PDP-ll/24 Dual RL02 Packaged System

SX-FXMMB-EK(EN) SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
DC POWER
OPTION

@+5V
USED

CPU BOX

/
1

11/24 CPU
PHYSICAL ADDRESS EXTENSION

:.:
0

1 MB MOS MEMORY

AVAILABLE

@+15V
USED

KT24
MS11-PB

103.5
6.0 97.5 0.6
4.5 93 .001
4.8 88.2 0

RL211

5.0

11/24

AVAILABLE

@-15V
USED

AVAILABLE

3.0
2.4 0.1
2.4 .001
2.4 0

3.0
2.9
2.9
2.9

BUS LOADS
USED

AVAILABLE

1
1
1

20
19
18
17

PANEL
UNITS
USED

AVAILABLE

HEX SLOT

ED
:::l

HEX SLOT

HEX SLOT
HEX SLOT
CONTROLLER FOR RL02

UNIBUS
TERMINATOR

0.5

QUAD SLOT

CARRY TO NEXT BOX ~ ' - - - - Note: System units 3 to 6 can be used for module expansion by adding DD11-CK or DD11-DK backplanes. The
DD11-CK occupies (1) SU and allows (2) quad and (2) hex slots for expansion. The DD11-DK occupies (2) SU and
gives (2) quad and (7) hex slots for expansion.

* Each MS11-LO or MS11-PB consumes one bus load in the PDP-11 124. Each MS11-LD or MS11-PB consumes
no bus loads in the PDP-11 /44.

Systems

1-41

PDP-ll/24 RA80/RL02 Packaged System

The PDP-11 /24 RA80/RL02 configuration provides all the standard features of the PDP-11 /24-DC(DD) box product
and 1 21 MB fixed and 10MB removable disk storage.
The PDP-11/24 RA80/RL02 System includes:
• PDP-11 124 CPU and power supply
• KT24 Physical Address Extension (PAX) module
• 1 MB ECC MOS memory (MS11-PB)
• Four System Units of additional expansion space
• One 121 MB RA80 disk drive and UDA50 controller
• One 10.4 MB RL02 removable-cartridge disk drive
and controller
• H9645 wide CPU cabinet with power controller
• One BC22D-25 EIA cable for a console terminal (console terminal not included)
• I/O Connection Panel
• PDP-11 Operating System General License

CPU Cabinet Expansion
The CPU cabinet provides side mounting space for an optional H7750 battery backup unit and the I/O Connection
Panel provides mounting space for option panel inserts.

Memory Expansion
Additional MS11-PB memory modules may be added for memory expansion in 1 MB increments (maximum memory
capacity is 4 MB).

Mass Storage Expansion
The RA80 and RL02controliers in this system can accommodate up to four drives each. Three RA80, RA81 , or
RA60 drives and three RL02 disk drives may be added. Additional H9642 disk cabinets are required.

Site Preparation Specifications:
CPU Cabinet
• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 73.6 cm (29 in)
• Depth: 76.2 cm (30 in)
• Weight: 264 kg (582 Ib)
• Watts: 1 240 as configured
2250 in maximum configuration
• BTu/hr: 410017650
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (120VAC/60Hz),
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

1-42

Systems

Ordering Information:
SX-FXGMBEK(EN)

PDP-11/24
System

RA80/RL02

Packaged

PDP-ll/24 RA80/RL02 Packaged System

SX-FXGMB-EK(EN) SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
DC POWER
OPTION

@+5V
USED

CPU BOX

AVAILABLE

@+15V
USED

103.5

AVAILABLE

@-15V
USED

3.0

AVAILABLE

BUS LOADS
USED

3.0

AVAILABLE

11/24

6.0 97.5 0.6

2.4

0.1

2.9

PHYSICAL ADDRESS EXTENSION

KT24

4.5

2.4 .001

2.9

1 MB MOS MEMORY

MS11-PB

~
:.:

CONTROLLER FOR RL02

RL211

UDA50

12.75

USED

AVAILABLE

11/24 CPU

PANEL
UNITS

.001

4.8 88.2

2.4

2.9

5.0 83.2 0.5

1.9

0.5

2.4

..::

III

HEX SLOT

::J

..
a.

HEX SLOT

CONTROLLER FOR RASO

UNIBUS
TERMINATOR

.04

1.3

QUAD SLOT

CARRY TO NEXT BOX ~

Note: System units 3 to 6 can be used for module expansion by adding DD11-CK or DD11-DK backplanes. The
DD11-CK occupies (1) SU and allows (2) quad and (2) hex slots for expansion. The DD11-DK occupies (2) SU and
gives (2) quad and (7) hex slots for expansion.
* Each MS11-LD or MS11-PB consumes one bus load in the PDP-11/24. Each MS11-LD or MS11-PB consumes
no bus loads in the PDP-11 /44.

Systems

1-43

PDP-11/44 Dual Rl02 Packaged System

The PDP-11/44 Dual RL02 system configuration provides all the standard features of the PDP-11/44-DA(DB) and
20.8 MB of removable mass storage capacity.
The PDP-11 144 Dual RL02 System includes:
• PDP-11/44 CPU and power supply
• 1 MB ECC MOS memory (MS11-PB)
• H9645 wide CPU cabinet with power controller
• Two RL02 10.4 MB removable cartridge disk drives
and controller
• One BC22D-25 EIA cable for console terminal
(console terminal not included)
• 1/0 Connection Panel
• PDP-11 Operating System General License

CPU Cabinet Expansion
The CPU cabinet provides expansion space for the optional H7750 battery backup unit, and the I/O Connection
Panel provides mounting space for option panel inserts.

Memory Expansion
The PDP-11 144 CPU backplane provides four dedicated slots for memory expansion. In this configuration there are
three slots available for memory expansion in 1 MB increments (maximum memory capacity is 4 MB).

Mass Storage Expansion
The RL211 disk controller supports up to 4 RL02 drives. Two more RL02 drives may be added to this system. An
additional H9642 cabinet is required.

Site Preparation Specifications:
CPU Cabinet
• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 73.6 cm (29 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 232 kg (510 Ib)
• Watts: 640 as configured
1 500 in maximum configuration
• Btu/hr: 2175/5100
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (120VAC/60Hz),
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

1-44

Systems

Ordering Information:
SX-40MMBEK(EN)

PDP-11/44 RL02 Packaged System

PDP-ll/44 Dual RL02 Packaged System

SX-40MMB-EK(EN) SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
DC POWER
OPTION

@+5V
USED

CPU BOX

AVAILABLE

@+15V
USED

103.5

AVAILABLE

@-15V
USED

AVAILABLE

BUS LOADS
USED

3.0

AVAILABLE

PANEL
UNITS
USED

AVAILABLE

CIM

RESERVED FOR CIS

RESERVED FLOATING POINT PROCESSOR

11/44 CPU

1 MB MOS MEMORY

MS11-PB

4.8

RL211

5.0

c..

:.:

t.)

:::l

..
c..

t.)

RESERVED FOR ECC MOS MEMORY

IRESERVED FOR ECC MOS MEMORY

RESERVED FOR ECC MOS MEMORY
CONTROLLER FOR RL02 DISK DRIVES

UNIBUS
TERMINATOR

QUAD SLOT

5
SU

6
SU

CARRY TO NEXT BOX ~

Note: System units 4 to 6 can be used for module expansion by adding DD11-CK or DD11-DK backplanes. The
DD11-CK occupies (1) SU and allows (2) quad and (2) hex slots for expansion. The DD11-DK occupies (2) SU and
gives (2) quad and (2) hex slots for expansion.
* Each MS11-LO or MS11-PB consumes one bus load in the PDP-11 124. Each MS11-LD or MS11-PB consumes
no bus loads in the PDP-11 144.

Systems

1-45

PDP-11/44 RA80/Rl02 Packaged System

The PDP-11/44 RA80/RL02 system provides all the standard features of the PDP-11/44-DA{DB) box product plus
an expansion backplane and 121 MB fixed and 10.4 MB removable disk storage.
The PDP-11/44 RA80/RL02 System includes:
• PDP-11 144 CPU and power supply
• 1 MB ECC MOS memory
• DD11-DK 9-slot expansion backplane
• One 1 21 MB RA80 disk drive
and UDA50 controller
• One RL02 10.4 MB removable cartridge disk drive
and controller

• One BC22D-25 EIA cable for console terminal
(console terminal not included)
• H9645 wide CPU cabinet with power controller
• 1/0 Connection Panel
• PDP-11 Operating System General License

CPU Cabinet Expansion
The CPU cabinet provides expansion space for an optional H7750 battery backup unit and the 1/0 Connection
Panel provides mounting space for option panel inserts.

Memory Expansion
The CPU backplane provides three slots for memory expansion using MS11-PB modules (maximum memory
capacity is 4 MB).

Mass Storage
The RL02 and UDA50 disk controllers in this system can accommodate up to four drives each. Three RA80, RA81
or RA60 disk drives and three RL02 disk drives may be added. Additional H9642 disk cabinets are required.

Site Preparation Specifications:

Ordering Information:

CPU Cabinet

SX-40GMBEK{EN)

• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 73.6 cm (29 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 266 kg (586Ib)
• Watts: 1 360 as configured
2250 in maximum configuration
• Btu/hr: 4625/7650
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (120VAC/60Hz),
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

1 -46 Systems

PDP-11/44 RA80/RL02 System

PDP-11/44 RA80/RL02 Packaged System

SX-40GMB-EK(EN) SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR
DC POWER
OPTION

@+5V
USED

CPU BOX

AVAILABLE

@+15V
USED

103.5

AVAILABLE

@-15V
USED

AVAILABLE

BUS LOADS
USED

USED

AVAILABLE

3.0

AVAILABLE

PANEL
UNITS

CIM

RESERVED FOR CIS

RESERVED FOR FLOATING POINT
PROCESSOR

11/44 CPU

1 MB MOS MEMORY

MS11-PB

4.8

RL211

5.0

UDA50

12.75

.04

1.3

c..

:.::
(,)
«
[Il
:J

c..

(,)

......

RESERVED FOR ECC MOS MEMORY
RESERVED FOR ECC MOS MEMORY

RESERVED FOR ECC MOS MEMORY
CONTROLLER FOR RL02

1
I

UNIBUS
UNIBUS

QUAD SLOT
QUAD SLOT

HEX SLOT

:.::

HEX SLOT
HEX SLOT

HEX SLOT

CONTROLLER FOR RASO DISK DRIVE

UNIBUS
TERMINATOR

QUAD SLOT

CARRY TO NEXT BOX ~ L . . . . . - -

Note: System unit 6 can be used for module expansion by adding a DD11-CK backplane, which will provide (2)
quad and (2) hex slots.

* Each MS11-LO or MS11-PB consumes one bus load in the PDP-11/24. Each MS11-LD or MS11-PB consumes
no bus loads in the PDP-11/44.

Systems 1-47

UNIBUS CPU Cabinets

Two CPU cabinets are available for integrating the PDP-11 /24 and PDP-11 /44 CPU boxes with Digital's mass
storage devices or non-Digital mounting boxes. These cabinets feature a centered, shielded enclosure and shielded
cable duct that is routed to an I/O Connection Panel. When mounted in this shield and used with appropriate
interfaces and I/O Connection Panel inserts, the PDP-11/24 and PDP-11 /44 comply with FCC RF emission
regulations as Class A systems. The top and bottom mounting spaces are not shielded, and only Class A compliant
equipment should be mounted in them. Digital's disk subsystems are RF shielded at the box level, and may be
mounted in these spaces. Note: Because of its depth, the RA60 disk subsystem cannot be mounted in this cabinet.
It requires its own deep H9642-AP(AR) cabinet. BA 11 expander boxes cannot be mounted in the CPU cab. The I/O
is routed to the connection panel, which provides 12 panel units of mounting space.
The CPU cabinets are supplied with power controllers capable of furnishing 24 amps of 120VAC or 12 amps of
240VAC.

Ordering Information:
H9642-EA(EB)

H9645-EA(EB}

1-48 Systems

CPU cabinet includes mounting space
for a 26.6 cm (10.5 in) or 13.3 cm
(5.25 in) CPU, one additional 26.6 cm
(10.5 in) or 13.3 cm (5.25 in) device,
and a battery backup unit. The I/O Connection Panel is included.
Wide CPU cabinet provides mounting
space for a 26.6 cm (10.5 in) CPU and
two additional 26.6 cm (10.5 in) or
13.3 cm (5.25 in) devices. Side mounting space is provided for the battery
backup unit. The I/O Connection Panel
is included. Because of AC power
constraints, only one RA80 or RA81
disk subsystem may be mounted in this
cabinet. The Digital disk subsystems
which may be mounted in these cabinets include the RUA80-AA(AD),
RUA81-AA(AD), RL211-AK, RX211BK(BN), and the TU58-DA.

Site Preparation Specifications:
H9642-EA(EB)
• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 53.9 cm (21.2 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 91.7 kg (202Ib)
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (120VAC/60Hz),
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

H9645-EA(EB)
• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 73.6 cm (29 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 117 kg (258Ib)
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (120VAC/60Hz),
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

UNIBUS Expander Cabinets

11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111I111I1
1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111I111111

H9642-FA(FB)

Partitioned expander cabinet provides
mounting space for a BA 11 -KU(KV)
UNIBUS expander box and one 26.6
cm (10.5 in) device. The expander box
mounts in the RFI shielded central position, and together with a shielded cable
duct and an I/O Connection Panel (13
panel units of space) provides an expansion enclosure for Digital options.
The top 26.6 cm (10.5 in) mounting
space is unshielded and can be used to
mount any of the Digital disk subsystems listed for the UNIBUS CPU cabinets.

Site Preparation Specifications:
• Height: 106 cm (41 .75 in)
• Width: 52 cm (20.25 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 68 kg (150 Ibs)
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (1 20Vac/60Hz),
#6-15R (240Vac/50 Hz)

Systems

1-49

UNIBUS Expander Cabinets

1II111111111111111111111111111111111111JIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
1\111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
III11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111·
11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
mlllllllllllllllllll,llllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll111111111111

Expander cabinets are furnished without side panels. They are bolted to the right end of H9642 or H9645 CPU
cabinets. The existing right side panel of the CPU cabinet is then used as the right side panel of the expander
cabinet. A UNIBUS cable passes through a shielded port between the cabinets. I/O Connection Panel inserts for all
options must be located in the same cabinet which contains the associated device controller interface. Expander
cabinets are supplied with power controllers capable of furnishing 24 amps of 1 20VAC or 1 2 amps of 240VAC.

Ordering Information:
H9642-FC(FD)

1-50 Systems

Unpartitioned expander cabinet provides mounting space for a BA 11KU(KV) UNIBUS expander box and two
I/O Connection Panels, for a total of 29
panel units of I/O connection space. No
disk/tape options can be mounted in
this cabinet.

Site Preparation Specifications:
• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 52 cm (20.2 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 68 kg (150 Ib)
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (120VAC/60Hz),
#6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

Mass Storage Cabinets
Ordering Information:
H9642-AP(AR)

Top-loading cabinet for the RA60 removable disk subsystem. Allows mounting of any combination of
RA60s, RA80s, and RA81 s in the middle and bottom cabinet bays. The RA60, however, must be
mounted in the top bay.

H9642-BD(BE)

Top-loading expansion cabinet for the RL01/RL02. Provides 53.3 cm (21 in) mounting space beneath
the RL01 IRL02.

H9642-AS(AT)

Cabinet for the RA80 or RA81 fixed-disk subsystem. Allows mounting of any combination of RA60s,
RA80s, and RA81s in the middle and bottom cabinet bays. Note: The RA60 cannot be mounted in the
top of the cabinet.

Site Preparation Specifications:

H9642-AP(AR) and H9642-AS(A

• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 54.1 cm (21.3 in)
• Depth: 91.4 cm (36 in)
• Weight: Approximately 90.7 kg (200 Ib)
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (120VAC/60Hz),
#6-20R (240VAC/50Hz)

Systems

1-M

Backplanes and Boxes
Expansion Backplanes
0011-CK

Four-slot expansion backplane for use in BA 11-KU(KV) expansion boxes or in PDP-11/24 and PDP-iii
44 CPU boxes. Accommodates two hex and two quad modules. Requires one System Unit (SU) of
space.

0011-0K

Nine-slot expansion backplane for use in BA 11-KU(KV) expansion boxes or in PDP-11/24 and PDP-iii
44 CPU boxes. Accommodates seven hex and two quad modules. Requires two System Units (SU) of
space.

~Oll-OK

00ll·CK BACKPLANE

ABC

:~t::::::r:::::::ijijIU:H::::Hmrm:

BACKPLANE

~:::::::::::::::::::tijiia.{tttfi

QUAD SLOT
HEX OR QUAD SLOT

HEX OR QUAD SLOT

~~}::::::::::::t¥iril.:trr:H:r:

QUAD SLOT

QUAD SLOT
HEX OR QUAD SLOT
HEX OR QUAD SLOT

HEX OR QUAD SLOT

~~~~~~~----------~----~-----'

HEX OR QUAD SLOT
HEX OR QUAD SLOT
HEX OR QUAD SLOT
HEX OR QUAD SLOT

Expansion Boxes
BA11-KU(KV)

The BA11-KU(KV) is a cabinet-mountable 26.6 cm (1 O.S in) expansion box with bezel and slides for use
in expander cabinets. Fans located between the power supply and modules produce front to back
cooling. It provides five system units of mounting space and is compatible with the DD11-CK/DK
expansion backplanes. The power supply is rated at 32 amps @+S V for SU 1-2, and 32 amps @+S V
for SU 3-S, 4 amps @+1S for SU 1-S, and 10 amps for @-1S V for SU 1-S. Includes BC11 A-1 0 cable
for connecting to CPU box. Note: Backplanes not included. For use in H9642 FA(FB), FC(FD) expander
cabinets.

BA11-KU(KV)

SU 1
SU 2
SU 3
SU 4
SU 5

.----------1 } 32 amps @+5V

J---------t}
~--------------~

1-S 2

Systems

4 amps @+15V,
10 amps@-15V
32amps@+5V

2 Options
1It:;~ t~at

When You select a sYStem You mUSt also select the h rd

examPle, YOu may neecJ to aCCOmmOdate many uSers
optlt)ns
IItI/l best fIt YOUr apPlication needs. For
reSOUrces. In these cases, You IItOll/d need more te";'in I
a conn,:" to a. nellltork of other cornplJlers to share
reqUire increased prOCessor Politer, additional memory
Or!ommuTllca.hon Interfaces. This extra load might also
complete
Or PDP.
eXlland
systemOffers
are deSCribed
sPace. The OPhons YOu lItill need to
Each
Digital
11 YOUr
prOCeSSor
a floann in this
. t sectionm e expansIon
'.

a:,.

~...

t: /;n~Y:~ m t~
/ne~thle~/b/~
O/P~P_l)

P
require a great deal Of Calculation Several t'?pe om fProcessor Or floating PoInt accelerator for apPlications that
Pe, ,o<mance. '0 share resources and
save
on reduna
to increase
'
"
s a tmemory are aVailable in vary'Ing Increments
,
tlon modO/es, both SYnchronous and asYnChronous
h"'tdlltare, there are a lItide Variety Of communica_
and analog I/O. In addition, several enVironmental'prOdUcts a;esfn'c7':: a nh?tw0h . There are OPtions for digital
Tk
Because You may Order hardware OPtions IIthen You Ur h
performance.
u e W ICh elp to ensure reliable sYstem
tIme to an installed system, lite have imPlemented
,;"e:" new system, Or ChOOse to add OPtions at a later
Options can nOIlt be ordered as sYStem Options (installed at
opt,on orden Plan: Communication and I/O
The OPhons section inclUdes both Q-bus options (far MICR
ng
.
e ac ory) Or as UPgrade OPtIOns (Installed in the field).
sYStems) and UN/BUS OPtions (for PDP-l1/24 a/l(j PDP- 1 l/44
1, MPDP-l1/23-PLUS, and PDP-l1/23_S
category of OPtions for YOUr sYStem.
sys ems. ake SUre YOU Select from the correct

Options
Processor and Memory Options
Description

Q-bus

Page

UNIBUS

Page

Floating Point

KEF11-AA, FPF11

2-6

KEF11-AA, FPF11
FP11-F

2-6,
2-7

Commercial
Instruction
Set

KEF11-BB

2-6

KEF11-BB, KE44-A

2-6,

Memory

MSV11
MCV11

2-7
2-6

MS11, KT24

2-7

Note: Additional memories are described in Section 3-Components.

Communication Options
Descri ption

Q-bus

Page

UNIBUS

Page

Asynchronousl
Synchronous

KMV11, OLVE1
OLVJ1, DPV11
OUV11 , DMV11

2-11,2-9
2-9,2-10
2-11,2-10

OL11,OUP11
KMS11

2-12,2-13
2-16

Asynchronous
Multiplexer

OZV11

2-10

OZ11,OH11

2-13

OMV11 , OPV11

2-10

OMR11, OMP11

2-14,2-15

OEUNA

2-17

OECmux,OFM

2-16

DECnet
Interface
Ethernet
Statistical Multiplexers

Realtime 1/0
Description

Q-bus

Page

UNIBUS

Page

Digital 1/0

DRV11

2-20

OR11,DRU11
ORS11,OSS11

2-20,2-21
2-20

Analog 1/0

ADV11,AXV11,AAV11

2-21

pro~rammable

KWV11

2-22

KW11-P

2-22

IEEE 488
Interface

IEQ11

2-21

IEU11,IEC11

2-21

Re time
Clock

Options

2-3

New Option Ordering Information
Flexible Ordering Plan for Communication and 1/0 Options
Options can be ordered when a system is purchased- System Options, or as upgrades to a system already
installed in the field-Upgrade Options. System options are installed in a system at the factory, and upgrade options
are installed in the field. Upgrade options will be available for use with both old style-unshielded cabinets, and with
the new style-shielded cabinets designed to reduce potential EMI/RFI emissions.
The following section outlines this new ordering scheme for all Q-bus and UNIBUS communications and I/O options
(order codes for processor and memory options will not be affected).

System Options
To order the system version of an option, you need only specify a single option name on an order for a CPU. You
will receive the option, with all appropriate cabling and bracket hardware, already installed on that CPU.

Example (Communications Options)
If you want a DECnet RS232-C interface for a PDP-11 144, you would order a DMR11-AP.
DMR11-AP
DMR11 = Generic option
A = RS232-C interface with full modem control
P = Factory-installed

Example (Non-communications Options)
If you want a 16-bit parallel interface for your PDP-11 123-PLUS, you would order a DRV11-LP.
DRV11-LP
DRV11 = Generic option
L = Multifunction device
P = Factory-installed

2-4 Options

New Option Ordering Information
Upgrade Options
To purchase an option as a field add-on to an existing system, you order the base option module together with the
specific cabinet kit required to install the module on your CPU. A cabinet kit contains the unique cable, filter
assembly, and any bracket hardware required to install the option in a specific cabinet or enclosure.
For mounting options in different cabinets, various length internal cables and mounting brackets will be required on
different CPUs. Therefore, several different cabinet kits are available for one option.
UNIBUS options can be mounted in older, unshielded cabinets by ordering the cabinet kit that includes an adapter
bracket. To determine whether your cabinet is shielded or unshielded, examine the back of the cabinet. A shielded
cabinet will have metal panels with 1/0 connection panel inserts or blank metal plates mounted in the cutouts in these
panels. An unshielded cabinet may have devices mounted in the back of the cabinet, but will not have complete
coverage across the entire cabinet. The CPU box and disk enclosures are visible from the back of an unshielded
cabinet.
The cabinet kits available for each option are described in Section 2-0ptions.

Example (Communications Options)
If you want to add a 4-line multiplexer to an existing MICRO/PDP-11, you would order the following two options:
DZV11-M = Base option
CK-DZV11-DB = Cabinet kit to install a DZV11 on a MICRO/PDP-11

Example (Non-communications Options)
If you want to add a 1 6-line parallel interface to an existing PDP-11 123-PLUS, you would order the following two
options:
DRV11-J = Base option module
CK-DRV1 J-KC = Cabinet kit to install a DRV11-J on a PDP-11 123-PLUS
In summary, Q-bus and UNIBUS communication and 1/0 options can now be ordered either as system-integrated or
field upgrade options. The order codes have been changed to reflect this new style of purchasing an option
specifically designed to fit any PDP-11 processor in any enclosure you now own or plan to purchase.
An appendix has been added at the end of this catalog which translates the old option order codes to the new
system-integrated and field-upgrade option order codes.

Options

2-5

Q-bus Processor Options & Memories
Q·bus Processor Options
FPF11

Single- and double-precision fast floating point hardware option. This option is one quad module mounted
adjacent to the CPU. Performs hardware operations on 32-bit and 64-bit floating point numbers. Provides
up to 1 7 digits of precision. Provides integer-to-floating point conversions. Executes instructions
approximately six times faster than the KEF11-AA.

KEF11-AA

Single- and double-precision floating paint option. The microcode to implement this option resides in two
chips on one 40-pin package. Performs microcode operations on 32-bit and 64-bit floating point
numbers. Provides up to 17 digits of precision. Provides integer-to-floating point conversions. Mounts on
the CPU board.

KEF11-BB

Commercial Instruction Set (CIS). Implements a set of 27 commercial instructions on a variety of data
types, including character strings, packed decimal, and numeric formats. Mounts on the CPU board.

Q·bus Memories
MCV11-0C

32 KB CMOS static Random Access Memory with on-board battery backup. This battery backup
provides minimum data retention time of 50 days.

MSV11-PK

256 KB parity MOS memory.

MSV11-PL

512 KB parity MOS memory.

2-6 Options

UNIBUS Processor Options & Memories
PDp·11 124 Processor Options and Memories
FPF11

Single- and double-precision fast floating point hardware option. This option is one quad module mounted
adjacent to the CPU. Performs hardware operations on 32-bit and 64-bit floating point numbers. Provides
up to 17 digits of precision. Provides integer-te-floating point conversions. Executes instructions
approximately six times faster than the KEF11-AA.

H775-A

Battery backup for the 13.3 cm (5.25 in) PDP-11/24. This battery backup provides minimum data
retention time of 20 minutes.

H77So-BA(BD)

Battery backup for the 26.6 cm (10.5 in) PDP-11/24. This battery backup provides minimum data
retention time fo 20 minutes.

KEF11-AA

Single- and double-precision floating point option. The microcode to implement this option resides in two
chips on one 40-pin package. Performs microcode operations on 32-bit and 64-bit floating point
numbers. Provides up to 17 digits of preciSion. Provides integer-to-floating point conversions. Mounts on
the CPU board.

KEF11-BB

Commercial Instruction Set (CIS) for the PDP-11/24. Performs a set of 27 commercial instructions on a
variety of data types, including character strings, packed decimal, and numeric formats. Mounts on the
CPU board.

MS11-PB

1 MB ECC MaS memory for the PDP-11 124.

KT24

Physical Address Extension (PAX) module allows memory expansion up to 1 MB with a 13.3 cm (5.25
in) CPU box and up to 4 MB with a 26.6 cm (10.5 in) CPU box. Note: The KT24 must mount in the
second hex slot in the CPU backplane, next to the processor.

PDp·11 1M Processor Options and Memories
FP11-F

Floating Point Processor for the PDP-11 /44 with 46 floating point instructions. Performs hardware
operations on 32-bit and 64-bit floating pOint numbers providing up to 1 7 digits of preCision as well as
integer to floating point conversions. Mounts in a dedicated slot in the PDP-11 144 backplane.

H77So-BA{BD)

Battery backup for the PDP-11/44. This battery backup provides minimum data retention time of 20
minutes.

KE44-A

Commercial Instruction Set (CIS) processor for the PDP-11 /44. Performs 27 commercial instructions on
a variety of data types, including character strings, packed decimal and numeric formats. Mounts in
adjacent slots in the PDP-11 144 backplane.

MS11-PB

1 MB ECC MaS memory for the PDP-11 144.

Options

2-7

Communication & Realtime I/O Options

PDP-11 systems have set the computer industry standard for ease and flexibility of interconnection: to user
terminals, to other computers, and to special purpose devices. This section describes asynchronous and synchronous communications interlaces, parallel digital arid sensor-based interlaces, programmable clocks, and a variety of
interconnecting cables. These options make it easy for you to connect your PDP-11 into an information processing
system with both local and, through the use of modems and communication lines, remotely located equipment.
Digital's operating system software fully supports most of the devices described in this section. Optional software
products, described in Section 8-Networking, support DEenet, Internets, and Packetnet operation. These
networks can provide you with economical resource sharing, as well as information exchange between Digital
systems and systems of other manufacturers.

2-8

Options

Q-bus Communication Options
Order codes for the options that follow are in the new format. Make sure you select the correct order code
designation to indicate whether you want the system or upgrade version of the option.

Asynchronous Interfaces
DLVE1 is an asynchronous, RS232-C, one-line interface (formerly named DLV11-E). This dual-sized module is used
to attach one asynchronous device to a-bus computers. The DLVE1 moves data under program control between
the a-bus and a serial communication line. The DLVE1 offers modem control, program or jumper selectable line
speeds from 50 to 19,200 bls, split transmit and receive speeds, and is compatible with DF01, DF02, DF03
modems and Bell 103, 113,202C, 202D, and 212 modems and equivalents. An external cable is not included.
BC22D-xx is recommended for connection to terminals; BC22E-xx and BC22F-xx are recommended for connection
to modems.

Ordering Information:
OLVE1-0P

System option. Includes module, internal cables and I/O Connection Panel insert. This option must be
ordered with the system in which it is to be installed.

OLVE1-M

Upgrade option. Includes base module only. For system installation select one of the following cabinet
kits:

CK-OLVE1-0A

Cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11/23-S) BA11-MA(MB) box.

CK-OLVE1-0B

Cabinet kit. For use with (MICRO/PDP-11) BA23 box.

CK-OLVE1-0C

Cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11/23-PLUS) H349 panel.

DLVJ1 is a four-line EINCCITT asynchronous interface without modem control (formerly named DLV11-J). It is used
to support up to four asynchronous devices to a-bus computers. The DLVJ1 is a dual-size, double-buffered module
that moves data under program control between the a-bus and serial communication lines. It features four
independent serial line interfaces with consecutive bus device and vector assignments. Each channel can be
configured for RS232-C, RS422, or RS423 interfaces, jumper selectable line speeds from 150 to 38.4 KB/s,
seven or eight data bits and one or two stop bits. It is compatible with DF01, DF02, DF03, Bell 103, 113 or
equivalent modems. The external cable is not included. BC22D-xx is recommended for connection to terminals;
BD22E-xx and BC22F-xx are recommended for connection to modems.

Ordering Information:
OLVJ1-LP

System option. Includes module, internal cables, and I/O Connection Panel insert. This option must be
ordered with the system in which it is to be installed.

DLVJ1-M

Upgrade option. Includes base module only. For system installation select external cables and one of the
following cabinet kits:

CK-DLVJ1-LA

Cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 /23-S) BA 11-MA(MB) box.

CK-OLVJ1-LB

Cabinet kit. For use with (MICRO/PDP-11) BA23 box.

CK-OLVJ1-LC

Cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 /23-PLUS) H349 panel.

DLVK1-H is an EIA to 20mA converter'with BC21 A-03 cable for connection to the DLVJ1 (formerly named DLV11K). It is a self-contained box which mounts outside of the CPU cabinet. Cables not included for connection to
equipment. Use standard Digital20mA cabling such as BC05F.
DLVK1-HB

EIA to 20 mA converter.

Options

2-9

Q-bus Communication Options
DZV11 is a four-line asynchronous, program-controlled multiplexer with modem control on all lines. It is a quad-size
option for use on a-bus processors. The DZV11 supports programmable speeds up to 9600 b/s. It can be used
with the a-bus processor in a variety of applications that include data concentration, realtime processing, and
cluster controlling. The module provides EIA interface levels and enough data set control to permit dial-up (autoanswer) operation with modems using full-duplex operation such as DF01, DF02, DF03, and Bell models 103,113,
212 or equivalent. The DZV11 does not support half-duplex operations on modems. Cables are not included.
BC22D-xx is recommended for connection to terminals; BC22E-xx and BC22F-xx are recommended for connection
to modems.

Ordering Information:
DZV11-DP
DZV11-M

System option. Includes module, internal cables and 1/0 Connection Panel insert. This option must be
ordered with the system in which it is to be installed.
Upgrade option. Includes base module only. For system installation select the appropriate external
cables and one of the following cabinet kits:

CK-DZV11-DA

Cabinet kit for use with (PDP-11 123-S) BA 11-MA(MB) box.

CK-DZV11-DB

Cabinet kit for use with (MICRO/PDP-11) BA23 box.

CK-DZV11-DC

Cabinet kit for use with (PDP-11 123-PLUS) H349 panel.

Synchronous Interfaces
DPV11 is a single-line, program-controlled, double-buffered communications device that interfaces any a-bus-based
processor to a serial synchronous line. The DPV11 is suited for interfacing to medium-speed synchronous lines for
packet switching, remote batch, remote data collection, remote concentration, and network applications. The unit is
capable of handling, under program control, a wide variety of protocols, including byte-oriented protocols such as
DDCMP and BISYNC and bit-oriented protocols such as HDLC and ADCCP. The option is one dual sized module. It
operates in full or half duplex. Includes BC22F-25 modem cable.

Ordering Information:
DPV11-AP

System option. Includes module, internal cables and 1/0 Connection Panel insert. This option must be
ordered with the system in which it is to be installed.

DPV11-M

Upgrade option. Includes base module only. For system installation select one of the following cabinet
kits:

CK-DPV11-AA

Cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 123-S) BA 11-MA(MB) box.

CK-DPV11-AB

Cabinet kit. For use with (MICRO/PDP-11) BA23 box.

CK-DPV11-AC

Cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11/23-PLUS) H349 panel.

DMV11 is an intelligent microprocessor-based synchronous DECnet interface that supports full- or half-duplex Direct
Memory Access (DMA) data transfer in either point-to-point or multipoint communications. Depending on operating
system and layered software implementation, the DMV11 will support up to 12 multipoint tributaries. The controller
microcode handles all DDCMP protocol processing, thereby offloading the central processor. In point-to-point
operation the DMV11 can communicate with a DMC11, DUP11, DPV11, DMR11, DMP11, or DMV11 device
operating in the same mode. In multipoint operation the complementary devices must be DMP11 s or DMV11 s. It
supports RS423-A operation to a maximum of 56 KB/s, and RS232-C, CCITT V.24, or CCITT V.28 operation at
19.2 KB/s. External cables not included.

Ordering Information:
DMV11-AP

System option. RS232-C/CCITT V.28 interface. Includes module, internal cables and 1/0 Connection
Panel insert. This option must be ordered with the system in which it is to be installed. Requires BC22E
or BC22F external cable.

DMV11-FP

System option. RS423-AlCCITT V.24 interface. Requires a BC55D external cable.

DMV11-BP

System option. CCITT V.35/DDS interface. Requires a BC22E external cable.

DMV11-CP

System option. Integral modem. Requires a BC55S or BC55T external cable. Note: Earlier versions of
this option used a plastiC cable connector. To connect the BC55S or BC55T to the older BC55M or
BC55N cables, BC56A1B/C/D adapter cables are available.

2-1 0

Options

Q-bus Communication Options
DMV11-M

Upgrade option. RS232-C or RS423/RS449 interfaces. Includes base module only. For system
installation select the appropriate external cable and one of the following cabinet kits:

CK-DMV11-AA

RS232-C cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 123-S) BA 11-MA(MB) box.

CK-DMV11-AB

RS232-C cabinet kit. For use with (MICRO/PDP-11) BA23 box.

CK-DMV11-AC

RS232-C cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11/23-PLUS) H349 panel.

CK-DMV11-FA

RS423/RS449 cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11/23-S) BA11-MA(MB) box.

CK-DMV11-FB

RS423/RS449 cabinet kit. For use with (MICRO/PDP-11) BA23 box.

CK-DMV11-FC

RS423/RS449 cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 123-PLUS) H349 panel.

DMV11-N

Upgrade option. V.35 and Integral Modem interfaces. Select the appropriate external cables and one of
the following cabinet kits:

CK-DMV11-BA

V.35 cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 123-S) BA 11-MA(MB) box.

CK-DMV11-BB

V.35 cabinet kit. For use with (MICRO/PDP-11) BA23 box.

CK-DMV11-BC

V.35 cabInet kit. For use with (PDP-11/23-PLUS) H349 panel.

CK-DMV11-CA

Integral Modem cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 123-S) BA 11-MA(MB) box.

CK-DMV11-CB

Integral Modem cabinet kit. For use with (MICRO/PDP-11 ) BA23 box.

CK-DMV11-CC

Integral Modem cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 123-PLUS) H349 panel.

The DUV11 single-line, double-buffered program-controlled communications interface is used to establish a data
communications link between any Q-bus-based processor and a Bell 201 synchronous modem or equivalent. The
module is fully programmable with respect to sync characters and parity selection. The DUV11 is designed for
applications using character-oriented protocols, and controls the modem for half- or full-duplex operation. It also
interfaces synchronous and isochronous communications data (isochronous operation is essentially asynchronous
data transmission over a synchronous modem). It transmits EIA CITT data at rates up to 9600 b/s.

Ordering Information:
DUV11-AP

System option. Includes module, internal cables and I/O connection panel insert. This option must be
ordered with the system in which it is to be installed.

DUV11-M

Upgrade option. Includes base module only. For system installation, select one of the following cabinet
kits.

CK-DUV11-AA

Cabinet kit. For use with (PDP11 123-S) BA 11-MA(MB) box.

CK-DUV11-AB

Cabinet kit. For use with (MICRO/PDP11 )BA23 box.

CK-DUV11-AC

Cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11/23-PLUS) H349 panel.

KMV11-A is a single-line synchronous/asynchronous programmable communications interface. It supports FDXlHDX
Direct Memory Access (DMA) data transfer in point-to-point or multipoint operation. The interface is controlled by an
on-board DCT11-AA microprocessor with 32K of RAM, enabling soft-loaded microcode to handle protocol
proceSSing. Under such microcode's control, the device is capable of offloading the CPU, while handling a variety of
bit-or-byte-oriented protocols. Software currently available for RSX-11 M/M-PLUS implementation of HDLC/SDLC
(frame level only) communications applications (QJS32/39).

Ordering Information:
KMV11-AA

Supports RS232-C or CCITTV.28 operation at 19.2 KB/s. For use on PDP-11 123-PLUS systems.
External cable not included, BC22F-xx is the recommended cable.

KMV11-AE

Supports RS449/422A or CCITT V.11 operation to a maximum of 64 KB/s. For use on PDP-11/23PLUS systems. External cable not available from Digital.

KMV11-AF

Supports RS449/423A or CCITT V.1 0 operation to a maximum of 19.2 KB/s. For use on PDP-11 123PLUS systems. External cable not available from Digital.

Options

2-11

UNIBUS Communication Options
The order codes for the following options follow the new format. Be sure to specify the correct order code
~esignation for system or upgrade options and cabinet kits.

Single-Line Asynchronous Interfaces
DL11 single-line asynchronous interfaces provide local and remote interconnection of the UNIBUS to terminals and
other computer systems. They feature selectable character size, parity, stop bit(s), and speed of operation,
operating in full-duplex or half-duplex mode.

Ordering Information:
DL11-AP

System option (formerly DL 11-E). EIA/CCllT interface with modem control, jumper-selectable options.
Compatible with DF01 , DF02, DF03 and Bell 103, 113, 202, or 212 modems or equivalent. Includes
BC22D-25 cable. Note: Customer must specify data rate from the following speeds: 50, 75, 110, 150,
134.5, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, or 9600 b/s.

DL11-HP

System option (formerly DL 11-WA). 20mA serial line interface and line frequency realtime clock. Switchselectable options. Includes BC05M-04 cable for terminal connection. Note: Data rates are switchselectable and must be specified from the following speeds: 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
or 9600 b/s. Character formats are switch-selectable.

DL11-DP

System option (formerly DL 11-WB). EIA/CCllT RS232-C serial line interface and line frequency realtime
clock without modem control. Switch-selectable options. Includes BC05C-25 cable. Note: Data rates are
switch-selectable and must be specified from the following speeds: 110, 150,300,600, 1200,2400,
4800, or 9600 b/s. Character formats are switch-selectable.

DL11-M

Upgrade option (formerly DL 11-E). RS232-C interface and modem control. Includes base module only.
For system installation select the appropriate external cables and one of the following cabinet kits:

CK-DL11-AD

Cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 124 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DL11-A1

Cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinet models. Adapter bracket included.

DL11-N

Upgrade option (formerly DL 11-W). RS232-C and 20mA interfaces without modem control. Includes
base module only. For system installation select the appropriate external cables and one of the following
cabinet kits:

CK-DL11-DD

RS232-C cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 124 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DL11-D1

RS232-C cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinet models. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DL11-HD

20mA cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 124 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DL11-H1

20mA cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinet models. Adapter bracket included.

2-12

Options

UNIBUS Communication Options
Asynchronous Multiplexers
DZ11 asynchronous serial communications interfaces can be used for local or remote connection of UNIBUS
systems to as many as 8 terminals or to another system. They feature programmable speeds (up to 9600 b/s) and
format on a per-line basis, operating at full-duplex.

Ordering Information:
DZ11-DP

System option. Eight-line multiplexer with distribution panel for EIAICCIIT terminals. Includes modem
control for use with DF02, DF03 and Bell 103, 113, or 212 modems or equivalent. External cables for
terminals not included; for connection to modems one BC22E-xx is recommended per line. For local
connection of EIAICCIIT terminals, order one BC22D-xx per line.

DZ11-HP

System option. Eight-line multiplexer for use with 20mA current loop terminals. Terminal cables not
included; order one BC04R-xx cable per line for connection of 20mA terminals.

DZ11-M

Upgrade option. RS232-C interface. Includes base module only. For system installation, select the
appropriate external cables and one of the following cabinet kits:

CK-DZ11-DD

RS232-C cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 124 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DZ11-D1

RS232-C cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinet models. Adapter bracket included.

DZ11-N

Upgrade option. 20mA interface. Includes base module only. For system installation, select the
appropriate external cables and one of the following cabinet kits:

CK-DZ11-HD

20mA cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 124 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DZ11-H1

20mA cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinet models. Adapter bracket included.

DH11 16-line asynchronous DMA multiplexers are used for local or remote connection of UNIBUS systems to EIAI
CCID terminals. Operating in full- or half-duplex mode, they support per-line program control for data rate (up to
9600 b/s), character size, stop bit, and transmission mode. Split-speed transmit and receive rates are supported.

Orderi ng 'I nformation:
DH11-AP

System option. Includes modem control. External cables not included; for connection to modems one
BC22E-xx is recommended per line; for local connection of EIAICCIIT terminals, order one BC22D-xx
per line.

DH11-DP

System option. Does not include modem control. External cables not included; for local connection of
EIAICCIIT terminals, order one BC22D·xx per line.

DH11-M

Upgrade option. RS232-C interface. Includes base module only. For system installation, select the
appropriate external cables and one of the following cabinet kits:

CK-DH11-AD

RS232-C cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 124 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DH11-A1

RS232-C cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinet models. Adapter bracket included.

DH11-N

Upgrade option. 20mA interface. Includes base module only. For system installation, select the
appropriate external cables arid one of the following cabinet kits:

CK-DH11-DD

20mA cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11/24 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DH11-D1

20mA cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinet models. Adapter bracket included.

Single-Line Synchronous Interface
DUP11 full- or half-duplex synchronous interface can be programme~ to handle 8-bit character-oriented protocols
such as DDCMP and BISYNC and bit-oriented protocols such as SDLC and HDLC. The hardware calculates CRC16 when using DDCMP, and CRC/CCID when using bit-oriented protocols. Normally used for RJE applications.
DUP11-AP

System option. Interfaces to Bell 200 series modems or equivalent at speeds up to 9600 b/s. Includes
data set control and BC22F-25 cable for modem connection.

DUP11-M

Upgrade option. Includes only base module. For system installation, select one of the following cabinet
kits:

CK-DUP11-AD

Cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 124 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DUP11-A 1

Cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinet models. Adapter bracket included.

Options

2·13

UNIBUS Communication Options,
DMR11 is a DECnet point-to-point interface. The high-performance microprocessor-based option implements
DDCMP protocol in hardware. It is used for local system interconnection or for connection to external modems for
remote networking. A DMR11 can be used to communicate with another DMR11 or a DMV11 or DMP11, or other
DDCMP microprocessor-based interface, or to some other synchronous interface with software implementation of
DDCMP V3.1 or 4.0. Both half- and full-duplex operation are supported. For local operation at full duplex, two
cables of the same type are needed.

Ordering Information:
DMR11-AP

System option. Interfaces to RS232-C synchronous modems (Bell series 200 compatible) at speeds up
to 19.2 KB/s. Includes data set control. External cable not included; order BC22E-xx cable.

DMR11-FP

System option. Interfaces to RS423/CCITT V.24 synchronous modems at speeds up to 56 KB/s.
Includes data set control. External cable not included; order BC55D-xx cable.

DMR11-BP

System option. Interfaces to CCITT V.35/DDS synchronous modems (Bell 500A L 115 or equivalent) at
speeds up to 1 MB/s. Includes data set control. Includes BC05Z-25 cable for modem connection.

DMR11-CP

System option. Includes integral modem, for local interconnection. Supports switch-selectable speeds
over the following distances:

Frequency

BC55S
Triaxial
Cable

BC55T
Twinaxial
Cable

1 MB/s

1.S km
6000 ft

Not
Recommended

500 KB/s

2.1 km
.7000 ft

Not
Recommended

250 KB/s

2.4 km
SOOO ft

Not
Recommended

56 KB/s

Not
Recommended

4.Skm
16,000 ft

External cables not included; Requires BC55S or BC55T external cable. Note: Earlier versions of this
option used a plastic cable connector. To connect the BC55S or BC55T to the earlier BC55N and
BC55M cables, BC56A1B/C/D adapter cables are available. See the Communication Cable Chart in this
section.

DMR11-EP

DMR11-M

2-14

System option. Interfaces to RS422/CCITT V.24 synchronous modems, supports speeds up to 1 MB/s
(FOX). Includes data set control for switched network operation. External cable not included; cable not
available through Digital.
Upgrade option. Includes base module only. For system installation, select the appropriate external
cable and one of the following cabinet kits:

CK-DMR11-AD

RS232-C cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 124 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DMR11-A1

RS232-C cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMR11-BD

V.35 cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 124 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DMR11-B1

V.35 cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMR11-CD

Integral modem cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 /24 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DMR11-C1

Integral modem cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMR11-ED

RS422/RS449 cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11 124 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DMR11-E1

RS422/RS449 cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMR11-FD

RS423/RS449 cabinet kit. For use with (PDP-11/24 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DMR11-F1

RS423/RS449 cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

Options

UNIBUS Communication Options
Multipoint Synchronous Interfaces
DMP11 is a DEenet point-to-point or multipoint interface. The microprocessor-based option implements DDCMP
protocol in hardware. It is used for local or remote communications. It operates in full- or half-duplex mode.
Depending on operating system and layered software, DMP11 s will support up to 32 tributaries. In multipoint
operation the complementary devices must be DMP11s, DMV11s or, on VAX systems, DMF32s (as tributaries
only). In point-to-point communication, the DMP11 can be used to communicate with any other synchronous
interface which implements DDCMP Version 3.1 or 4.0.

Ordering Information:
DMP11-AP

System option. Interfaces to RS232-C synchronous modems (Bell series 200 compatible) at speeds up
to 19.2 KB/s. Includes data set control. External cable not included; order BC22E-xx cable.

DMP11-FP

System option. Interfaces to RS423/CCITT V.24 synchronous modems at speeds up to 56 KB/s.
Includes data set control. External cable not included; order BC550-xx cable.

DMP11-BP

System option. Interfaces to CCITT V.35/00S synchronous modems (Bell 500A L 1/5 or equivalent) at
speeds up to 56 KB/s. Includes data set control. Includes BC05Z-25 cable for modem connection.

DMP11-CP

System option. Includes integral modem, for local interconnection. Supports switch selectable speeds;
at the following distances, maximum speeds supported are:

Frequency

BC55S
Triaxial
Cable

BC55T
Twinaxial
Cable

1 MB/s

1.B km
6000 ft

Not
Recommended

500 KB/s

2.1 km
7000 ft

Not
Recommended

250 KB/s

2.4 km
BOOO ft

Not
Recommended

56 KB/s

Not
Recommended

4.Bkm
16,000 ft

External cables not included; Requires BC55S or BC55T external cable. Note: Earlier versions of this
option used a plastiC cable connector. To connect the BC55S or BC55T to the earlier BC55N and
BC55M cables, BC56A/B/C/O adapter cables are available. See the Communication Cables Chart in this
section.
DMP11-EP

System option. Interfaces to EIA RS422/CCITT V.24 synchronous modems, supports speeds up to 1
MB/s (HOX) or 500 KB/s (FOX). Includes data set control for switched network operation. External cable
not included; cable not available through Digital.

DMP11-M

Upgrade option. Includes base module only. For system installation, select one of the following cabinet
kits and the appropriate external cable.

CK-DMP11-AD

RS232-C cabinet kit. For use with (POP-11 124 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DMP11-A1

RS232-C cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMP11-BD

V.35 cabinet kit. For use with (POP-11 124 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DMP11-B1

V.35 cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMP11-CD

Integral modem cabinet kit. For use with (POP-11 124 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DMP11-C1

Integral modem cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMP11-ED

RS422/RS449 cabinet kit. For use with (POP-11/24 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DMP11-E1

RS422/RS449 cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMP11-FD

RS423/RS449 cabinet kit. For use with (POP-11 124 and -11/44) shielded cabinets.

CK-DMP11-F1

RS423/RS449 cabinet kit. For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

Options

2-15

UNIBUS Communication Options
Multipoint Parallel Interface
pel11-B

The Parallel Communications Link (PCl11-B) is a multidrop computer link used to connect up to 16
processors to form a local distributed network. Full duplex interfaces, residing in each CPU, are
interconnected by a single high speed bus which can operate at speeds up to 1 MB depending on the
bus length. The maximum bus length is 91 m (300 ft). CRC and word parity error detection are
supported by the hardware. Note: BC17U-14 and BC17T-xx cables are included. Specify the BC17T-xx
length as a note on the order form. lengths are available in increments of 1.5 m (5 ft) up to 18.2 m (60
ft), as well as 25.9 m (85 tt), 30.4 m (100 tt), 39.6 m (130 tt), and 85.3 m (280 tt).

Auxiliary Communications Microprocessors
KMS11-BD

The KMS11-BD is used in a communications environment as a high speed, intelligent front-end processor
which offloads the host CPU of communication functions. Through the use of direct memory access, the
KMS11 efficiently multiplexes as many as 8 synchronous communications lines into the processor. The
KMS11 offers bit or byte oriented operation in either full or half-duplex mode. The hardware calculates
CRC-16 when using byte protocols, and CRC/CCITT, when using bit protocols. Data transmission and
reception is fully controlled by the microprocessor part of KMS 11, thus allowing full level 2 offloading for
higher processor efficiency. The microprocessor is controlled by a 4K word memory (writable control
store) which is loaded at system initialization time wjth the appropriate micro-program. Current applications utilize the Digital PSI package and a full X.25 link level package. A software tools package is
available for users to create their own custom microcode for custom networking applications. The
KMS 11 interfaces to RS232-C and Mll-188-144 unbalanced. Line speeds are dependent on the
software application. Using Digital PSI software-2lines at 9600 KB/s; using X.25'link level software-4
lines at 56 Kbaud and 8 lines at 19.2 Kbaud. Includes a DD11-DK double system unit and all internal
cables. External cables are not included.

KMS11-BE

Same as KMS11-BD but without the DD11-DK double system unit.

Statistical Multiplexers
DECmux
The DECmux Terminal Concentrator is comprised of a DZS11-EA and VT1 XX-EB modules. DECmux is a statistical
multiplexer that connects up to eight asynchronous terminals to a PDP-11 via a Single synchronous, full-duplex
communication link. The eight terminals can be configured in one cluster, or split into two clusters using the routethrough capability. Each cluster includes a VT1 XX-EB which mounts into a VT1 OO-M or -AB and concentrates the
data from the terminals onto the main or route-through links. Both the main and route-through links can be made
using dedicated lines and modems or by means of DECmux's RS422 long line capability. The main and routethrough links do not have to be made the same way and each can operate up to 19.2 Kbaud. All the terminals in the
DECmux network can operate at speeds of up to 9600 baud. The DZS11-EA host interface is a single hex module
to which the main link is directly connected eliminating the need for distribution panels. DECmux is DZ11
compatible, therefore it interfaces to the operating system using the standard device drivers. Note: If you have a
second cluster of terminals, order two VT1 XX-EBs. External cables not included. Use BC22F to connect DZS11EA, VT1 XX-EB to modems, and BC22D to connect asynchronous terminals to VT1 XX-EB. RS422 cable connectors
are supplied.
DZ11-EA (Host)

DZ11-EA-compatible interface between the UNIBUS and up to two terminal multiplexers (VT1 XX-EB).

VT1 XX-EB
n81)

Eight-channel multiplexer.

(Termi-

DFM
The DFM series of Intelligent Communications Processors (ICP) are freestanding units that utilize statistical time
division multiplexing techniques for concentrating four to sixteen RS232-C data channels over a signelhigh-speed
communications link. These data channels interface to any RS232-C compatible device such as terminals, printers,
personal computers, workstations, and computer ports. The data received by the second ICP is error corrected and
distributed to the appropriate users at the end of the network.

Features include:
• Switching and Contention, which allows users to create a logical connection between their terminal and any other
compatible device connected to either end of the network. Synchronous channel input on up to 50% of the
channels at 1 200 to 9600 b/s.
• Asynchronous Input speeds of 50 to 9600 bls with auto baud above 150 b/s.
• Concentrated Link speeds of 1200 to 19,200 b/s.
• 16-bit error detection with automatic retransmit on error for asynchronous channels.
• Speed and flow control conversion.
• EIA dial-up support, otherwise known as tail-end circuit support.
• Easy expansion through the addition of lines or integral modems. Extensive network management and control
functions. The DFM integral modems are for use only with dedicated telephone lines.
Note: For more information, refer to (Computer Special Systems group) Product Bulletin.

2-16

Options

UNIBUS Communication Options
Ethernet Options
DEUNA-AA

The Ethernet communications controller connects a UNIBUS system to an Ethernet local area network.
Both DECnet and device driver level software support are available. The DEUNA complies with the
Ethernet Specification, transmits and receives at 10 MB/s, and provides full address filtration to off-load
the host computer.
External transceiver cables (BNE3C OR BNE3A type) and the H4000 transceiver or DELNI must be
ordered separately.

DELNI

The DELNI is a table top unit which allows up to 8 Ethernet systems to be connected together in a local
area using only Ethernet transceiver cables. The DELNI enables a number of systems to be connected in
a small diameter( 100 meter ,328 ft) area for a low cost.

DEREP-AA

Ethernet Repeater used to connect two Ethernet cable segments together for a larger network.

H4000

The H4000 Digital Ethernet transceiver is a device that provides the functional interface between the
Ethernet coaxial cable and an Ethernet station. The H4000 transmits signals onto and receives signals
from the cable, and detects any message collisions that may occur. It provides electrical isolation and
high impedance to the coaxial cable.
The transceiver consists of a small printed circuit board contained in a rugged, compact plastic housing.
The plastiC housing contains a non-intrusive cable tapping assembly that is used for making the actual
physical connection to the Ethernet coaxial cable.

Modems (For Use In U.S.A Only)
DF02-AA

Direct connect, full-duplex, asynchronous modem with self-contained power supply operating at speeds
of 0-300 bits per second. Allows terminals and processors to communicate over unconditioned, dial-up
lines. Compatible with DF03 modem (at ::5 300 baud), Bell System 103J, 212A (at ::5 300 baud) data
sets, and all Digital asynchronous data communication controllers that support RS232-C interface
standard and dial-up modem control.

DF02-AC

Consists of a DF02 modem with serial Automatic Call Unit (ACU). ACU allows initiating calls without
operator intervention, and uses an asynchronous ASCII input format at switch-selectable data rates of
110 or 300 bits per second. Can store up to 1 6 digits for dialing/redialing.

DF03-AA

Direct connect, full-duplex, synchronous/asynchronous modem with self-contained power supply operating at speeds of 0-300 b/s or 1 200 b/s. Allows terminals and processors to communicate over
unconditioned, dial-up lines. Low-speed operation (0-300 b/s) is asynchronous; high-speed operation
(1200 b/s) can be either character-asynchronous or bit-synchronous. Compatible with the DF02 (at ::5
300 baud) modem, Bell System 103J, 212A data sets, and all Digital data communication controllers that
support RS232-C interface standard and dial-up modem control.

DF03-AC

ConSists of a DF03 modem with serial Automatic Call Unit (ACU). ACU allows computer to initiate calls
without manual intervention, and uses an asynchronous ASCII input format at switch-selectable data rates
of 110, 300, or 1200 bits per second. Can store up to 16 digits for dialing/redialing.

Options

2-17

Communication Cables
Cable Description Chart
Option

Length

Description

Where used

BC04R-xx

3.7m(12ft)

Round, 6-conductor, general
purpose module termination
cable assembly

20mA I/O devices (DZ11)

BC05F-xx

4.6 m (15 ft)
15.2 m ~50 ft)
30.5 m 100 ft)

Round, 4-conductor, Male
8-pin connector

20mA I/O devices (DL 11)

BC22D-xx

3.1 m ~10 ft)
7.6 m 25 ft)
10.7 m (35 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22.9 m (75 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)

Null modem, round, 3 shielded
twisted pair, RS232-C
female connectors

Local connection of
asynchronous terminals
with RS232-C interface

BC22E-xx

3.1m(10ft)
7.6m(25ft)
10.7 m (35 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22.9 m (75 ft)

Modem, round, 16-wire
fully shielded, RS232-C male
and female molded
connectors

Connect synchronous and
asychronous modems
with RS232-C interfaces,
EIA extension cable

BC22F-xx

3.1 m (10ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
10.7 m (35 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22.9 m (75 ft)

Full, EIA modem/extension
cable, round, 25-wire, fully
shielded, RS232-C male and
female molded connectors

Connect synchronous and
asynchronous modems
with RS232-C interfaces,
EIA extension cable

BCS5D-xx

3.1 m(10ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)

Integral modem, triaxial
cable with CPC
connectors

Used to connect
DMR, DMP, DMV older
options using plastic
connectors

BCS58-xx

7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22.9 m (75 ft)
30.5 m (100ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)
152.4 m (500 ft)
304.9 m (1000 ft)
1,067 m (3500 ft)

Integral modem, triaxial
cable with BNC
connectors

Used to connect
new style DMR, DMP, DMV
options

BC55T-xx

7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22.9 m (75 ft)
30.4 m (100 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)
152.4 m (500 ft)
304.8 m ~1 000 ft~
1 ,067 m 3500 ft

Integral modem, twinaxial
cable with BNC
connectors

Used to connect
new style DMR, DMP, DMV
options

BCS6A-xx

0.6 m (2 ft)

Male to male BC55S to
BC55M adapter cable

Used to connect
new style DMR, DMP, DMV
options to old options
using CPC plastic connectors

BCS6o-xx

0.6 m (2 ft)

Male to female BC55S to
BC55M adapter cable

Used to connect
new style DMR, DMP, DMV
options to old options
using CPC plastic connectors

BCS6D-xx

0.6 m (2 ft)

Male to male BC55T to
to BC55N adapter cable

Used to connect
new style DMR, DMP, DMV
options to old options
using CPC plastic connectors

2-18

Options

Communication Cables
Option

Length

Description

Where used

BeS6E-xx

0.6 m (2 tt)

Male to temale BC55T to
BC55N adapter cable

Used to connect
new style DMR, DMP, DMV
options to old options
using CPC plastic connectors

BNE2A-MA

23.4 m (77.1 tt)

Coaxial cable

Ethernet

BNE2A-MB

70.2 m (231.6 tt)

Coaxial cable

Ethernet

BNE2A-MC

117 m (386.1 tt)

Coaxial cable

Ethernet

BNE3A-xx

5 m (16.4 tt)
10m (32.8 tt)
20 m (65.6 tt)

Straight entry
transceiver cable

Ethernet

BNE3S-xx

5 m (16.4ft)
10m ~32.8 tt)
20 m 65.6 tt)

Rightangle
transceiver cable

Ethernet

BNE3C-xx

5 m (16.4tt)
10m (32.8 tt)
20 m (65.6 tt)

Straight entry
Teflon transceiving
drop cable

Ethernet

BNE3D-xx

5 m (16.4 tt)
10m (32.8 tt)
20 m (65.6 tt)

Right angle entry
Tetlon transceiver
drop cable

Ethernet

To Order Cables:
A cable model number beginning with Be indicates an English length. A cable model number with BN indicates a
metric length.
To order a cable, select the option number and replace the -xx with the correct suffix for feet or meters.
For lengths of up to 99 feet, simply substitute the number of feet.
Example:
BC22D-75 (75-ft BC22D cable)
BNE3A-05 (5-meter Ethernet cable)
For lengths of 100 feet/meters or over, change the -xx suffix as follows:
1 00 feet/M
AO
110 feet/M
A1
1 20 feet/M
A2
130 feet/M
A3
140 feet/M
A4
200 feet/M
BO
210feet/M
B1
300 feet/M
CO
400 feet/M
DO
500 feet/M
EO
Up to 2190 feet/M
Z9
Example:
BC22D-B5 (250-ft BC22D cable)
Note: The letters G, 1,0, Q, and X are not used to identify cable lengths.

Options

2-19

Realtime Options
Q·bus Oigitoll/O Options
DRV11-LP

System option. General purpose program-controlled parallel line interface unit. Permits program-controlled data transfers at rates up to 40K words per second. Note: External cables not included. BC04Z or
BC07D are recommended.

DRV11

Upgrade option. Includes only base option module. Select one of the following cabinet kits:

CK-DRV1 B-KA

Cabinet kit for use with BA23 box (MICRO/PDP-11).

CK-DRV1 B-KB

Cabinet kit for use with BA 11-M box (PDP-11 /23-S).

CK-DRV1 B-KC

Cabinet kit for use with H349 panel (PDP-11 /23-PLUS).

DRV11-BP

System option. General purpose direct memory access (DMA) parallel line interface unit. It permits data
transfers at rates up to 250K words per second in single cycle mode and up to 500K words per second
in burst mode. Note: External cables not included. BC04Z or BC07D are recommended. DMA capability
limited to first 256 KB.

DRV11-B

Upgrade option. Includes only base option module. Select one of the following cabinet kits:

CK-DRV1 B-KA

Cabinet kit for use with BA23 box (MICRO/PDP-11).

CK-DRV1 B-KB

Cabinet kit for use with BA 11-M box (PDP-11 /23-S).

CK-DRV1 B-KC

Cabinet kit for use with H349 panel (PDP-11 /23-PLUS).

DRV11-JP

System option. General purpose program-controlled parallel line interface. Contains 64 bidirectional
input/output lines configured as four 16-bit ports. Bit interruptable on up to 16 lines. Interrupt vectors
may have fixed or rotating priorities. Note: External cables not included.

DRV11-J

Upgrade option. Includes only base option module. Select one of the following cabinet kits:

CK-DRV1 J-KA

Cabinet kit for use with BA23 box (MICRO/PDP-11).

CK-DRV1 J-KB

Cabinet kit for use with BA 11-M box (PDP-11 /23-S).

CK-DRV1 J-KC

Cabinet kit for use with H349 panel (PDP-11 /23-PLUS).

UNIBUS Oigitoll/O Options
DR11-W

General purpose direct memory access (DMA) controller which interfaces user devices to the PDP-11
UNIBUS. In addition, the DR11-W provides a half-duplex interprocessor link between UNIBUS, VAX, and
Q-bus systems when connected to another DR11-W (for UNIBUS or VAX) or DRV11-B (for Q-bus).
Features include: transfer of up to 64K 16-bit words at up to 500,000 words per second; word or byte
transfers; and burst data transfers. Note: BC06R-xx or equivalent cables are required for interconnect,
the maximum length being 15.2 m (50 tt). Cabinet kit not required. Required cables are standard.

DRS11IDS11

The DRS11/DSS11 digital input/output devices provide UNIBUS PDP-11 computers with efficient
monitoring and control functions useful for a variety of industrial and scientific applications. Specific
features include monitoring operator panels, controlling relays and indicator lights, scanning limit switches
and unlocking doors. The input module (DSS11) provides 48 optically isolated inputs with one interrupt
input. The output module (DRS11) provides 48 buffered outputs with one interrupt. Any mixture of
DRS11 and/or DSS11 modules may be mounted in a UNIBUS system provided that the total does not
exceed 16 and subject to the normal constraints of mounting space, bus loads and 5 volt power.

DRS11-A

Digital output device (TTL); includes one RC filtered interrupt input, two 3 m (19.6 ft) flat ribbon cables
(50 conductors) terminated into 50 pin BERG connectors for connection to field output signals.

DRS11-B

Digital output device with open collector drivers; includes one RC filtered interrupt input, two 3 m (19.6
ft) flat ribbon cables (50 conductors) terminated into 50 pin BERG connectors for connection to field
output Signals.

DRS11-MP

Optically isolated DC drivers with open collectors; prerequisite is DRS11-B.

DSS11-A

Digital input device (TTL); includes two 3 m (19.6 ft) ribbon cables (50 conductors) terminated into 50
pin BERG connectors for connection to field input signals.

DSS11-B

Digital input device; includes two 3 m (19.6 tt) ribbon cables (50 conductors) terminated into 50 pin
BERG connectors for connection to field input Signals.

DSS11-M

Contact sense input; prerequisite is DS11-A.

2-20

Options

Realtime Options
Voltage Information for DRS11/DSS11
(Ou~ut Voltage)

(OU~ut Voltage)

ff State

n State

Isolation
Voltage

Input
Voltage

DRS11-A

TTL

N/A

DRS11-B

30Vdc

0.7 Vdc/40 rnA

N/A

DRS11-MP

50Vdc

1 Vdc/75 rnA

500Vdc

N/A

D5511-A

N/A

500Vdc

4-7 Vdc

D5511-B

N/A

500Vdc

24 Vdc

D5511-MP

N/A

24Vdc

Option

The DRU11-C allows users to interface a UNIBUS based CPU to instruments and other devices that require large
amounts of data to be passed to or from them at moderate to high speeds (up to 500 KW/s continuous). This is
accomplished by establishing two buffers in main memory. Data transfers go to the first buffer. Once the first buffer
is full, transfer automatically shifts to the second buffer as it simultaneously transfers the contents of the first buffer
to a disk or processor. When the second buffer is full, transfer switches back to the first buffer. In this way, very
large blocks of data can be moved to or from the processor without interruption.
The DRU 11-CC version uses TTL drivers and will interface to devices up to 15m (49.2 tt) from the processor. For
longer distances the DRU 11-CD incorporates differential drivers and receivers that are capable of transfering data
up to 300 m (984 ft) from the processor.
DRU11-CC

Alternate buffer interface with TTL drivers; 15 m (49.2 tt).

DRU11-CD

Alternate buffer interface with differential drivers; 300 m (984 tt). DRU11-CC plus Signal conditioning
module. Cables are not included. The SC05L-xx or SC08R-xx are recommended.

Q·bus Analog 1/0 Options
AAV11-C

12-bit, 4-channel digital-to-analog converter and CRT control. Provides an output signal that meets the
needs of many industrial and laboratory applications.

ADV11-C

12-bit, 16 channel analog-to-digital converter with program-controlled sampling rates to 25 kHz and
external realtime clock input for AID trigger. Provides input capability for many industrial and laboratory
applications.

AXV11-C

Combination 16-channel analog input, 2-channel analog output interface board for the Q-bus. Features
two analog output channels with ranges identical to the input channels.

Note: Analog options are compatible with the system backplane but are not installed in a Digital manufacturing
facility. They do not include I/O Connection Panel inserts, nor are they qualified for use in a FCC Class A system.
They are available as add-on options for installation in a system by technically experienced customers. UNIBUS
analog options are described in the Peripherals Handbook.

IEEE Interfaces
Digital's family of IEEE bus interface controllers connect a Q-bus or a UNIBUS based system to IEEE-448-1978
test equipment.
The IEU11 and IEQ11 incorporate two independent IEC/IEEE-448 controllers. Each controller is capable of
supporting up to 1 5 instruments, including the controller itself. This gives the user the ability to connect up to 28
instruments to a single module. The IEC11 is a single controller which allows you to connect up to 15 instruments,
including the controller itself.
The IEU11, IEQ11, and IEC11 are bit-parallel byte-serial controllers that can perform transfers in either program
interrupt or direct memory access (DMA) mode. DMA is standard with the IEU11 and the IEQ11. It is optional with
the IEC11. Each independent bus provides system controller, controller-in-charge, talker, and listener capabilities.
Termination of data transfers are by E.O.I. or byte count. The IEU11 and IEQ11 also offer termination of data
transfers by match characters.
Options

2-21

Realtime Options
IEU11-AB

Dual bit-parallel, byte-serial DMA bus interface controller for UNIBUS IEEE-488-1978 instruments.
Includes interface module, test cable, bulkhead/cable assembly for connecting to one of the two IEEE
controllers on the module. See the cable chart below.

IEQ11-AB

Dual bit-parallel, byte-serial DMA bus interface controller for Q-bus IEEE-488-1978 instruments. Includes interface module, test cable, bulkhead/cable assembly for connecting to one IEEE STD 488
controller. See the cable chart below.

IEC11-AB

Bit-parallel, byte-serial bus controller for UNIBUS IEEE STD-488-1978 devices.

IEC11-BA

DMA option for the IEC11-AB.

IEC11-CA

IEC11-AB plus IEC11-BA. See the cable chart below.

Cable Information for IEEE Interfaces
Model

Standard

Cable to
1 st Controller

Cable to
2nd Controller

Cable to
User Device

IEU11-AB

IEEE 488

Included

BN11D-02

BN01A-02

IEQ11-AB

IEEE 488

Included

70-20161-01

BN01A-02

IEC11-AB

IEEE 488

Included

N/A

BN01A-02

IEC11-BA

IEEE 488

Included

N/A

BN01A-02

IEC11-CA

IEEE 488

Included

N/A

BN01A-02

Realtime Clocks
KW11-P

UNIBUS programmable realtime clock. Program-selectable interrupts of 100 kHz, 10kHz, line frequency
or external signal, counted down by 16-bit counters with automatic reload.

KWV11-C

Q-bus 1 6-bit programmable realtime clock. Four programmable modes and five crystal-controlled frequencies are user-selectable. Refer to the Microcomputer Interfaces Handbook.

2-22

Options

Realtime I/O Cables
110 Cables
BC07D-xx 2 X 20-conductor, flat ribbon cable assembly has a 40-pin female H856 connector. The one open end
allows the user to configure this cable to specific system requirements, providing compatibility with customersupplied equipment and instruments. May be used with DRV11 . The following standard lengths are available:
BC07D-10
BC07D-15
BC07D-25

3.0 m (10 tt)
4.6 m (15 tt)
7.6 m (25 tt)

BC06R-xx 40-conductor, flat, shielded cable with connectors at both ends. May be used with the DR11-W. The
following standard lengths are available:
BC06R-06

6 tt(1.8 m)

BC06R-10

10 ft(3 m)

BC06R-25

25 ft(7.6 m)

BC06R-50

50 tt(15.2 m)

BC20M-50

RS232 1/0 cable with 10-pin AMP connectors at both ends. For use in high-speed communication
between two DLV11-Js. Available in 50 ft (15.2 m) length.

BC21B-05

Round, 6-conductor cable assembly has a male EIA RS232 connector with built-in strain relief at one end
and a 10-pin keyed socket at the other end. This 3-twisted wire pairs, sheild cable is for use with the
DLV11-J. Available in 5 ft (1.5 m) length.

BC04Z-xx 40-conductor, flat, multipurpose cable has one pre-assembled terminated end. The one open end allows
the user to configure this cable to specific system requirements, providing compatibility with customer-supplied
equipment and instruments. Also features one H855 connector. May be used with DRV11. The following standard
lengths are available.
BC04Z-D1
BC04Z-D6
BC04Z-10
BC04Z-15
BC04Z-25
BC04Z-50

1 ft (0.3 m).
6ft(1.8m).
10ft (3.0 m).
15 ft (4.6 m).
25 ft (7.6 m).
50 ft (15.2 m).

BC07D-xx 20-conductor flat ribbon cable assembly has a 40-pin female H856 connector. The one open end allows
the user to configure this cable to specific system requirements, providing compatibility with customer-supplied
equipment and instruments. May be used with DRV11. The following standard lengths are available:
BC07D-10
BC07D-15
BC07D-25

10ft (3.0 m).
15 ft (4:6 m).
25 ft (7.6 m).

Options

2-23

Environmental Information and Products
Proper site planning and preparation can simplify the system installation process and can produce efficient, reliable
system operation. Although each system site is different, the following pOints should be evaluated in order to ensure
maximum system efficiency:
• Space for system components with an area for operation, maintenance, and ventillation. (Digital recommends a one m (39 in) front, rear, and side service
area for cabinets.)
• Access to adequate system power (voltage, current,
and frequency) that is free from power line disturbances.
• Installation of a dedicated power distribution panel for
the computer system.
• Proper fire and safety precautions (including emergency shutdown capability).
• Adequate air conditioning and humidifying equipment.
• Construction requirements (raised floors, floor loading
and grounding, cable location, etc.).
• Operational requirements that determine the specific
location of freestanding system peripherals.
• Location of peripheral devices so that the length of the
connecting cable will not exceed maximum limits.
• Availability of additional space and power service for
future system expansion.

The computer area environment (temperature and humidity) has a substantial effect on the overall reliability of a
system an9 should be individually evaluated by a Digital Field Service representative. For optimal system performance, Digital recommends the following environment:
• Temperature: 21° plus or minus 3°C (70° plus or
minus SOF)
• Temperature rate of change: 3°C/hr(S.SoF/hr)
• Relative humidity: SO% plus or minus 10% (no condensation)
• Humidity rate of change: 6%/hr

Several environmental products deSigned to enhance system reliability and performance are described in this
section. Please remember that all PDP-11 environments should be fully evaluated by a Digital field service
representative to ensure best system performance.

2-24

Options

Power Distribution System

The Power Distribution System (PDS) is designed for medium- to large-sized (15 - 100 KVA) Digital computer
systems and is recommended ·for use with configurations of four or more cabinets. It contains all the AC power
components necessary to provide AC power to the CPU cabinet, expansion cabinets, and peripheral devices, and
to connect the entire computer system to the building power source. It is designed not only to distribute power, but
also to monitor power to the computer system.
Whether purchasing a new Digital computer system, moving a present system, adding to or reconfiguring a present
system, the addition of the PDS can Simplify installation and provide greater flexibility in layout. The PDS unit is about
the size of a typical freestanding disk drive. Everything the user needs to install the system is furnished with the PDS
- power junction box, input cable and attachment plug, input main circuit breaker, main transformer, output power
cables, output panelboards and circuit breakers, common ground reference, and safety ground connector.
The PDS provides electrical and safety requirements within the restrictions of the National Electrical Code, and is
U.L. listed. For further information concerning this product, consult your local Digital sales representative or Digital's
Installed Base Group (IBG).

Options

2·25

Constant Voltage Conditioner

~ ~< '1
~-~~ ~

-------.

-:---

The Constant Voltage Conditioner (CVC) is a completely portable, self-contained, integrated power conditioning
system. It is designed specifically for small Digital computer systems, such as the PDP-11 123-PLUS, the PDP-11 I
24, the MICRO PDP-11, the Professional 300, and Digital word processors and video terminals.
The CVC was developed to correct input voltage fluctuations, as well as 'brownout' conditions often encountered
during peak power usage situations. Protection from electrical noise and impulses and 'spikes' is also provided by
theCVC.
Further information on this product can be obtained from your local Digital sales office or by contacting Digital's
Installed Base Group (IBG).

Performance Characteristics:
• Single-point grounding
• Isolation
• Voltage regulation
• High-quality connectors and components

2-26

Options

Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors

High-energy surges caused by electrical storms and by man-made disturbances can damage your computer system.
These energy surges can enter your system through the AC power lines or through the data communication lines.
Digital now has a family of products designed specifically to solve these problems.
The H7007-A series of Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors for AC power provides high-energy, fast-acting,
power-line transient protection regardless of the cause. The H7007-8 and C series of suppressors are designed to
protect single and multiple data lines in both EIA and 20mA configurations. For receiver and transmitter protection, a
transient Voltage Surge Suppressor should be installed at both ends of the data line.

Features and Benefits:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

High current protection
Fast response time
No hold over current
Fast, simple installation
Instant recovery
Multistage hybrid circuit design
Failure indicator lamp
(H7007-A)
• Fourconductors protected
plus cable (H7007 -8)

Options

2-27

Configuring Information

Q-bus Processor Options & Memories Configuring Chart
<.

Opt/on

Mounting Code

DC Amps Drawn

Watts

Bus Loads Drawn
(AC/DC)

@+SV/+12V
FPF11

Quad Slot in CPU Backplane

7.5/0

37.5

MSV11-PK

Quad Slot

3.45/0

17.3

2/1

MSV11-PL

Quad Slot

3.6/0

2/1

MCV11-DC

Double Slot

1.2/0

2/1

PDP-11/24 Processor Options & Memories
Option

Mounting Code

DC Amps Drawn
@+SV

Bus Loads Drawn

FPF11

Quad slot in CPU backplane

7.5

MS11-PB

Hex Slot

4.8

KT24

Hex Slot adjacent to CPU

4.5

PDP-11/44 Processor Options & Memories
Option

Mounting Code

DC Amps Drawn
@+SV

Bus Loads Drawn

FP11-F

Dedicated (Hex) Slot

7.3

KE44-A

Dedicated (Hex plus Quad) Slots

9.6

MS11-PB

Dedicated (Hex) Slot

4.8

Note: Each MS11-LO or MS11·PB consumes one bus load in the PDP-11 /24. Each MS11·LD or MS11-PB consumes no bus
loads in the PDP·11/44.

2-28

Options

Configuring Information
a-bus Communication Options Configuring Chart
Option

Mounting Code

DC Amps Drawn
@+5V/+12V

Watts

Bus Loads
AC/DC

1/0 Panel
Insert Size

DLVE1-DP

1 Double Slot

1.01.15

6.8

1.6/1

Size A

DLVJ1-LP

1 Double Slot

1.01.25

1/1

SizeB

DMV11-BP

1 Quad Slot

3.4/0.38

21.6

2/1

Size A

DMV11-CP

1 Double Slot

3.35/.26

19.9

2/1

SizeB

DMV11-AP, FP

1 Quad Slot

3.4/0.38

21.6

2/1

SizeB

DPV11-AP

1 Double Slot

1.2/0.3

9.6

1/1

Size A

DUV11-AP

1 Quad Slot

.86/.32

9.8

1/1

Size A

DZV11-DP

1 Quad Slot

1.2/0.39

10.4

3.9/1

SizeB

KMV11-AA

1 Quad Slot

4.2/0.2

23.4

1/1

Size A

Options

2-29

Configuring Information
UNIBUS Communication Options Configuring Chart
Mounting Code

DC Amps Drawn
@+5V/+15V/-15V

Bus Loads
Drawn

Panel Units

DEUNA

2 Hex Slots

15.0

DH11-AP

2 SUs

10.8/0.40/0.65

DH11-DP

2 SUs

8.6/0.10/0.34

DL11-AP

1 Quad Slot

1 .8/0.05/0.15

DL 11-HP,DP

1 Quad Slot

2.0/0.05/0.15

DMP11-AP ,-EP

2 Hex Slots

12.0/0.08/0.19

DMP11-BP

2 Hex Slots

12.0/0.10/0.20

DMP11-CP,-FP

2 Hex Slots

12.0/0.10/0.20

DMR11-AP,-BP,-EP

2 Hex Slots

12.0/0.08/0.19

DMR11-CP ,-FP

2 Hex Slots

12.0/0.11/0.20

DUP11-AP

1 Hex Slot

3.6/0.08/0.08

DZ11-DP

1 Hex Slot

2.5/0.13/0.15

DZ11-HP

1 HexSlot

3.0/0.13/.30

DZS11-EA

1 HexSlot

3.35/0.13/1.5

VT1XX-EB

VT100-AA,AB

Supplied by VT100

N/A

KMS11-BD,-BE

2SUs

12.5/1.5/0.5

PCL11-B

2SUs

14/N/A/0.5

1.5

Option
Number

DECmux

2-30

Options

Configuring Information
UNIBUS Realtime Options Configuring Chart
Mounting Code

DC Amps Drawn
@+5V/ +15V 1-15V

Bus Loads
Drawn

Panel Inserts

Hex Slot

3.7/0.0/0.0

DRS11-A,-B

1 Quad Slot

2.5/0.0/0.0

DRS11-MP

1 Quad Slot

1.5/0.0/0.0

N/A

DSS11-A,-B

1 Quad Slot

1.6/0.0/0.0

DSS11-MP

1 Quad Slot

N/A

DRU11-CC

1 Quad Slot

1.5/0.0/0.0

DRU11-CD

1 Hex Slot

2.2/0.0/0.0

IEU11-AB

1 Hex Slot

3.5/0.0/0.0

IEC11-AB

1 Hex Slot

2.5/0.0/0.0

IEC11-BA

1 Hex Slot

2.5/0.0/0.0

IEC11-CA

2 Hex Slots

5.0/0.0/0.0

KW11-P

1 Quad Slot

1.0/0.0/0.0

N/A

KWV11-C

1 Dual Slot

2.2/0.01

1/1

Option
Number
DR11-W

Note: The IEC11·BA is the DMA option for IEC11·AB. Mount the DRS11·MP next to the DRS11·B. Mount the DSS11·MP next to
the DSS11·A.

Q-bus Realtime Options Configuring Chart
Option

110 Panel
Insert Size

Mounting Code

DC AmQs Drawn
@+5 1+12V

Watts

Bus Loads
(AC/DC)

DRV11-BP

1 Quad Slot

1.9/0.0

9.5

3.3/1

2 Size A

DRV11-JP

1 Dual Slot

1.8/0.0

2/1

2 Size A

DRV11-LP

1 Dual Slot

.90/0.0

4.5

2.8/1

2 Size A

AAV11-C

1 Dual Slot

2.5/0.0

12.5

.9/1

AXV11-C

1 Dual Slot

2.0/0.0

10.0

1.3/1

ADV11-C

1 Dual Slot

2.0/0.0

10.0

1.3/1

IEQ11-AB

1 Quad Slot

3.5/0.0

17.5

2/1

KWV11-C

1 Dual Slot

2.2/0.01

1/1

Options

2·31

3 Components
The PDP-11 family of microcomputers and minicomputers exemplifies the Digital philosophy of compatibility among
products to serve customers more efficiently. Growth and migration is simplified by the constant design of Digital's
computers which reflect years of experience in computer technology.
The Q-bus family compatibility and ease of migration is augmented by the fact that the entire a-bus family is available
as chips, boards, boxes, base and packaged systems. Customers can pick the level of integration that best meets
their needs.
This choice in integration levels, combined with the wide range of performance and functionality within the product
family, clearly offer a customer more flexibility and higher performance than many minicomputer and microprocessor
offerings.
This section includes the products available to customers who wish to perform their own integration of components.
Included are chip and board level processors as well as memories, processor options microprocessor development
tools (see also Section 2 - Options for additional Q-bus option descriptions).
Note:The customer is responsible for the interconnection of products to other parts of the system.

Components
Chip-Level Microprocessor Selection Chart
Selection Criteria

J-11
(DCJ11-AA)

T-11
(DCT11-AA)

Base PDP-11, EIS

Base PDP-11

Memory Management

Standard
(4MB)

No
(64KB)

Floating Point

Standard

MicroPower/Pascal
RT-11,RSTS/E
RSX-11 M/M-PLUS

MicroPower/Pascal
RT-11

Technology

CMOS

NMOS

Data Bus Width

16-Bit

8 or 16-Bit

Relative Performance Integer

3.0-5.0

1.0

Instruction Set

Software Support

Board-Level Microcomputer Selection Chart
Selection
Criteria

FALCON
(KXT11-AA)

FALCON-PLUS
(KXT11-AB)

110 Processor
(KXT11-CA)

LSI-11123
(KDF11-AA)

LSI-11123-PLUS
(KDF11-BA)

LSI-11173
(KDJ11-AA)

Board Form
Factor

Q-bus Dual

Q-bus Quad

Q-bus Dual

Q-bus Quad

Q-bus Dual

Relative
Performance

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

7.0

Floating Point

Optional

Standard

Memory
Management

Yes

Additional
On-Board
Functions

4 KBto
8 KB RAM
Upto 32 KB
ROM
2 Asynch SLUs
24 Parallel
Lines
Realtime Clock
Q-bus
Expansion
Capability

16 KB to
32 KBRAM
Upto 32 KB
RAM or ROM
2 Asynch SLUs
24 Parallel
Lines
Q-bus
Expansion
Capability

32 KBRAM
to32 KB ROM
ROM
3SLUs
20 Parallel
Lines
Realtime Clock
3 Programmable
Timers

Q-bus
Expansion
Capability

2 Asynch SLUs
Boot/Clock
Q-bus
Expansion
Capability

Q-bus
Expansion
Capability

Address Range

Upto64 KB

Up to 64 KB

Up to 4 MB

4MB

MicroPowerl
Pascal

RSX-11M
RSX-11 M-PLUS
RT-11
MicroPower/
Pascal
MACSYS Debug
MACRO-11

Software

MicroPowerl
MicroPowerl
Pascal or
Pascal or
MACSYS Debug MACSYS Debug
MACRO-11
MACRO-11
RT-11
RT-11

RSX-11 M-PLUS
RSX-11 M
RT-11
RSX-11 M-PLUS
MicroPowerl
RT-11
Pascal
MicroPower/
MACRO-11
Pascal
RSX-11 S
MACRO-11
MACSYS Debug

Components

3-3

Microprocessor Chips
Microprocessor Chips
Digital's microprocessors provide the flexibility of chip-level deSign and access to the enormous software base of
Digital operating systems, languages, and third- party application software. Competitively priced software licenses to
use the full range of operating systems are available with the microprocessors. The PDP-11 system architecture on
a chip brings the full minicomputer potential to microprocessor-based products.
DCT11-AA

The T-11 is a single chip microprocessor, in a 40-pin dual-in-line that features a Q-bus compatible
instruction set, supports industry standard peripheral chips and can operate at a maximum clock rate of
7.S megahertz. This powerful microprocessor fully supports both static and dynamic memories, incorporates DMA support as well as an internal and external interrupt structure, and uses a time multiplexed
address/data bus and a time multiplexed address/interrupt bus. Through the use of a programmable mode
register loaded during power up, the MICROIT-11 can be adapted to a wide variety of applications.
Ceramic package.

DCT11-AB

A S megahertz version of the DCT11-AA with all the same functionality; ceramic package.

DCT11-IA

A 7.S megahertz version of the DCT11-AA with all the same functionality; industrial temperature range40C to BSC; ceramic package.

DCT11-PA

A 7.S megahertz version of the DCT11-AA with all the same functionality; plastic package.

DCT11-PB

A S.O megahertz version of the DCT11-AA with all the same functionality; plastiC package.

DCT11-PC

A 10.0 megahertz version of the DCT11-AA with all the same functionality; plastiC package.

DCT11-SK

T-11 Starter kit. The kit includes: one T-11 sample; one DlART sample; T-11 data sheet; DLART data
sheet; T-11 user's guide; MOE product overview; 8-bit application note; MOE user's guide; and
MicroPower/Pascal introductory manual.

DCJ11-AA

J-11 is a CMOS microprocessor in a 60-pin package that includes 16-bit I/O, a 32-bit internal data path,
and addressing capability of up to 4 MB of memory with on-chip memory management. The J-11
implements the full PDP-11 instruction set, including EIS and Floating Point extensions, supports 4 levels
of hardware interrupt, and also supports multiprocessing, coprocessing, cache control and fault diagnosis. RT-11, MicroPower/Pascal, RSX-11 M, RSX-11 M-PLUS and RSTS/E are all available.

Software
QJB36-DZ

PDP-11 Operating System General License. Valid for DCT11 only.
Note: Although the QJB36-DZ license for the T-11 allows use of any PDP-11 Operating System, the T11 hardware can only be used with RT-11 and RSX.

QJB43-DZ

PDP-11 Operating System General License. Valid for DCJ11 only.

Microprocessor Support Chips
Digital's microprocessors can be easily interfaced to low-cost commodity peripheral chips. For maximum compatibility with existing software, there is a Digital-compatible serial interface chip - the DLART.
DC319-AA

The DLART is a DL-compatible, asynchronous receiver/transmitter designed for data communications
with Digital's microprocessors. The DLART is used as a peripheral device and is programmed by the CPU
to operate either in 8-bit or 1 6-bit mode with asynchronous baud rates varying from 300 b/s to 38.4 KB/
s. It has an internal baud rate control that reduces support logic and provides four real-time interrupt
outputs to support dynamic memory refresh for realtime system applications such as the FALCON and
FALCON-PLUS (SBC-11/21) where a T-11 is used to communicate with DLARTs. It also features one
stop bit, 40-pin DIP package, single +SV supply and single TIL clock.

DCK11-AA

Program Control Bus interface chip kit. Consists of the following 6 chips: 1 DC003 interrupt chip, 1
DC004 protocol chip, 4 DCOOS transeiver/address decoder/vector select chips.

DCK11-AB

DMA bus interface chip kit. Consists of the following nine chips: one DC003 interrupt chip, one DC004
protocol chip, and four DCOOS transeiver/address decoder/vector select chips, two word count/bus
address chips, and one DC01 0 DMA control chip.

3-4

Components

Single-Board Processors
Single Board Processors
Most Q-bus processors are available on a compact, double height 13.3 cm x 22.8 cm (5.25 in x 8.97 in) board.
Their 16-bit architecture allows easier programming, greater liD throughput, and more flexibility than 8-bit
microcomputers.
KDF11-AA

PDP-11 123 with Memory Management Unit (MMU). This 16-bit central processor unit features four MB
addressing, four- level vectored interrupts for fast response without device polling, and 87 standard
instructions including EIS.
The MMU provides address relocation to extend the physical address range to four MB. The MMU can
divide large segments of memory into smaller, more efficient segments. It also provides users with
protection features, such as the ability to control and restrict access to a memory segment.
In addition, the MMU allows the processor to operate in either a kernel or user mode. In kernel mode, the
operating system and programs have complete control and execute all instructions. In user mode,
programs are prohibited from performing the instructions that could modify the kernel program, halt the
computer, or access memory space reserved to the kernel or other users. The KDF11-AA is a dualheight module.

KDF11-AC

PDP-11 123 single-board (without MMU), 16-bit central processing unit features 64 KB addressing, fourlevel vectored interrupts for fast response without device polling, 87 standard PDP-11 instructions
including EIS and 46 optional floating point instructions. It is a dual- height module.

KDF11-BA

Upgrade option. PDP-11 123-PLUS CPU board includes all features of the KDF11-AA plus two serial
lines, diagnostics, bootstrap ROM, and program- controlled line clock. The KDF11-BA is a quad- height
module. For system installation, select one of the following cabinet kits:

CK-KDF1 B-KA

Cabinet kit. For use with BA23 box (includes selectable baud switch).

CK-KDF1 B-KB

Cabinet kit. For use with BA 11-M box (includes selectable baud switch).

CK-KDF1 B-KC

Cabinet kit. For use with H349 panel (includes selectable baud SWitch).

CK-KDF2B-KB

Cabinet kit. For use with BA 11-M box (does not include selectable baud SWitch).

KDF11-BE

Upgrade option. KDF11-BA with Boot ROM for MICRO/PDP-11 (Note that both KDF11-B options can
use the same cabinet kits).

KDJ11-AA

LSI-11/73 high performance PDP-11 processor with 8 KB cache memory, floating point, memory
management, and system registers.
Cache memory - maintains a copy of selected portions of main memory for faster access of instructions
and data.
Floating Point Unit - implements 46 microcode instructions that perform arithmetic, logical, and conversion operations.
Memory Management Unit - allows for memory addressing up to 4 MB with 22-bit addressing. In addition,
the Memory Management Unit allows the processor to operate in either kernel, supervisory, and user (k/
yes/u) processor modes.
Kernel Mode - the most most privileged of the three modes. It allows execution of any instruction or
operating system, and programs have complete control and execute of all instuctions.
Supervisory Mode - the next most privileged mode. It may be used to provide for the mapping and
execution of programs sharable by users but still requiring protection from them.
User Mode - the least privileged mode. The programs are prohibited from the instruction that could
modify the kernel program, or access memory space reserved to the kernel or supervisory users.
The system registers are the following, which are briefly described:
Cache Control - controls operation of cache.
Hit/Miss - indicates whether the six most recent CPU memory references resulted in cache hits or cache
misses.
Program Interrupt Request (PIRO) - allows generation of software interrupts.
CPU Error - identifies the source of failure.
Memory System Error - identifies cache or memory parity errors.
Une Time Clock - allows software control of the line time clock.
Maintenance - allows software to determine which of the module jumpers are installed and which'are not
installed.
Compatible with O-bus 18/22-bit addressing, 4 jumper selectable power-up option, on-board diagnostics
with 4 microdiagnostic LEDs. The KDJ11-AA is a dual height module.
Components
3-5

Single Board Processors
Single Board Computers
KXT11-AA

SBC-11121 FALCON single-board, 16-bit central processor unit features 4 KB of static RAM; 64 KB
direct addressing capability; a-bus interface; PDP-11 base-level instruction set; 50, 60, or 800 Hz
realtime clock; 24-line parallel I/O; two asynchronous serial I/O ports; four 28-pin memory sockets for up
to 4 KB of additional RAM and 16 KB of ROM, or an extra 32 KB of ROM.

KXT11-AB

SBC-11/21 Falcon-PLUS single-board, 16-bit central processor features 16 KB of static RAM, 64 KB of
direct addressing capability; a-bus interface; PDP-11 base-level instruction set; 50, 60, or 800 Hz
realtime clock; 24-line parallel I/O; two asynchronous serial I/O ports; four 28-pin memory sockets for up
to 16 KB of additional RAM and 1 6 KB of ROM, or an extra 32 KB of RAM or 32 KB of ROM.

KXT11-CA

The KXT11-CA single-board computer has two modes of operations. It can be used as a single-board
computer or as a peripheral processor.
The KXT11-CA single-board, 16-bit central processor unit (T-11 ) features a-bus compatability; PDP-11
base-level instruction set; 32 KB of static RAM; two 28-pin sockets for user ROM or static RAM; 20-line
parallel I/O; two channel DMA controllers; three programmable interval timers; system line time clock, onboard diagnostic with LED indicators. Has three serial line units: one asynchronous serial line with
programmable baud rate from 300 to 38.4 Kbaud, one programmable synchronous/asynchronous serial,
and one programmable synchronous/asynchronous modem control.
KXT11-CA, Single-board computer mode of operation for stand-alone dedicated realtime I/O application.
As a peripheral processor up to 14 KXT11-CA may be configured on a ·single a-bus with a host
processor such as KDJ 11 or KDF11 . The KXT11-CA is quad height module.

Software
OJB46-DZ

PDP-11 Operating Systems General License. Valid for KD11 and KDF11 CPU boards only.

OJV51-DZ

KXT11-C tool kit for RT-11.

OJV52-DZ

KXT11-C tool kit for RSX.

KXT11-C

Tool kit that includes the following components:
A utility capable of loading binary files into the KXT11 in the system CPU running RT or RSX. Once the
program is loaded, the utility allows the programmer to execute the program; aids in debugging phase.
An RT or RSX driver for sending and receiving messages from the KXT11 applications.
A manual describing how to use the KXT11 from the given operating system.

3-6

Components

Single Board Processors
Processor Options
The Q-bus processors offer single- and double-precision floating point options, the Commercial Instruction Set, and
Extended and Floating point Instruction Sets (EIS/FIS).
KEF11-AA

Single- and double-precision floating point option for use with the KDF11-AA. Performs· hardware
operations on 32-bit and 64-bit floating point numbers. Provides up to 17 digits of precision, as well as
integer to floating point conversions. Mounts on the CPU board. 40 pin DIP IC. On KDF11-A, KTF11 is
required.

KEF11-BB

Commercial Instruction Set (CIS). Implements a set of 17 commercial instructions on a variety of data
types, including character strings, packed decimal, and numeric formats. Mounts on the CPU board.

FPF11

Single- and double-precision floating pOint option for use with the KDF11-A and KDF11-B boards. The
microcode to implement this option resides on one quad module mounted adjacent to the CPU. Performs
hardware options on 32-bit and 64-bit floating point numbers. Provides up to 1 7 digits of precision, as
well as integer to floating point conversions. Executes instructions approximately six times faster than the
KEF11-AA.

KTF11

Memory Management Chip for use with the KDF11-AC. It features 4 MB addressing range (22-bit),
memory segmentation and built in memory protection. 40 pin DIP IC.

KXT11-A2

This twO-Chip EPROM set provides a number of special utilities to use while developing, debugging and
downline loading software to the KXT11-AA using MicroPower/Pascal.

Components

3- 7

Memories and Multifunction Options
Digital offers a wide range of microcomputer products including RAM, ROM, PROM and multifunction boards.

RAM Memories
MCV11 modules provide CMOS static Random Access Memory with on-board battery backup.
MCV11-0A

8 KB with minimum data retention time of 2,647 hours (110 days). It is a dual height module.

MCV11-0C

32 KB with minimum data retention of 1,180 hours (50 days). It is a dual height module.

MSV11 memory modules are complete dynamic MOS memory subsystems.
MSV11-00

64 KB quad height module, 1 6K RAMs (1 8-bit addressing).

MSV11-LF

128 KB dual height module, 64K RAMs.

MSV11-LK

256 KB dual height module, 64K RAMs.

MSV11-PL

512 KB with parity, quad height module, 64K RAMs.

MSV11-PK

256 KB with parity, quad height module, 64K RAMs.

ROM Memories
MRV11 PROM/ROM module with 16 sockets that accept customer supplied, erasable UVPROM, fusible link PROM
or masked ROM devices. It also accepts several densities of ROM chips. The MRV11 can operate in window
mapping address mode, and also provides bootstrapping capability.
MRV11-C

Accomodates 24-pin devices up to and including 4K x 8 chips for a total capacity of 64 KB (18-bit
adressing).

MRV11-0

Accomodates 24 and 28-pin devices including 8K x 8 static RAMs, and 32K x 8 chips for a maximum of
512 KB of memory.

Multifunction Modules
MXV11 Multifunction module featuring dynamic MOS RAM with on-board refresh, user-configuration with PROM or
system device bootstrap ROM option, acceptance of two 5V, 24-pin UVPROM or fusible link PROM chips, two
serial lines meeting RS-432 standard (backward compatible with RS-232C), baud rates up to 38.4K, and 50/60 Hz
crystal clock.
MXV11-AA

8 KBRAM

MXV11-AC

32 KBRAM

MXV11-A2

256 word bootstrap/diagnostic ROM set for use with the MXV11-AA, MXV11-AC, and MRV11-C.
Supports 18-bit addreSSing and provides bootstrap support for the TU58, RL01 , RL02, and RX02.

MXV11-BF

High density multifunction module includes 128 KB RAM, two 28-pin user ROM sockets, two independ. ently configurable asynchronous serial lines compatible with RS232-C and RS423, and a realtime clock
configurable at 50, 60, or 800 Hz. Supports 22-bit addressing.

MXV11-B2

8K word bootstrap/diagnostic ROM set for use with the MXV11-BF or MRV11-0. Supports 22-bit
addreSSing and provides bootstrap support for TU58, RL01 , RL02, and RX02. Also supports RO/RX50
and OECnet.

IEEE Option
IBV11 instrumentation bus interface. Connects the Q-bus to the 16-line, IEEE-488 bus.

3-8

Components

Enclosures, Cables & Backplanes
System Enclosures
BA11-MA(MB)

The BA 11-MA (MB) master box contains an 18 address bit backplane; the H9270. The H9270 has the
a-bus on slots AlB and C/O and can accept up to eight double-height or four quad-height modules.
Dimensions are 8.8 x 48.2 x 34.2 cm (3.5 x 19 x 13.5 in). The power supply (H780) comes with a
master console and provides 18 amps @+5V and 3.5 amps @+12V.

BA11-SA(SB)

The BA 11-SA (SB) master box contains a 4 x 9 slot backplane with 22 bit addressing on slots AlB only.
The backplane accepts up to nine double-height or nine quad-height modules and is compatible with the
RLV21 and the RLV22 options. Dimensions are 13.2 x 48.3 x 57.8 cm (5.2 x 19 x 22.7 in). The power
supply comes with a master console and provides 36 amps@+5Vand 5 amps@+12V.

BA23-A,AF,AR

The BA23 master box contains a 4 x 822 bit addressing back plane. Slots one through three provide 22
bit addressing on AlB only; slots four through eight provide 22 bit addressing on slots AlB and C/O. Up to
eight quad-height or 3 quad and 10 dual height modules can be mounted. The BA23 has mounting space
for two RD51 or RX50 mass storage devices.
Dimensions are:
BA23-A Chassis-15 x 56.5 x 72.4 cm (6 x 22 x 28 in)
BA23-AF Floor Mount-61.2 x 25.4 x 71.5 cm (24.5 x 10 x 28 in)
BA23-AR Rack Mount-13.1 x 47.5 x 64.8 cm (5.25 x 19 x 25 in)
The power supply comes with a master console and provides 36 amps@+5V and 7 amps @+12V.

BA11-SE(SF)

The BA 11-SE(SF) is a cabinet-mountable eight-slot expansion box with bezel required for 22-bit
expansion of the PDP-11/23-PLUS system. Only one expansion box is supported by the PDP-11/23PLUS. It must be mounted in the CPU cabinet and with the 1 20 VAC box. A replacement power
controller (874-C or 874-0) is required.

Cables
BC20N-OS

The BC20N-05 is an RS232-C null modem cable with a 1 O-pin AMP and a female connector. It is used
with the DLV11-J and MXV11 to connect directly with an RS232-C cable coming from a terminal. The
BC20N-05 is 1.5 m (5 ft) long.

BC21B-OS

This is an RS232-C cable with a 1 O-pin AMP and a male connector. It can be used with the DLV11-J or
the MXV11 to connect to a modem or to the BC20N-05 cable. The BC21 B-05 is 1.5 m (5 tt) long.

BCV1B-06

This jumper cable assembly is used to expand the backplane from the first to second backplane or
expansion box. It consists of two modules connected by two 1.8 m (6 tt). 40-conductor Berg to Berg
Connectors.

BCV2A-03

This cable and assembly is used for connecting the CPU box to the BA 11-SE(SF) expansion box.

Backplanes
H9270

This 4 x 4-slot backplane with card guide is a a-bus which will accept eight double-height or 4 guadheight boards on slots A/B and C/O. The H9270 is compatible with the RLV12 and RLV22 options.

H9273-A

This 4 x 9-slot backplane with card quide is a a-bus which will accept up to nine double-height or quadheight boards on slots A/B and a special module interconnect bus on slots C/O. The H9273 is compatible
with the RLV21 , and RLV22 options.
.

H927S

The H9275 4 x 9-slot backplane with card guide is a non-expandable backplane with 22-bit addressing
and built-in bus terminators. It contains the 22-bit bus (a22) on slots AlB and C/O, and will accept 18
double-height or nine quad-height boards. It is compatible with the RLV12 and RLV22 options.

H9281

H9281 is a family of 3 backplanes with card guides: the H9281-BA is a 2 x 4-slot backplane where the
a-bus on slots AlB accepts up to 4 double-height modules. The H9281-BB is a 2 x 8-slot backplane with
built-in bus terminators, and the a-bus on slots AlB accepts up to eight double-height boards. The
H9281-BC is a 2 x 12-slot backplane which includes bus terminators; the a-bus on slots AlB accepts up
to 1 2 double-height boards.

Components

3-9

Microcomputer Development T0015
Microcomputer Development Systems (MDS)
11 MDS is a new family of microcomputer board-level development systems that provides all of the hardware and
software necessary to produce executable, run-time applications for Digital microcomputers. Special hardware
features include memory management, floating-point microcode and the ability to downline load and remotely debug
applications. 11 MDS comes in two software versions: 1) MACSYS/RT-11-includes the RT-11 operating system
and supports programs written in MACRO-11 and 2) MicroPower/Pascal-a new application/executive tool kit. Both
systems have extensive programming and debugging features to facilitate application development.
11 MDS includes the following base hardware:
• PDP-11 /23 CPU with MMU
• 128 KB RAM
• Configured VT1 03-AA with advanced video option
• 4 serial lines (target port, printer port, RX02 connect, auxiliary port)
• Boot ROM
• Diagnostic hardware and software
• Table top RX02 (dual 512 KB)
• Receive-only LA 120, 180 cps lineprinter

Ordering Information:
11 MD5-M (A,C,D)

1·1 MOS hardware with MACSYS/RT-11 (QJ061-AX) software

11 MD5-P (A,C,D)

11 MOS hardware with MicroPower/Pascal (QJ029-XX) software

11MD5-Y (A,C,D)

11 MOS hardware with the right to copy RT-11 (Prerequisite: RT-11 supported license)

11 MD5-Z (A,C,D)

11 MOS hardware with the right to copy MACSYS-RT (Prerequisite: MACSYS supported license)

Key

(A) 1 20 VAC/60Hz
(C) 1 20 VAC/50Hz
(0) 220 VAC/50Hz

PBll PROM Programmer
The PB11 PROM Programmer is a hardware/software package that consists of a desk-top unit and a choice of four
adapter kits which make it possible to program a variety of PROM chips. The system connects to a serial line on an
RT-11 based Q-bus system. This enables you to transfer a program through the PB11 directly to the PROM.
PB11 is a Desk-Top Universal PROM Programmer with 7.6 m (25 ft) Null Modem RS232-C cable for connection to
11 MDS systems using a serial interface with RS232-C cable. Includes Customer-Supported/Customer-Installed
software. Adapter Kit must be purchased with the unit.

Ordering Information:
PB11-AH

Software on RL02 cartridge disk

PB11-AQ

Software on RL01 disk

PB11-AY

Software on RX01 floppy disk

PB11K-AA

Adapter kit for 82S129, 82S131, fusible link PROMs

PB11K-AB

Adapter kit for 2708 UV PROMs

PB11K-AC

Adapter kit for 82S181, 82S191, fusible link PROMs

PB11K·AD

Adapter kit for 2716,2732 UV PROMs.

MACDBG-RT
MACDBG is a remote symbolic debugging tool used to debug MACRO-11 level programs running on target Digital
microcomputers. MACDBG consists of a program which executes under an RT-11 host system. Communication
between MACDBG and the target processors is done via MICRO ODT over a serial line connection from the host to
the target processor's console port.

Ordering Information:
QJ039-AH

RL02 distribution media

QJ039-AX

RX02 distribution media

QJ039-DZ

Oocumetation-only kit

3-1 0

Components

Configuring Information
Processor Configuring Chart
Option
Number

Mounting Code

DC Amps Drawn
+SV/+12V

Bus Loads Drawn
ACIDC

Watts

KDF11-AA
KEF11-AA
KTF11-A
FPF11

1 Dual or
Double Slot

2.0/0.2

2.0/1.0

10.24
10.24

KDF11-BA
KDF11-BE

1 Quad Slot

4.5/0.3

2.0/1.0

26.1
26.1

KDJ11-AA

1 Dual Slot

4.0/

2.0/1.0

20.0

KXT11-AA
KXT11-A2
KXT11-AB
KXT11-AS

1 Dual Slot

2.8/1.1

1.7/1.0

27.2

KXT11-CA

1 Quad Slot

25.0

27.2

5.0/0.2

2.0/1.0

27.4

Multifunction Configuring Chart
Option
Number

Mounting Code

DC Amps Drawn
+SV/ +12V

Bus Loads Drawn
ACIDC

Watts

MXV11-AA
MXV11-AC
MSV11-A2

1 Dual Slot

1.2/0.1

2.0/2.0

7.2

MSV11-BF
MSV11-B2

1 Dual Slot

3.4/0.1

2.3/0.5

16.65

Components

3-11

Configuring Information
Memory Configuring Chart
Option
Number

Mounting Code

DC Amps Drawn
+5V/+12V

Bus Loads Drawn
AC/DC

Watts

MCV11-DA

1 Dual Slot

1.9/0.0

1.0/

9.5

MCV11-DC

1 Dual Slot

2.0/0.0

1.0/

10.0

MRV11-C

1 Dual Slot

8.0/0.0

2.0/1.0

4.0

MRV11-D

1 Dual Slot

1.6/0.0

3.0/0.5

8.0

MSV11-DD

1 Dual Slot

1.7/0.37

1.0/

12.94

MSV11-LF
MSV11-LK

1 Dual Slot

4.0/0.0

1.0/

20.1
20.1

MSV11-PK
MSV11-PL

1 Quad Slot

4.0/0.0

N/A

17.25
17.25

Watts

IEEE Option Configuring Chart

3-1 2

Option
Number

Mounting Code

DC Amps Drawn
+5V/+12V

Bus Loads Drawn
AC/DC

IBV11-A

1 Dual Slot

0.8/0.0

1.8/1 .0

Components

4 Disks and Tapes
Long established as a leader in the manufacture of computer systems, Digital now sets the standard for the design
and manufacture of storage systems with its Digital Storage Architecture (DSA). The DSA is a framework for an
expanding group of mass storage products and intelligent. controllers. Within this framework, the DSA disk drives are
all compatible with both DSA intelligent controllers, the UDA50 and for VAX systems, the HSC50. Any drive can be
connected to any controller port, and drives can be mixed on the same controller. The drives are all dual-ported and
may be connected to a UDA50 by one port and to an HSC50 by the other. The DSA disk drives include the 121 MB
RA80 and 456 MB RA81 Winchester Fixed Disks and the 205 MB RA60 Removable-Media Disk. Any combination
of up to three of these disks require only one 106.6 cm (42 in) high cabinet giving you maximum storage capacity
and space efficiency.
The UDA50 controller has the following capabilities:
• Supports high-speed disk technology.
• Provides powerful error correcting systems for high-density recording.
• Provides multiple level performance optimizations for both single and multiple drive subsystems.
• Provides superior availability features.
• Unburdens the host system of the overhead associated with error handling and I/O throughput optimization.
For long term data backup storage, Digital offers high quality 9-track magnetic tape drives featuring industry
standard 1600 b/in and 800 b/in formats. Digital's TU80 and TSV05 magnetic tape subsystems feature start/stop
and streaming tape technology.
The Disk and Tape Selection Charts on the facing page include these and other disk and tape subsystems.

Disks and Tapes
Disk Storage Selection Chart
Model

Ca~city per

Drive

Avera~~ Access

Peak Transfer
(KB/s)

Media
Type

Page

Ime

RA60

205MB

50 msec

1980

Removable

4-10

RASO

121 MB

33msec

1200

Fixed
Winchester

4-7

RAS1

456MB

36 msec

2200

Fixed
Winchester

4-8

RD51

10MB

85msec

5000

Fixed
Winchester

4-12

RL02

10.4 MB

67 msec

512

Cartridge

4-14

RX02

0.5MB

262 msec

Floppy

4-16

RX50

1.6MB

164 msec

250

Floppy

4-13

Disks and Tapes

4-3

Controllers
The UDA50 Controller
The UDA50 controller implements the Digital Storage Architecture (DSA). It is an intelligent controller containing a
high-speed processor that executes host interface and drive interface programs simultaneously. Orderable as a
subsystem, the UDA50 can handle data rates up to three MB per second. The physical configuration consists of two
hex modules that interface to the PDP-11 UNIBUS. Four disk drives can be connected to a UDA50. The
interconnect is radial.
The UDA50 controller and its associated DSA series disks (RA80, RA81 , RA60) offer significant improvements in
three important areas:
• I/O throughput
• Data integrity
• Subsystem availability

110 Throughput Enhancements
I/O throughput depends upon the performance characteristics of the disk, subsystem performance optimization
features, and the application workload. In Digital Storage Architecture (DSA) systems, the UDA50 Significantly
enhances the performance of the disk drive because of the following capabilities:
• Command Queue-Stores up to 20 I/O requests providing a mechanism for optimizations.
• Seek Ordering-Rearranges and executes requests by cylinder address, improving throughput in single or
multidrive subsystems.
• Overlapped Seeking-Transfers data from one disk while Simultaneously seeking to all disks.
• Rotational Optimization-8elects the disk nearest to the beginning sector when more than one disk is positioned
on cylinder.
• Express Queue-Provides FIFO servicing of I/O requests if required.
• Speed Matching Buffer-Provides 52 sectors of Random Access Memory (RAM) allowing disk-to-controller
transfers at a higher burst rate than controller-to-host transfers.
• DMA Transfer-Allows direct controller-to-host memory transfers.
• Automatic Revectoring-References a replacement block on the same or a nearby track when a bad block is
encountered, thus enabling users to allocate large contiguous file space without concern for bad blocks.

Data Integrity Features
The UDA50 controller has the following comprehensive set of features to ensure data integrity:
• Error Correction Code (ECC)-Detects and corrects up to eight independent error bursts, reducing the possibility
of uncorrected data errors that result from normal media degradation.
• Redundant Header Addresses-Records disk block header information four times for more reliable error handling.
• Automatic Sector Reallocation-Automatically removes defective blocks from service, and replaces them with
others, without causing shrinkage in usable space.
• Error Detection Code-Checks controller memory errors as well as ECC hardware operations.
• Seek Error Recovery-Ghecks for mispositioning of disk heads. If mispositioning is detected, the controller will
automatically recalibrate and reinitiate seek operation.
• Data Compare Command-Gompares host data read and write.
• Error Reporting-All errors are reported to the host system, enabling detection and preventive action before
subsystem failure.
• Error Recovery Offioading-Ail error recovery routines are initiated and completed in the subsystem.

4-4

Disks and Tapes

Controllers
Subsystem Availability Features
The UDA50 offers the following set of features to increase subsystem availability:
• Radial Attachment-Radial disk-to-controller attachments prevent failure in one disk from affecting the operation
of other disks in the subsystem.
• On-board Diagnostics-lndicates fault conditions on LED displays and in a hardware register that is readable by
the host.
• Bus Isolation-Different power sources can be used because the drives are isolated electronically from the
controller.
• Last Fault Register-Aids subsystem troubleshooting by logging the last faults in an error register.
To summarize, the UDA50 does the following:
• Supports high-speed disk technology.
• Provides powerful error correcting systems for high-density recording.
• Provides multiple level performance optimizations for both single and multiple drive subsystems.
• Provides superior availability features.
• Supports Winchester fixed media disks as well as removable media disks of varying capacities and transfer rates.
• Unburdens the host system of the overhead associated with error handling and 1/0 throughput optimization.

The RQDXl Disk Controller
The RQDX1 controller is used to interface the RD51 10MB Winchester disk drives and the RX50 .8 MB diskette
drives to the Q-bus. Data transfer to the host system is via efficient block-mode DMA. The RQDX1 is an intelligent
controller with an on-board microprocessor. Programs in the host system communicate with the controller and
drives using the Mass Storage Control Protocol (MSCP) of the Digital Storage Architecture. MSCP and the RQDX1
include features to enhance system throughput, ensure data integrity, and increase subsystem availability.
An RQDX1 can control a maximum of four drives. Each RD51 disk counts as one drive, with a maximum of two
RD51 units per controller. Each RX50 counts as two drives. The RQDX1 controller may be used in conjunction with
the RQDX1-E drive bus extender to attach up to three devices (for example, two RD51 s and an RX50) to a Single
RQDX1 controller.
The RQDX1 is a standard feature of MICRO/PDP-11 systems. It can be added to other Q-bus systems in
conjunction with RD51 and RX50 mass storage devices. Refer to the examples of add-on disk configurations.
Note: When supporting internal drives on the MICRO/PDP-11, the RQOX1 does not use a panel insert. In other
configurations, it uses one type A panel insert.

Ordering Information:
RQOX1

Q-bus controller for RX50/RD51 .

CK-RQOX1-KA

Cabinet kit for the RQDX1 for use in the (MICRO/PDP-11) BA23 box.

CK-RQOX1-KC

Cabinet kit for the RQDX1 for use with (PDP-11 123-PLUS) H349 panel.

RQOX1-E

Double height disk drive bus extender module for use with the RQDX1 disk controller.

CK-ROQXE-KA

Cabinet kit for the RQDX1-E for use in the (MICRO/PDP-11 ) BA23 box.

CK-RQOXE-KC

Cabinet kit for the RQDX1-E for use with the (PDP-11 123-PLUS) H349 panel.

BQ01-Cx

Country kits for the RQDX1 and RQDX1-E. See the Country Kit section in Section 1 for an explanation of
how to replace the x with the appropriate second-letter suffix.

Add-on Disk Configuration
Various combinations of RD51 Winchester disks and RX50 diskette drives can be added to existing MICRO/PDP-11
and PDP-11/23-PLUS configurations. When you add another RD51 to a MICRO/PDP-11 system, you can use the
RQDX1 controller (part of the basic MICRO/PDP-11 system configuration). However, the internal disk drive bus
must be extended using the RQDX1-E module and an appropriate cabinet kit. When you add either an RD51 or an
RX50 to a PDP-11 123-PLUS system, you must include an RQDX1 controller and appropriate cabinet kit.
Descriptions of the RD51 and RX50 disk options are contained under their own headings.

Disks and Tapes

4-5

Controllers
Ordering Information:
When adding another RD51 to a MICRO/PDP-11, you need the following options:
ROOX1·E

Double height disk drive bus extender module for use with the RQDX1 disk controller.

CK·ROOXE·KA

Cabinet kit for the RQDX1-E for use in the (MICRO/PDP-11) SA23 box.

ROS1·0

10 MS Winchester drive mounted in desktop enclosure with 1/0 cable. 120VAC/240 VAC.
For rack-mount configurations, substitute RD51-R for the RD51-D and add an H9302 enclosure, as
required, to the order. H9302 can accommodate up to two 5.25-in mass storage devices, RD51 or
RX50, in any combination.

When you add an RD51 to a PDP-11 123-PLUS, the following options are required.
ROOX1

Q-bus controller for use with the RD51 and the RX50.

CK·ROOX1·KC

Cabinet kit for the RQDX1 for use with the (PDP-11 123-PLUS) H349 panel.

ROS1·0

10 MS Winchester drive mounted in desk·top enclosure with 110 cable. 120VAC/240VAC.
For rack·mount configurations, substitute RD51-R for the RD51-D and add an H9302 enclosure, as
required, to the order. H9302 can accommodate up to two 5.25-in mass storage devices, RD51 or
RX50, in any combination.

When you add an RX50 to a PDP-11/23-PLUS, the following options are required:
ROOX1

Q-bus controller for use with the RD51 and the RX50.

CK·ROOX1·KC

Cabinet kit for the RQDX1 for use with the (PDP-11 123-PLUS) H349 panel.

RXSo-O

.8 MB diskette drive mounted in desk-top enclosure with 1/0 cable. 120VAC/240VAC.
For rack-mount configurations, substitute RX50·R for the RX50-D and add an H9302 enclosure, as
required, to the order. H9302 can accommodate up to two 5.25-in mass storage devices, RD51 or
RX50, in any combination.

Additional configurations, including many with multiple drives, are available. For details, consult your Digital sales
representative.

The RLV12 RL02 Controller
Function
The RLV12 contr:oller interfaces one to four RL01 or RL02 disk drives to the Q-bus. I/O is DMA. The RLV12
performs a cyclic redundancy check on data and headers. Memory is parity checked, and the current command to
the RLV12 is aborted when the error is detected.

Ordering Information:
RLV12

Q·bus controller for RL01 and RL02.

CK-RLV1 A-KA

Cabinet kit. For use with BA23 (MICRO/PDP-11).

CK-RLV1A·KB

Cabinet kit. For use with SA 11-M (PDP-11 123-S).

CK-RLV1A·KC

Cabinet kit. For use with H349 (PDP-11/23-PLUS).

4-6

Disks and Tapes

RA80 121 MB Fixed-Disk

/
RA80

The RA80 disk subsystem uses Winchester fixed-disk technology to provide 121 MB of storage in a 26.6 cm (10.5
in) high package. The RA80 attaches to the high-performance, high-reliability microprocessor-based controller, the
UDA50. The RA80 disk offers exceptional throughput performance, the result of an advanced mechanical deSign,
which incorporates a rotary positioner-motor, computer-designed pOSitioner arms, and lightweight Winchester head
suspension.
The RA80 provides low-cost mass storage capability with room for growth in a single cabinet. When ordered in a
cabinet, a single RA80 drive ships with the H9642-AS(AT) 91.4 cm (36 in) deep cabinet. It mounts in the top bay of
the cabinet. Two additional drives (RA80s, RA81 s, or RA60s in any combination) can be mounted in the middle and
bottom cabinet bays. Note: The RA80-AA(AD) rack-mountable drive can be added to the older H9642-BM(BN)
shallow cabinet.
One BC26V-12 cable (3.7 m/12 ft) is included with every drive or subsystem to connect the RA60, RA80, or
RA81 to a UDA50 controller. If you need a longer cable, or if you want your RA60, RA80, or RA81 dual-ported to
another system, order the appropriate cable length from the table following the disk section of this chapter.
Substitute the number of feet desired for xx in the option number.

Expansion Specifications:

Ordering Information:

• Drives per UDA50 controller: 4

Subsystems

Performance Specifications:
• Formatted capacity per drive: 121 MB
• Peak transfer rate: 1.2 MB/s
• Average access time *: 33.3 msec
• Average seek time: 25 msec
• Average latency time: B.33 msec
• Dual-access feature: Standard
• Media surfaces: 7 data, 1 servo
• Physical tracks per surface: 1 092
• User sectors per track: 31
• Bytes per sector: 51 2
• Single-track seek: 6 msec
• Rotational speed: 3600 rpm

RUASG-AA(AD)

RABO rack-mountable disk drive (no
cabinet) and UDA50 controller.

RUASG-CA(CD)

RABO disk drive mounted in H9642AS(AT) cabinet and UDA50 contr:oller.

RUASG-JA(JD)

RABO-CA(CD) and two UDA50 controllers.

Disk Drives
RASG-AA(AD)

RABO rack-mountable disk drive (no
cabinet).

RASG-CA(CD)

RABO disk drive mounted in H9642AS(AT) cabinet.

Add-on Controller
RUASG-UA(UD)

UDA50 controller for upgrading
RUABO-CA(CD) to RUABO-JA(JD).
Prerequisite: RUABO-CA(CD).

Note: Average Access Time is defined as the sum of the average seek time and the average latency. It does not
include any controller optimizations. Typical applications will observe 10 to 35 percent better performance than
indicated by hardware specifications.

Disks and Tapes

4-7

RA81 456 MB Fixed-Disk

The RA81 disk is a high-capacity, rack-mountable Winchester disk. The RA81 subsystems feature a highperformance, Winchester technology disk drive and the UDA50 intelligent controller. The UDA50 increases I/O
throughput, performs extended error recovery, and contains a 52-sector data buffer to match the disk's 2.2
megabyte per second burst data rate to the host system's bus capacity. The RA81 's high capacity is achieved
through innovative engineering in the read/write and positioner control systems. The read/write system employs an
encoding scheme that yields a third greater density than drives using conventional MFM encoding. Positioning
information on a dedicated servo surface enables high-speed seeking. Additional positioning information is embedded between sectors on every track for high-precision pOSitioning. The RA81 , like all DSA disks, features dualaccess, which lets it be shared between two UDA50 controllers, to provide the redundancy required in highavailability systems, or allows sharing of disks between systems. With its 15 KB of on-board diagnostics, the RA81
can be completely diagnosed from a terminal which is connected to an ASCII port on the drive, even when no host
computer is available. All error recovery is initiated and completed in the subsystem.
In a three-drive configuration (1.4 GB) that takes only five square feet of floor space, the RA81 is the most space
efficient disk drive of its kind. When ordered in a cabinet, a single RA81 drive ships with the H9642-AS(AT) 91.4
cm (36 in) deep cabinet. The RA81 mounts in the top bay of the cabinet. Two additional drives (RA80s, RA81s, or
RA60s) can be mounted in the middle and bottom cabinet bays.

Note: The RA81-AA{AD) rack-mountable drive can be added to the older H9642-BM{BN) shallow cabinet.
One BC26V-12 cable (3.7 m/12 ft) is included with every drive or subsystem to connect the RA60, RA80, or
RA81 to a UDA50 controller. If you need a longer cable, or if you want your RA60, RA80, or RA81 dual-ported to
another system, order the appropriate cable length from the table following the disk section of this chapter.
Substitute the number of feet desired for xx in the option number.

Expansion Specifications:
• Drives per UDA50 controller: 4

Performance Specifications:
• Formatted capacity per drive: 456 MB
• Peak transfer rate: 2.2 MBts
• Average access time*: 36.3 msec
• Average seek time: 28 msec
• Average latency time: 8.33 msec
• Dual-access feature: Standard
• Media surfaces: 7 data, 1 servo
• Physical tracks per surface: 2,496
• User sectors per track: 51
• Bytes per sector: 51 2
• Single-track seek: 6 msec
• Rotational speed: 3600 rpm

Note: Average access time is defined as the sum of the average seek time and the average latency. It does not
include any controller optimizations. Typical applications will observe 10 to 35 percent better performance than
indicated by hardware specifications.

4-8

Disks and Tapes

RA81 456 MB Fixed-Disk
Ordering Information:
Subsystems
RUA81-AA(AD)

RA81-AA(AD) rack-mountable drive (no
cabinet) and UDA50 controller.

RUA81-CA(CD)

RA81-CA(CD) disk drive mounted in
H9642-AS(AT) cabinet, and UDA50
controller.

RUA81-EA(ED)

RA81-EA(ED) (three drives) in H9642AS(AT) cabinet and UDA50 controller.

RUA81-JA(JD)

RA81-CA(CD) and two UDA50 controllers.

Disk Drives
RA81-AA(AD)

RA81 rack-mountable disk drive (no
cabinet).

RA81-CA(CD)

RA81-AA(AD) disk drive, mounted in
H9642-AS(AT) cabinet.

RA81-EA(ED)

Three RA81-AA(AD) drives, mounted in
H9642-AS(AT) deep cabinet.

Additional Controller
RUA8D-UA(UD)

UDA50 controller for upgrading
RUA81-CA(CD) to RUA81-JA(JD).
Prerequisite: RUA81-CA(CD).

Note: Order number RUA80-UA(UO) applies to RA80, RA81 , and RA60 disk drives.

Disks and Tapes

4-9

RA60 205 MB Removable-Media Disk

The RA60 is a high-capacity, rack-mountable, removable-media disk. The recording density is three times that of the
most commonly available removable disk, which means that the RA60 offers the lowest life-time cost-of-ownership
per megabyte of all removable-media disks in the industry. The RA60 subsystem operates with the UDA50
controller, which provides several levels of performance optimization to improve 1/0 throughput. A seek-ordering
algorithm will reorder up to 20 I/O requests in the UDA50's command queue to minimize seek time, in both singleand multidrive subsystems. The UDA50 controller allows the user to mix RA60 disk drives with RA80 or RA81 disk
drives.
The RA60 disk drive uses embedded servo technology exciusivelY,which eliminates the need for alignment
procedures and provides unprecedented levels of pack interchange among drives. It also incorporates new
recording methods, microprocessor controlled diagnostics, 170-bit error correcting code, and modular design for
easy maintenance. RA60 disk packs can be interchanged among drives without restriction or degradation in data
reliability.
When ordered in a cabinet, a single RA60 drive ships with the H9642-AP(AR) 91.4 cm (36 in) deep cabinet. The
RA60 mounts in the top bay of the cabinet. Two additional drives (RA80s, RA81s, or RA60s in any combination)
can be mounted in the middle and bottom cabinet bays.
One BC26V-12 cable (3.7 m/12 ft) is included with every drive or subsystem to connect the RA60, RA80, or
RA81 to a UDA50 controller. If you need a longer cable, or if you want your RA60, RA80, or RA81 dual-ported to
another system, order the appropriate cable length from the table following the disk section of this chapter.
Substitute the number of feet desired for the xx in the option number.

Expansion Specifications:
• Drives per UDA50 controller: 4

Performance Specifications:
• Formatted capacity per drive: 205 MB
• Peak transfer rate: 1 .98 MB/s
• Average access time*: 50 msec
• Average seek time: 41.7 msec
• Average latency time: 8.33 msec
• Dual-access feature: Standard
• Media surfaces: 6 data
• Physical tracks per surface: 1,600
• User sectors per track: 43
• Bytes per sector: 51 2
• Single-track seek: 6.7 msec
• Rotational speed: 3600 rpm

4-10

Disks and Tapes

RA60 205 MB Removable-Media Disk
Ordering Information:
Subsystems
RUASo-AA

RA60-AA and UDASO controller; no
cabinet.

RUASo-CA(CD)

RA60-CA(CD) disk drive mounted in
H9642-AP(AR) cabinet and UDASO
controller.

RUASo-JA(JD)

RA60-CA(CD) disk drive, mounted in
H9642-AP(AR) cabinet and two
UDASO controllers.

Disk Drives
RASG-CA(CD)

RA60-AA disk drive, mounted in
H9642-AP(AR) deep cabinet.

RASo-AA

RA60 rack-mountable disk drive (no
cabinet).

Add-on Controller
RUASo-UA(UD)

UDASO controller for upgrading
RUA60-CA(CD) to RUA60-JA(JD).
Prerequisite: RUA60-CA(CD).

Note: Order number RUASO-UA(UD) applies to RASO, RAS1 , and RA60 disk drives.

Cables for RASO, RAS1, and RASO Disk Drives
Option

Length

Where Used

BC2SV-XX

3.7 m (12 ft)
7.6 m (2S ft)
1S.2 m (SO ft)
24.4 m (SO ft)

Connects one RAS1 , RASO,
or RA60 disk drive to a
UDASO controller

Disks and Tapes

4-11

RD51 Disk Drive

The RD51 is a 1 a-MB, non-removable disk drive, utilizing state-of-the-art Winchester technology. The drive
mechanism is packaged in a single compact housing, which conforms to the industry standards for 5.25-in disk
media. The sealed head/disk assembly (HDA) contains two platters, four read/write heads and positioning arm. The
sea/ed HDA helps to increase drive reliability and ensure data integrity.
The RD51 is available in two distinct packaging styles. The RD51-A is intended to be 'added-into' a system
enclosure, such as the MICRO/PDP-11. The RD51-D and RD51-R are intended to be mounted in their own
separate desk-top or rack-mount enclosures, and 'added-on' to a system, 'such as a PDP-11 /23-PLUS or MICRO/
PDP-11 . Refer to examples of add-on disk configurations.

Performance Specifications:

Ordering Information:

• Average access time: 85 msec
• Average rotational latency: 8.33 msec
• Transfer rate: 5 MB/s

RD51-A

10MB Winchester disk drive

RD51-D

10MB Winchester drive mounted in
desk-top enclosure with 1/0 cable.
120VAC/240VAC.

RD51-R

10MB Winchester drive for mounting in
19-in standard equipment rack.
120VAC/240VAC. Requires H9302
enclosure.

H9302

Rack-mount chassis for use with up to
two 5.25-in mass storage devices,
RD51 or RX50, in any combination.

BOO1-Dx

Country kits for use with RD51-D and
RD51-R. See the Country Kit section of
Chapter 1 for the explanation of how to
change the x to the appropriate second-letter suffix.

Media Characteristics:
• Formatted capacity: 11.059 MB
• Recording surfaces (heads): 4
• Bytes per sector: 51 2
• Sectors per track: 1 8
• Track per drive: 1,200
• Recording method: Modified Frequency Modulation
(MFM)

4-1 2

Disks and Tapes

RX50 .8 MB Diskette Drive

The RX50 dual diskette drive is a low-cost, compact, random access diskette drive. It stores data in fixed-length
blocks on two S.25-in flexible diskettes using preformatted industry-standard headers. Since the drive can
accommodate two diskettes simultaneously, one diskette can be used for system programs, and the other allocated
as a file device. The drive mechanism is packaged in a single compact housing, and its dimensions conform to the
industry standards for 5.25-in disk media.
The RX50 is available in two distinct packaging styles. The RX50-AA is intended to be 'added-into' a system
enclosure, such as the MICRO/PDP-11 . The RX50-D and RX50-R are intended to be mounted in their own separate
desk-top or rack-mount enclosures, and 'added-onto' a system, such as a PDP-11 123-PLUS or MICRO/PDP-11 .
Refer to examples of add-on disk configurations.

Performance Specifications:

Ordering Information:

• Peak transfer rate: 250 KB/s
• Average seek time: 164 msec
• Rotational latency (average): 100 msec

RXSo-AA

.8 MB diskette drive (only).

RXSo-O

.8 MB diskette drive mounted in desktop enclosure with I/O cable. 1 20VAC/
240VAC.

RXSo-R

.8 MB diskette drive for mounting in 19
in standard equipment rack. 120VAC/
240VAC. Requires H9302 enclosure.

H9302

Rack-mount chassis for use with up to
two 5.25-in mass storage devices,
RD51 or RX50, in any combination.

BQ01·Ex

Country kits for use with RX50-D and
RX50-R. See Chapter 1 for the explanation of how to replace the x with the
appropriate second-letter suffix.

Media Characteristics:
• Formatted capacity per diskette: 409 KB (818 KB
total)
• Diskettes per drive: 2
• Recording surfaces per diskette: 1
• Bytes per sector: 51 2
• Sectors per track: 1 0
• Tracks per diskette: 80

Disks and Tapes

4-13

RL02 10MB Cartridge Disk Drive

ISlilel

The RL02 combines reliability and cartridge disk convenience in a low-cost, medium-capacity mass storage device.
An embedded closed-loop servo positioning system improves data integrity by continuously sampling servo
information with the same head that reads and writes the data. To further ensure data integrity, a cyclic redundancy
check (CRC) is performed on data transfers between the drive and controller. Also, a phase-locked-loop clock
system and modified frequency modulation (MFM) recording provide reliable reading and recording techniques.
Direct memory access (DMA) is used to provide rapid data transfer and efficient utilization of the host processor.

Expansion Specifications:
• Drives per controller: 4
• Maximum controllers per CPU: 2

Performance Specifications:
• Formatted capacity per drive: 1 0.4 MB
• Peak transfer rate: 51 2 KB/s
• Average access time: 67.5 msec
• Average seek time: 55 msec
• Average latency time: 12.5 msec
• Dual-port option: No
• Media surfaces: 2 data
• Tracks per surface: 512
• Sectors per track: 40
• Bytes per sector: 256
• Track-track seek: 1 5 msec
• Rotational speed: 2400 rpm

Note: Average access time is defined as the sum of the average seek time plus the average latency.

4-14

Disks and Tapes

RL02 10MB Cartridge Disk Drive
Ordering Information:
Subsystems
RL211-AK

Rack-mounting removable-cartridge
disk drive and controller to interface to
the PDP-11 UNIBUS.

RLV22-AP

System option. Rack-mounting removable-cartridge disk drive and controller
to interface to the Q-bus.

Controller
RLV12

The RLV12 controller interfaces one to
four RL01 or RL02 disk drives to the Qbus. 1/0 is DMA. The RLV12 performs
a cyclic redundancy check on data and
headers. Memory is parity checked,
and the current command to the RLV12
is aborted when the error is detected.

RLV12-AP

System option. Includes module, internal cables, and 1/0 connector panel insert. This option must be ordered with
the system in which it is to be installed.

CK-RLV1 A-KA

Cabinet kit. For use with BA23 (MICRO/PDP-11 ).

CK-RLV1A-KB

Cabinet kit. For use with BA11-M (PDP11/23-S).

CK-RLV1A-KC

Cabinet kit. For use with H349 (PDP11/23-PLUS).

RLV22-AK

Upgrade option for the Q-bus. Order
one of the following cabinet kits:

CK-RLV1A-KA

Cabinet kit. For use with BA23 (MICRO/PDP-11 ).

CK-RLV1A-KB

Cabinet kit. For use with BA11-M (PDP11/23-S).

CK-RLV1A-KC

Cabinet kit. For use with H349 (PDP11/23-PLUS).

Additional Disk Drives
RL02-AK

Rackmount removable cartridge disk
add-on drive.

Disks and Tapes

4-15

RX02 1.0 MB Floppy Disk Subsystem

The RX02 double-density floppy disk drive provides an industry-compatible format and highly reliable operation.
Direct memory access (DMA) is used to provide rapid data transfer and efficient utilization of the host processor.
These subsystems include two RX02 0.5 MB drives (for a total of one MB) and a controller. with interconnect
cabling. The dual drives are packaged as a cabinet-mountable or tabletop unit.

Expansion Specifications:

Ordering Information:

• Drives per controller: 2

RX211-BK(BM, Rack-mount dual RX02 floppy disk
BN)
drives and controller to interface to the
PDP-11 UNIBUS.

Performance Specifications:
• Formatted capacity per drive: 0.5 MB (1 MB total)
• Peak transfer rate: 61 KB/s
• Average access time: 262 msec
• Average seek time: 1 54 msec
• Average settling time: 25 msec
• Average latency time: 83 msec
• Dual-port option: No
• Media surfaces: 1 data
• Tracks per surface: 77
• Sectors per track: 26
• Bytes per sector: 256
• Track-track seek: 6 msec
• Rotational speed: 360 rpm

RXV21-EP(ES, System option. Tabletop dual RX02
floppy disk drive and controller to interface to the Q-bus.

RXV21-EA(ED, Upgrade option for the Q-bus. Order
EC)
one of the following cabinet kits:
CK-RXV2E-KA

Cabinet kit. For use with BA23 (MICRO/PDP-11 ).

CK-RXV2E-KB

Cabinet kit. For use with BA 11-M (PDP11/23-S).

CK-RXV2E-KC

Cabinet kit. For use with H349 (PDP11/23-PLUS).

Note: Average access time is defined as the sum of the average seek time plus the average settling time plus the
average latency.

4-16

Disks and Tapes

Configuring Information
UNIBUS Disks
Disk Option

Mounting Code

DC Amps Drawn
@+SV/+1SV/-1SV

Bus Loads
Drawn

Panel Units

RL211-AK

1 HexSlot

5.0/0.5/0.5

RL211-BK(BN)

1 Quad Slot

1.5/0.0/0.0

RUA80
RUA81
RUA60

2 Hex Slots

12.75/0.04/1.3

Q-bus Disks
Disk Option

Mounting Code

DC Amps Drawn
@+SV/+12V

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
(AC/DC)

Panel
Inserts

RLV12-AP
RLV22-AP

1 Quad Slot
2 Quad Slots, Panel

5.0/.10
6.5/1.0

26.2
44.5

2.7/1.0
3/1

A
A

RQDX1

1 Quad Slot

6.4/.25

2/1

RXV21-EP(ET,ES)

1 Dual Slot

2.2/0.0

2/1

RQDX1-E

1 Dual Slot

.5/0.0

2.5

0/0

RDS1-A

Dedicated Space

1.0/1.8

25.6

0/0

None

RXSD-AA

Dedicated Space

.8/1.8

25.6

0/0

None

Disks and Tapes

4-17

Disk Site Preparation
Disk Site Preparation
Disk Option

Height

Width

Depth

Weight

STU/Hr

Watts

RA60
In Cabinet

106.2 em
41.8 in

54.1 em
21.3 in

91.4 em
36 in

168 kg
370lbs

2400

703

RA60
Rackmount

26.7 em
10.5 in

44.5em
17.5 in

85.1 em
33.5 in

75 kg
1651bs

2400

703

RA80
In Cabinet

106.2 em
41.8 in

54.1 em
21.3 in

91.4 em
36in

185 kg
3631bs

2200

645

RA80
Rackmount

26.4 em
10.4 in

44.5 em
17.5 in

67.3em
26.5in

67.3 kg
1481bS

2200

645

RA81
In Cabinet

106.2 em
41.8 in

54.1 em
21.3 in

91.4 em
36 in

185 kg
3631bs

2200

645

RA81
Rackmount

26.4 em
10.4 in

44.5 em
17.5 in

67.3em
26.5 in

67.3 kg
1481bs

2200

645

RL02
Rackmount

26.7 em
10.5 in

48.3 em
19 in

63.5em
25in

34.1 kg
751bs

546

160

RX02
Rackmount

26.7 em
10.5 in

48.3em
19 in

43.2 em
17 in

27.2 kg
60lbs

1960

575

RXSO
Rackmount

8.33 em
3.25 in

14.74 em
5.75in

21.53 em
8.5in

1.72 kg
3.81bs

61.4

RDS1-D

13.3 em
5.25in

22.gem
9in

30.2 em
11.9 in

6.3 kg
141bs

144

RDS1-R

13.3 em
5.25in

22.9 em
9in

30.2 em
11.9 in

5.0 kg
11 Ibs

144

RXSD-D

13.3 em
5.25in

22.9 em
9in

30.2 em
11.9 in

6.3 kg
141bs

127

RXSD-R

13.3 em
5.25in

22.9 em
9in

30.2 em
11.9 in

5.0kg
11 Ibs

127

4·18

Disks and Tapes

Magnetic Tapes
Magnetic Tape Selection Chart
Model

capacltr Per
Ree
(8 KB blocks)

Density
(b/ln)

eed
srr( n/s)

CPU

Media Type

Page

TE16

40MB

800·1600
2032·4064

45
114.3

UNIBUS

1.27 em
0.5in
Reel to Reel

4·23

TSVOS

40MB

1600
4064

25/100
63.5/254

Q·bus

1.27 em
0.5in
Reel to Reel

4·21

TUSB

0.5MB

800
2032

30
76.2

UNIBUS
Q·bus

Cartridge

4·24

TU77

40MB

800·1600
2032·4064

125
317.5

UNIBUS

1.27 em
0.5in
Reel to Reel

4·22

TUBO

40MB

1600
4064

25/100
63.5/254

UNIBUS

1.27 em
0.51n
Reel to Reel

4·20

Disks and Tapes

4·19

TUBO Magnetic Tape

The TUBO UNIBUS magnetic tape subsystem includes the controller, cabinet with horizontally mounted tape drive,
and all necessary cabling. It is a 1600 b/in (phase encoded), 25/100 in/s, .05 in subsystem. It employs start/stop
and streaming tape technology. Because the TUBO has no vacuum columns, no tension arms, no capstans, no roller
guide bearings, and no complicated tape paths, it is more compact and easier to use than equivalent start/stop
systems. Instead, it employs microprocessor servo systems and air bearings for high reliability.

Performance Specifications:

Ordering Information:

• Recording density: 1 600 b/in
• Read/write speed: 25 in/s (start/stop)
25/100 in/s streaming)
• Capacity per 2400 ft reel:
40 MB with 8 KB blocks @ 1600 b/in
• Maximum data transfer rate: 160 KB

Tuao-AA(AB)

TU80 magnetic tape subsystem. Includes tape drive, cabinetry, power
controller, a shielded 3.7 m (12 ft)
inter-cabinet cable and a UNIBUS
adapter module.

Note: The TUBO can be ordered with an RABO or RAB1 disk for mounting in the same cabinet. Order the rack-mount
disk option which does not include a cabinet. Example: RABO-AA(AD).

4-20

Disks and Tapes

TSV05 Magnetic Tape

The TSV05 a-bus magnetic tape subsystem includes a tape transport with an integral formatter and a single quadsize bus interface/controller module. This module plugs into any quad-size slot in a a-bus/extended a-bus
backplane, and communicates with one tape transport using standard software. The tape transport occupies only
8.7 in, in a H9642-type 106.6 cm (42 in) cabinet, thus allowing ample room for expansion. It is a high performance
.05-in subsystem incorporating streaming technology, and is the only Digital tape subsvstem available for a-bus
systems. It offers industry-standard 1600 b/in Phase Encoded format, ANSI compatibility, a storage capacity of up
to 40 MB using 8 KB blocks, high-speed streaming backup, and front loading automatic tape threading operation.
The TSV05 is also available without the cabinet for system integrators.

Expansion Specifications:

Ordering Information:

• Transports per controller: 1

The Prerequisite for the TSV05 is the PDP-11 /23-PLUS.

Performance Specifications:

TSV05-BA(BB)

• Recording density: 1 600 b/in
• Read/write speed: 25/100 in/s
• Capacity per 2400 ft reel:
40 MB with 8 KB blocks @ 1 600 b/in
• Maximum data transfer speed: 40 or 160 KB/s
• Rewind Speed: 180 in/s (max)
• Rewind Time: 2.8 minutes per 2400 ft reel

TSV05 magnetic tape system mounted
in a 101.6 cm (40 in) H9642-type cabinet with power controller and 53.3 cm
(21 in) expansion. No side panels

TSV05-BC

Same as TSV05-BA(BB) except
1 OOVAC system.

TSV05-BD

Same as TSV05-BA(BB) except
220VAC system.

TSV05-AA(AB)

TSV05 magnetic tape system with
mounting hardware, control module and
cables.

TSV05-AC

Same as TSV05-AA(AB) except
1 OOVAC system.

TSV05-AD

Same as TSV05-AA(AB) except
220VAC system.

Disks and Tapes

4-21

TU77 Magnetic Tape

111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111

The TU77 UNIBUS magnetic tape subsystem includes the controller, a tape formatter, and one nine-track TU77
tape transport. The TU77 tape transport uses Industry-compatible recording densities of 1600 b/in (Phase
Encoded) and 800 b/ln (Non-Return to Zero Inverted) selectable under program control. The subsystem is available
with controllers for UNIBUS PDP-11 systems. The TU77 tape transport is available mounted in a 152.4 cm (60 in)
H9602 single-width highboy cabinet.

Expansion Specifications:

Ordering Information:

• Transports per controller: 4

Subsystem

Performance Specifications:

TJU77-AB(AD)

• Recording density: 1600 b/in ;800 b/in
• Read/write speed: 125 in/s
• Capacity per 2400 ft reel:
40 MB with 8 KB blocks @ 1600 b/in
20 MB with 8 KB blocks @ 800 b/in
• Maximum data transfer speed:
200 KB/sec @1600 b/in
100 KB/sec @ 800 b/in
• Rewind speed: 440 in/s
• Rewind time: 70 sec per 2400 ft reel

4-22

Disks and Tapes

TU77 magnetic tape transport and controller to interface to the PDP-11 UNIBUS.

Additional Tape Drives
TU77-AF(AJ)

Magnetic tape transport.

TE16 Magnetic Tape

The TE16 UNIBUS magnetic tape subsystems include the controller, a tape formatter, and one nine-track TE16
tape transport. The TE16 tape transport uses industry-compatible recording densities of 1600 b/in (Phase
Encoded) and 800 b/in (Non-Return to Zero Inverted) selectable under program control. The subsystem is available
with controllers for PDP-11 UNIBUS systems. The TE16 tape transport is available mounted in a 152.4 cm (60 in)
H9602 single-width highboy cabinet.

Expansion Specifications:

Ordering Information:

• Transports per controller: 8

Subsystem

Performance Specifications:

TJE16-AA(AD)

• Recording density: 1600 b/in,
800 b/in
• Read/write speed: 45 in/s
• Capacity per 2400 ft reel:
40 MB with 8 KB blocks @ 1600 b/in
20 MB with 8 KB blocks @ 800 b/in
• Maximum data transfer speed:
72 KB/s @ 1600 b/in
36 KB/s @ 800 b/in
• Rewind speed: 150 in/s
• Rewind time: 3.7 minutes per 2400 ft reel

TE16 magnetic tape transport and controller to interface to the PDP-11 UNIBUS. Mounted in a 152.4 cm (60 in)
H9602 single-width highboy cabinet.

Additional Tape Drives
TE16-AE(AJ)

Additional magnetic tape transport
mounted in a 152.4 em (60 In) H9602
single-width highboy cabinet.

Site Preparation Specifications:
• Height: 152.4 cm (60 in)
• Width: 71 cm (28 in)
• Depth: 76.2 cm (30 in)
• Weight: 227 kg (500 Ib)
• Watts: 900
• Btu/hr: 31 00
• Receptacles:
NEMA #L5-30R (120VAC/60Hz),
NEMA #6-20R (240VAC/50Hz)

Disks and Tapes

4-23

TUS8 Cartridge Tape

The TU58 UNIBUS dual-drive cartridge tape subsystems are random access, mass memory storage devices that
read and write data on block- addressable, preformatted tape cartridges. Data integrity features include automatic
read retries initiated by the controller to ensure accurate data recording and retrieval. This feature eliminates the
host computer overhead normally associated with rereading soft errors. Each transport has a high-quality read/write
head. The TU58 can be used for software updates or for loading diagnostics or as a convenient medium for private
file storage. These subsystems consist of a controller, two drives, universal power cords, boot chip, 5.5 m (18 ft) of
I/O cable to interface with a serial line unit (which is a prerequisite), and two TU58-K media.

Performance Specifications:

Ordering Information:

• Recording density: 800 b/in
• Read/write speed: 30 in/s
• Capacity per cartridge: 256 KB
(formatted in 51 2 blocks of 51 2 bytes each)
• Maximum data transfer speed: 3.7 KB/s (38.4 Kbaud)
• Rewind speed: 60 in/s
• Rewind time: 30 seconds per 1 40 ft cartridge

TU58-DA

Cabinet-mountable dual-drive cartridge
tape subsystem including the necessary hardware for mounting in standard
cabinetry.

TU58-EB

Tabletop dual-drive cartridge tape subsystem.

Site Preparation Specifications:
• Height: 13.3 cm (5.25 in)
• Width: 48.3 cm (19 in)
• Depth: 43.2 cm (17 in)
• Weight: 9 kg (20 Ib)
• Watts: 11
• Btu/hr: 38
• Receptacles:
NEMA #5-15R (120VAC/60Hz),
NEMA #6-15R (240VAC/50Hz)

4-24

Disks and Tapes

Configuring Information
UNIBUS Magnetic Tapes
Model

Mounting
Code

DC Amps Drawn
@+SV/-1SV

Bus Loads
Drawn

Panel Units

TJE16

2 SUs

12.0/0.4

TJU77

2 SUs

12.0/0.4

TU80

1 Slot

4.0/0.0

Q-bus Magnetic Tapes
Model

Mounting
Code

DC Amps Drawn
@+SV/+12V

Bus Loads
(ACIDC)

Panel Inserts

TSVOS

1 Quad Slot

6.5/0

3/1

2 Size A

Magnetic Tape Site Preparation
Model

Height

Width

Depth

Watts

BTU/hr

Weight

TJE16
In Cabinet

152.4 em
60in

71em
28 in

76.2 em
30in

900

3100

227 kg
500lbs

TJU77
In Cabinet

152.4 em
60in

71em
28in

76.2 em
30in

2250

7690

254 kg
560lbs

TSVOS
In Cabinet

111.1 em
43.75 in

60em
23.5 in

84em
33in

270

1100

121 kg
2651bs

TSVOS
Rackmount

22.2 em
8.75 in

43em
Hin

62em
24.5 in

270

1100

36 kg
80lbs

TUS8
Rackmount

13.3 em
5.25 in

48.3 em
19 in

43.2 em
17 in

9 kg
20lbs

TU80
In Cabinet

105.7 em
41.6 in

54em
30 in

54.6 em
21.5 in

500

1024

102.5 kg
2251bs

Disks and Tapes

4-25

5 Digital's Personal Computers
Attractively styled and designed for efficient and comfortable operation, each of Digital's personal computers-Rainbow 100, DECmate II, and the Professional 325/350-specializes in a particular class of applications software.
These range from industry-standard CP/M personal computing software up to sophisticated applications developed
on a powerful minicomputer operating system. Because Digital's personal computers can run a wide variety of
software, they can address a complete range of personal computing needs.
Digital's personal computers provide three distinct software environments for applications:
• Rainbow 100 - 8- and 16-bit-based CP/M-86/80 software designed for popular industry-standard personal
computer applications.
• DECmate II - 12-bit-based WPS-8 and COS-310 software featuring Digital's proven word processing, office
management, and accounting applications.
• Professional 300 Series- 16-bit-based multitasking Professional Operating System (P/OS) especially developed
for powerful professional applications.

Personal Computers
Common Hardware Components
Digital's personal computers can run a wide range of software with a minimum of hardware variations. All three
personal computer series have the same keyboard and monitor, along with the diskette drive, optional hard disk,
printers, and other major components. The primary differences between these personal computers is the computer's system board, and thus the type of software they support. A minimum working hardware configuration consists
of a country kit with keyboard and documentation, a system unit, and a monitor.
The common components utilized by the personal computer series are:
• Monitor-30.5 cm (1 2 in) monochrome or 33 cm (13 in) color display featuring 24-lines-by-an 80- or 1 32character column width and bonded, antiglare screen.
• Keyboard-1 05-key low-profile keyboard with 1.9 m (6 ft) coiled cable. Rainbow 100, DECmate II, and the
Professional series use keyboards with country-specific keycap legends.
• System unit-Computer cabinet containing the system board, power supply, option slots, and storage devices.
There are two system units: a small box for the Rainbow 100 and DECmate II, and a large-box version for the
Professional 325 and 350.
• Diskette drive-5 %-inch dual-floppy diskette driv'3 with 800 Kbytes of online storage contained on two diskettes
(400 Kbytes each).
• Hard-disk drive-5 %-inch hard-disk drive with a ten-MB storage capacity.
• Floorstand-Optional vertical stand for mounting the system unit on the floor next to your desk in order to free
more desktop space.
• Printers-A choice of three optional printers for all of Digital's personal computers: the LA50 Personal Printer, the
Letterprinter 100, and the LQP02 Letter-Quality Printer.

Ordering Process
Ordering Digital's personal computers is simple and straightforward. A basic working system consists of a country
kit, monitor, system unit, and system software. The system unit includes the system board, which contains logic,
memory, and communication circuitry for that particular personal computer. You simply order each of the major
components separately in order to make up a working system. Hardware and software options that correspond to
each of the personal computers are ordered in the same fashion.
The country kit consists of a keyboard, system power cable, and documentation kit corresponding to a specific
country. Country kits for the Rainbow 100 also contain a national language read-only memory (ROM) adapter that is
customer-installable in the system unit. System units come standard with English-language ROMs.

Configuring Overview
Configuring Digital's personal computers is just as easy as ordering them. There are very few rules to follow, and all
standard and optional components are deSigned for easy installation and removal. The system unit, for example,
features a slide-out mechanism for the system board and diskette/hard-disk drives. These same components are
installed by sliding them along a rail until they snap in place. Similarly, the system unit cover and power supply are
removed by releasing tabs and lifting them up from the system unit chassis.
Depending on the personal computer, option modules are slide-mounted into slots or snapped onto the system
board. The Professional 325 and 350 have an option-module cage located on the rear portion of the system board.
Modules are installed by sliding them in lengthwise along rails, from an opening on the right side of the system unit
chassis, and are secured by a locking lever. Module cables plug into slots located along the top of each module.
Option modules for the Rainbow 100 and DECmate II plug into designated locations on the system board.
All of Digital's personal computers feature a built-in serial printer port and RS232-C communications port in the back
of the system unit. These ports simplify printer and communication line hook-up. In addition, the universal power
supply for Digital's personal computers feature a switch-selectable 115- or~ 230- V setting for international
operation.

Personal Computers

5-3

Rainbow 100 Personal Computer

Rainbow's superb design--inside and out--will help you be more productive and will make your job easier. It is a
price/performance leader capable of running the widest possible selection of industry-standard CP/M applications.
You can run both mature 8-bit software and today's advanced 16-bit programs without swapping system disks or
even telling your personal computer which kind of program you've loaded--Rainbow's "softsense" automatically
knows which it is.
The Rainbow 100 base system is a complete solution. It comes standard with 8-bit and 16-bit microprocessors,
800 Kbytes of diskette space on a single drive, and enough memory to get real work done from the start. The
communications port allows you to take full advantage of Rainbow's communication capabilities. It can talk to another
personal computer, Interactively to a host or information network (giving you dial-in access to public information
systems like Dow Jones/Retrieval and The Source),or' as a terminal to a host. Its built-in full VT1 02 terminal
emulation capability gives you a personal computer and a terminal rolled into one.
The printer port is also standard. Advanced features like memory-mapped video--which repaints your screen very
fast as you work--give you really high performance. Rainbow's 132-column display capability, espeCially important
for financial spreadsheet applications, lets you see more information at one time on the screen.
With Rainbow's self-teaching CBI (computer-based instruction) course, "Learn Rainbow", you can learn how to use
your Rainbow 100 personal computer in as little as 90 minutes. The course is designed in modules so you can learn
at your own pace and review at any time in the future any sections you wish.

Expansion
There are three dedicated option slots for system expansion on the system board, so you can add more memory,
bit-mapped graphics, and extended communications capability to your Rainbow. The dedicated memory slot
accommodates either a 64 KB or 192 KB memory module option for a total of 128 or 256 Kbytes or main memory.
You can easily install all of the expansion modules in the system unit yourself without any special tools.
You can also add an additional dual-diskette drive to your system. It slides right into the system unit, with just two
simple connections to be made.

Ordering Information
aV012-A3

CP/M-S6/S0 operating system

VR201-A

12 in monochrome monitor; white phosphor

VR201-B

12 in monochrome monitor; green phosphor

VR201-C

12 in monochrome monitor; amber phosphor

PC10D-A

Rainbow 100 system unit

5-4

Personal Computers

Rainbow 100 Personal Computer
Rainbow 100 Hardware
PC1K1-Ax

Country Kit. Contains country-specific keyboard, keyboard cable, and power cord. In addition, user
documentation in the appropriate national language is also included.
Note: Keyboards with corresponding keyboard cable and power cord may be ordered using option
number LK201-xx, where xx indicates the specific country code.

PC1K1-AA

USA-Canada

PC1K1-AC

Canada (French)

PC1K1-AE

PC1K1-AG

Germany

PC1K1-AI

Italy

PC1K1-AK

Switzerland (French)

PC1K1-AL

Switzerland (German)

PC1K1-AP

France

PC1K1-AS

Spain

PC1K1-AZ

Australia

PC1XX-AA

64-KB RAM module_ Option module expands system memory to 128 KB. This module mounts in a
dedicated memory slot on the system board and is user-installable.

PC1XX-AB

192-KB RAM module. Option module expands system memory to 256 Kbytes. This module mounts in a
dedicated memory slot on the system board and is user-installable.

RXSQ-XA

Dual-diskette drive. 51/4 inch (13.34 cm) dual-diskette drive provides additional 800 KB of online
storage on two 400 KB formatted diskettes. When added to the Rainbow 100 personal computer, total
online storage capacity is increased to 1.6 Mbytes. Drive unit utilizes two double-density diskettes
rotated by a single spindle.

PC1XX-BA

Graphics module. Provides easy-to-use high-level command language that draws figures from simple
vectors up to complex open and closed curves. The graphics module provides bit-mapped color displays
in two resolution modes: 800 x 240 picture elements (pixels) with two planes and four colors, or 384 x
240 pixels with 4 colors and 16 colors. Complete documentation and installation instructions are
provided for this option.
Note: The graphics module supports the 13 inch color monitor (VR241-A).

PC1 XX-BB

Extended communications module. Extends the capabilities of Rainbow 100 by providing a communications port for DMA asynchronous and byte or bit synchronous communications, and an RS423 800kilobit/sec port for high-throughput external devices that can be under program control. The extended
communications module is required for the RCD50 Winchester disk storage option. Complete documentation and installation instructions are provided for this option.

RCDS1-BA

Hard-disk subsystem. Ten-MB, 51/4-inch hard disk drive and controller provides additional internal
storage to the 800 KB of diskette storage available inside the Professional 350's system unit. This
compact, high-performance disk subsystem features a five million bit/second transfer rate and an average
access time of 85 milliseconds. Controller module occupies one option slot.

PCXXF-BA

Floorstand unit for PC1 00. Enclosure for vertical mounting of the Rainbow 100 system unit. Provides a
stable platform when system unit is removed from work surface and placed on the floor. Raised pedestal
base also provides adequate room for power supply cooling fans.

VR241-A,-B,-C

Color Monitor. The high-bandwidth color monitor allows display of either full 80 or 132 column text by
24 row text characters, or 800 by 240 bit-mapped graphics. These precise color graphics are
displayable in two modes of either 4 or 16 colors, selectable from an extensive palette. Requires
Rainbow's graphic options module (PC1XX-BA).

Note: See the Personal Computer Catalog for a complete guide to Personal Computing Software.

Personal Computers

5-5

OECmate II Personal Computer

DECmate II
The low-cost DECmate II has been tailored to meet the needs of offices and small businesses. As a small business
specialist, DECmate II offers proven word processing, office management, and accounting applications. Its features
enhanced word processing capabilities with optional software such as Sort, List Processing, Math, and Communications. In addition, an optional auxiliary processor supports Digital's CP/M-80 software for personal computing. This
auxiliary processor also supports such business applications as Digital's Accounting System (DAS), a family of
integrated accounting packages. In short, DECmate II has been optimized for small business applications, offering a
complete "turn key" business solution.
DECmate II's professional-quality word processing, sorting, list processing, and communications are equally wellsuited for offices. Spreadsheet calculator applications quickly project and manipulate results of financial, sales, and
manufacturing forecasts that require frequent analYSis. Moreover, DECmate II's communications capabilities let
users access files and software of host computers that serve entire departments. Its terminal emulation capability
makes DECrnate II appear to a host as a VT1 ~O-family terminal. This capability enables offices throughout an
organization to run an assortment of sophisticated, menu-driven office applications that reside on host systems-in
addition to those available on DECmate II. DECmate II can also transfer files to and from other DECmate II personal
computers by using its document and character file transfer capabilities.
The DECmate II system unit includes:
• DEC 6120 (PDP-8) 12-bit microprocessor
• 96 KB memory (64 Kwords)
• RS232-C serial printer port
• Asynchronous/byte synchronous communications port, to 9600 baud with full modem control
• Monochrome character cell video output
• Built-in diagnostic firmware
• Switch-selectable (11 5 V or 230 V) universal power supply
• 5 %-inch 800 KB dual-diskette drive and controller

Ordering Information:
In order to have a working DECmate II personal computer system, you need to have the following components and
one of the operating systems:
PC27X·AA

CP/M-80 operating system

VR201·A

12-inch monochrome monitor; white
phosphor

VR201·B

12-inch monochrome monitor; green
phosphor

VR201·C

12-inch monochrome monitor; amber
phosphor

PC2K1·Ax

Country Kit

PC278-A

DECmate 11 system unit

OF74D-A3

Word ProceSSing base operating system

OF31D-A3

COS-31 a operating system

5-6

Personal Computers

DECmate II Personal Computer
System Expansion
There are three dedicated slots for customer-installable option modules on the system board.

Memory Expansion
DECmate II systems come with a standard maximum memory size of 96 Kbytes. Note: The optional CP/M module
contains a zao microprocessor and 64 Kbytes of memory for use with CP/M applications.

Mass Storage Expansion
A second 800 KB RX50 dual-diskette subsystem can be installed internally in the system unit for 1 .6 MB of online
diskette storage. An optional 10MB hard-disk drive, mounting where the second diskette drive would normally be
placed, can also be added internally for a maximum total of 1 o.a MB of online storage.

DECmate II Hardware
PC2K1-Ax

Country Kit. Contains country-specific keyboard, keyboard cable, and power cord. In addition, user
documentation in the appropriate national language is included. Note: Keyboards with corresponding
keyboard cable and power cord may be ordered using option number LK201-Bx, where x indicates the
specific country code (e.g., A for USA-Canada, P for France).
PC2K1-AA
PC2K1-AE
PC2K1-AZ
PC2K1-AQ

USA
UK
Australia
Canada (English-speaking)

PC27X-AA

CP/M Module. Contains a Z80 auxiliary processor unit, 64 Kbytes of memory, and an interface to the
6120 processor for use with CPIM applications. This option allows the user to run 8-bit CPIM
applications in addition to DECmate II's 1 2-bit software. The 8-MHz 6120 processor performs all I/O
tasks for the 4-MHz Z80 auxiliary processor, resulting in a significant performance advantage when
running CPIM applications. The CPIM module mounts in a dedicated slot on the system board and
includes the CP/M-80 operating system, license, and user documentation.

PC27X-BA

RX01/RX02 interface module. Interfaces Digital's eight-inch RX01 and RX02 diskette drives to DECmate II systems. Owners of DECmate I systems can use existing media with DEC mate II, or can transfer
their files from eight-inch 500 Kbyte diskettes to 5 %-inch 400-Kbyte mini-diskettes. This file and drive
compatibility ensures smooth system migration. The interface module mounts in a slot dedicated to mass
storage and comes with an adapter cable for the RX01 IRX02 disk drive.

RXSo-XA

Dual-diskette drive. 5 %-inch dual-diskette drive provides additional 800 Kbytes of online storage on
two 400-KB formatted diskettes. When added to DECmate II personal computers, total online storage
capacity is increased to 1.6-Mbytes. Drive unit utilizes two double-density diskettes rotated by a single
spindle.

RCDS1-CA

Hard-disk drive.1 0 MB 5 % -inch hard disk drive provides additional internal storage to the 800 Kbytes of
diskette storage available inside DECmate II's system unit. This compact high-performance disk subsystem based on Winchester technology features a five million bit-per-second transfer rate and an average
access time of 85 milliseconds. The hard disk drive subsystem includes the hard disk interface module
for operation.
Floorstand unit for PC278-A. Enclosure for vertical mounting of the DECmate II system unit. Provides a
stable platform when system unit is placed on the floor. Raised pedestal base also provides adequate
room for power supply cooling fans.

PCXXF-BA

Personal Computers

5-7

DECmate II Personal Computer
DECmate II Software
OF74D-A3

wPS Operating System. Base-level pperating system conSisting of DECmate " Version 1.0 word
processing software. WPS contains advanced word processing capabilities and features. These include a
go-to-page command that eliminates unnecessary scrolling; global search and replace for automatically
inserting new information; automatic pagination command that paginates an entire document on the
screen; and wide-ruler support for displaying 132-character lines. In addition, optional WPS software
packages allow DECmate " systems to function as a stand-alone, multipurpose word processor/office
management system.

OF741·A3

WPS List Processing Package. Allows the user to generate personalized form letters and other
documents with slightly altered text. A form letter with blanks for key information is merged with a list
document that contains the corresponding information for the letter's blanks. Each record in the list
document file contains the information to produce one customized version of the form document. The list
document file can contain up to 4,000 records, each holding a maximum of 2,500 characters. The List
Processing enhancement package requires the WPS operating system.

OF742·A3

WPS Sort Package. Enables the user to sort up to 1 2 different fields of information in a List Processing
document. Alphanumeric information can be organized in either ascending or descending order. The user
can also sort numbers with positive and negative values, decimal pOints, dollar signs, and other symbols.
The Sort enhancement package requires the WPS operating system.

OF743-A3

WPS Communications Package. Adds terminal emulation and file transfer capability to DECmate II.
DECmate /I will emulate a VT52 or VT1 02 video terminal through local or remote lines using this software.
In addition, file transfer software allows DECmate /I to communicate with other DECmate systems, with a
host computer, or with phototypesetters. Three modes of file transfer are supported: DX (document
transmiSSion) mode that transmits and receives complete word processing documents; AX (automatiC
transmiSSion) mode that transmits or receives complete documents without operator intervention; and CX
(character transmission) mode that communicates interactively with host systems and applications. The
Communications enhancement package requires the WPS operating system.

OF744-A3

WPS Math Package. Creates, updates, and maintains numerical tables with column totals, subtotals, and
averages. Editor math function can be used to repeat calculations and update tables if entries in a
document's table change. The List ProceSSing portion of this package does calculations based on
mathematical statements that are embedded in a list processing document and inserts the answers into
the output documents. List ProceSSing math enables the user to create a variety of output documents by
varying specification documents. The Math enhancement package requires the WPS operating system.

OF745-A3

WPS Complete Package. Contains WPS operating system and the List Processing, Sort, Communications, and Math packages.

OF31D-A3

C05-310 Operating System. Version 9.2 of the commercial operating system developed by Digital.
Enhancements Include support for the RX50 diskette drive and LA 100 printer, in addition to various
refinements. DIBOL-8 and DIBOL-11 are Included with COS-31 O. COS-31 0 will accommodate userdeveloped application packages and' will also run selected applications currently available on RX02
diskette media.

OF31D-C3

C05-31 0 License only. License-only version of COS-31 0 operating system.

Note: See the Personal Computer Catalog for a complete guide to Personal Computing Software.

5-8 Personal Computers

Professional 325 and 350 Personal Computers

\ \ \, \
;

The Professional 300 Series
The powerful Professional 325 and 350 bring minicomputer performance to the world of personal computing.
Utilizing a 16-bit PDP-11/23-PLUS microprocessor, the Professionals feature a multitasking operating system
based on RSX-11 M-PLUS, Digital's popular PDP-11 operating system.
The Professional Operating System (P/OS) has sophisticated communications capabilities. It shares a common file
structure with Digital's PDP-11 and VAX minicomputers, giving the Professionals extensive file transfer and data
sharing capabilities.
Many ease-of-use features have been incorporated into the multitasking P/OS. A "menu tree" provides common,
integrated menus for many system functions, including disk services, file services, print services, communications,
and editing. P/OS also includes an online help function for obtaining information on system services and applications, and a "message board" where programs can display status information. Like DECmate II, the Professional
325 and 350 support an optional auxiliary processor and memory for CP/M-80 applications.
Digital offers both P/OS and CP/M-80 applications for business and educational needs. Applications may also be
purchased from software developers and vendors. The optional program developer's Tool Kit, containing high-level
software tools, is available for those who wish to write applications compatible and consistent with the P/OS
environment.
.
The Professional 325 and 350 system units both include:
• PDP-11 123-PLUS 16-bit microprocessor
• Memory management unit
• 512 KB memory
• Time-of-day clock with battery back-up
• Bit-mapped video controller (960 x 240 pixels)
• RS232-C serial printer port
• Asynchronous and bit or byte synchronous communications port, up to 9600 baud with full modem control
• RS170-compatible, monochrome bit-mapped video output
• Built-in diagnostic firmware with graphics display
• Switch-selectable (11 5 V or 230 V) universal power supply
• 5 %-inch, (13.34 cm) 800 KB dual-diskette drive and controller
• Standard Floating Point Adapter provides up to 1 7 digits of precision

Ordering Information:
In order to have a working Professional 300 Series personal computer system, you need to have the following
components:
PC3K1-Ax

Country Kit including the
Professional Operating System

VR201-A

30.44 cm (12 in) monochrome monitor

PC325-0

Professional 325 system unit

PC3SQ-O

Professional 350 system unit

Personal Computers

5-9

Professional 325 & 350 Personal Computer
System Expansion
There is one slot available for a customer-installable option module on the Professional 325's system board. The
Professional 350 accommodates four option modules. A Professional 325 can be upgraded to a Professional 350
by installing a Professional 350 system board.

Memory Expansion
With the Professional 350, up to one MB of memory can be added in increments of 256 KB. Each 256 KB memory
option occupies one option slot.

Mass Storage Expansion
Professional 325 and 350 system units are fully configured with an 800-KB RX50 diskette drive. In addition to the
RX50 diskette drive, the Professional 350 system unit accommodates the five-Mbyte or the ten-Mbyte hard-disk
option.

Professional Hardware
Country Kit. Contains country-specific keyboard, keyboard cable, and power cord. A computer-based
instruction diskette, hardware exerciser, editor and operating system software, and user documentation
are also included.

PC3K1-AX

Note: Keyboards with corresponding keyboard cable and power cord may be ordered using option number LK201-

XX, where XX indicates the specific country code.
PC3K1-AA

USA

PC3K1-AC

Canada (French)

PC3K1-AD

Denmark

PC3K1-AE

PC3K1-AF

Finland

PC3K1-AG

Germany

PC3K1-AI

Italy

PC3K1-AK

Switzerland (French)

PC3K1-AL

Switzerland (German)

PC3K1-AM

Sweden

PC3K1-AN

Norway

PC3K1-AP

France

PC3K1-AS

Spain

PC3K1-AZ

Australia

PC3K1-AB

Belgium (Flemish)

PC3K1-AH

Netherlands

PC3K1-AQ

Canada (English)

5-1 0 Personal Computers

Professional 325 & 350 Personal Computer
MSC11-CK

2S6-KB Memory Option. Provides 256-KB of additional MOS memory for the Professional 350,
increasing total memory size to a maximum of 1 MB in 256 KB increments. Adding additional memory to
your personal computer increases its overall system performance, since larger programs can reside in
memory.
Each memory option utilizes one option slot.

PC3X5-AA

CP/M Option. Contains a Z80 auxiliary processor unit, 64 KB of memory, and an interface to the
Professional's processor for use with CP/M applications. This option allows the user to run 8-bit CP/M
applications in addition to P/OS 16-bit software.
The CP/M option module requires one option slot and includes the CP/M-80 operating system, license,
and user documentation.

RCDSD-AA

Hard-disk subsystem. Five-Mbyte, 5 %-inch hard disk drive and controller provides additional internal
storage to the 800 KB of diskette storage available inside the Professional 350's system unit. This
compact, high-performance disk subsystem features a five million bit/second transfer rate and an average
access time of 170 milliseconds.
Controller module occupies an option slot.
Note: The hard disk-based P/OS and associated documentation is included with the RCD50-AA.

RCDS1-AA

Hard-disk subsystem. Ten-Mbyte, 5 %-inch hard disk drive and controller provides additional internal
storage to the 800 KB of diskette storage available inside the Professional 350's system unit. This
compact, high-performance disk subsystem features a five million bit/second transfer rate and an average
access time of 85 milliseconds.
Controller module occupies an option slot.
Note: The hard disk-based P/OS and associated documentation is included with the RCD51-AA.

VC241-A

Extended bit-map module. Adds two bit-map planes to the standard video generator for a total of three
planes. Each plane supports a display of 960 x 240 pixels. In addition, the extended bit-map option adds
a color output map that can simultaneously display on a color monitor eight colors from a palette of 256
colors. Displays eight of a possible 16 shades of gray on the monochrome monitor.
Occupies one option slot.
Note: The extended bit map module supports the 13-inch (33.02) color monitor (VR241).

DTC11-A

Telephone management option. Provides integrated telephone management capabilities. With the
Professional Communications Software package, TMS supports autodialing for hands-free calling. In
addition, TMS can transfer files to RSX and VMS systems from the same directory using an integral
modem with BELL 103J, 202, and 212A compatible modes. Hardware consists of a TMS controller
module, a telephone line interface, and an optional voice unit. Controller includes voice digitization
(CODEC) and dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) encoding circuitry for hardware support of dictation,
telephone answering, voice messaging, and remote commands. Telephone interface panel provides
jacks for two telephone lines (one for data and one for voice communications), a local telephone handset,
and the optional voice unit.
The telephone management option module occupies one option slot, while the interface panel mounts in
a designated location in back of the system unit.
Prerequisite: Professional Communications Software package (OB005-C3).

DTC11-B

Voice unit. Provides a microphone and speaker for voice input and output, a telephone dialpad, and nine
command keys with associated LEOs. The voice unit is ideal for teleconferences and hands-free
telephone operation. In addition, an audio jack accommodates a headset for use when conducting
telemarketing operations. Voice unit features same ergonomic design used by the keyboard.
Prerequisite: Telephone Management Option and Professional Communications Software package
(OB005-C3).

IDLDR-CA

Realtime interface. I/O interface combines three widely used realtime functions on a single module for
SCientific/engineering applications. Includes an IEEE-488 (1978) general purpose instrument bus for
control of up to 15 compatible devices: a two-line RS232-C RS232-C/423-compatible serial asynchronous port with user-selectable baud rates (50 to 9600 baud); and a 24-line parallel port with 16 data
lines and 8 control ~nes. IEEE and serial interface allows the Professional to control and acquire data from
external devices such as analytical instruments and automatic test equipment. Parallel interface enables
users to acquire binary coded decimal inputs. All three interfaces can be used with compatible third-party
products to provide analog input/output.

PCXXF-AA

Floorstand unit for PC3SD-D. Enclosure for vertical mounting of the Professional 350 system unit.
Provides a stable platform when system unit is removed from work surface and placed on the floor.
Raised pedestal base also provides adequate room for power supply cooling fans.

PCXXF-BA

Floorstand unit for PC325-D. Same as above PCXXF-AA, except for mounting of the Professional 325
system unit

Personal Computers

5-11

Professional 325 & 350 Personal Computer
Professional Software

QBOOS-C3

PRO/Communications. Adds terminal emulation and file transfer to the Professional Series. In addition,
adds TMS support to the Professional 325 and 350. Terminal emulation mode allows the Professionals to
operate as a VT1 02 or VT125 terminal. The Extended Bit-Map module is required for VT1 25 emulation.
Files can be transferred to and from the Professional by invoking a file transfer task on the host (terminal
emulation mode) or by utilizing the file transfer utility in the communications package. The file transfer
utility supports active or passive modes of file transfer to and from other Professionals and host
computers. In addition, the Professional Communications Package allows selection of various line
characteristics that can be set for each different computer or phone number. Une characteristics are
stored in the Professional Phone Book along with a directory of names and phone numbers. Supports
autodialing using TMS or a DF03 modem.
Note: Optional communications software must be installed on VAX/VMS, RSX-11 M, RSX-11 M-PLUS, or
P/OS-based systems for file transfer. Requires modem or RS232-C cable to a host computer or another
Professional.

QBE11-C3
QBE12-C3

PROSE-PLUS.PROSE-PLUS is an enhanced version of PROSE, the full screen text editor, (included in
the Professional operating system), deSigned in conjunction with the Professional 300 series keyboard.
PROSE-PLUS provides word processing capability layered on the PIOS and uses the PI as services for
menus and help. It uses RMS sequential files for its permanent files. Text in the process of being edited is
kept in a temporary work file. PROSE-PLUS maintains file compatibility with the PROSE editor, but does
not maintain file compatibility with other Digital word processing systems. It has some powerful text
attributes and embedded control capabilities that allow the user to do such functions as uppercase,
lowercase, bold, underline, new page, conditional page, center line, text formatting and rulers. Additionally, it has other word proceSSing capabilities like search and replace functions, and editor functions such
as date and time, paginate, and rewrap selected text. Note:The OBE11-C3 is the PROSE-PLUSI
DISKETTE. The OBE12-C3 is the PROSE-PLUS/HARD DISK.
Note: For additional application software refer to the Personal Computer Catalog.

5-1 2

Personal Computers

Professional 325 & 350 Personal Computer
Professional Host Tool Kit
Ordering Information (RSX-11 M/M-PLUS Host)
QJ071-xx·

Professional Host Tool Kit. Contains software and optional hardware for developing Professional
applications compatible with the P/OS menu-driven environment. Utilizes a host system running RSX11 M,RSX11 M-PLUS, or VAX/VMS. Decreases program development costs by preserving hardware and
software investments, by increasing programmer productivity through use of powerful development tools,
and by reducing training requirements that are associated with learning a new system. Includes
Professional MACRD-11 Assembler. In addition, the Tool Kit'includes PRO/RMS for record access;
PRO/FMS for forms-oriented video I/O management; PRO/SORT for record sort; the CORE Graphics
Ubrary for over 20 device-independent graphics commands; the Professional Diskette Builder for enduser media distribution. Applications are developed on the host system and are transferred to the
Professional 350 for debugging.
Support Category-Oigital Supported/Customer Installed
License-Single-use license, binaries, documentation, and support services

QJ074-xx·

Professional Host Tool Kit FORTRAN-77. High-performance, optimizing FORTRAN compiler for use with
the Professional Host Tool Kit.
Support Category-Oigital Supported/Customer Installed
License-Single-use license, binaries, documentation, and support services

QJ073-xx·

Professional Host Tool Kit BASIC-PlU5-2. Optimizing BASIC compiler for use with the Professional Host
Tool Kit. See description for PDP-11 BASIC-PLUS-2.
Support Category-Oigital Supported/Customer Installed

QJ369-xx·

Professional Host Tool Kit DlBOl.Professional Host Tool Kit DIBOL is a complete software package that
enables the user to develop Professional 300 applications using the DIBOL programming language. It is
compatible with the other DIBOL offerings (source level) and it permits an easy migration path from the
smallest Professional 300 computer to the largest systems. This compatibility is very important when
considering the increasing number of clients who combine V AX-11 and PDP-11 systems to fulfill their
data processing requirements.
Support Category-Oigital Supported/Customer Installed

QJ081-xx·

Professional Host Tool Kit Cobol-81.Professional Host Tool Kit Cobol-81 is a high-level language for
business data processing that generates programs for execution under control of the P/OS Operating
System. It is based on the 1 974 ANSI COBOL Standard x3. 23-1 974 and includes some of the features
planned for the next COBOL standard. The COBOL-81 is compatible with COBOL-81 /RSX and includes
various DIGITAL extensions to COBOL, including screen handling at the source language level.
Support Category-Oigital Supported/Customer Installed
License-Single-use license, binaries, documentation, and support services

QJ082-xx·

Professional Host Tool Kit Pascal.Professional Host Tool Kit Pascal is an extended implementation of
the PASCAL language. The extensions assist the programmer in accessing the P/OS system capabilities
and Simplify application design. In addition, there is a high degree of compatibility with VAX-11 PASCAL
and the ISO and ANSI Pascal standards.
Support Category-Oigital Supported/Customer Installed

QX351-xx·
QJ072-xx·

Host File Transfer Package. Complementary communications package for VAX/VMS and PDP-11 RSX11 M host systems. Transfers files to and from the Professional 325 and 350. The PRO/Communications
Package must be installed on the Professional for complete communications capability.
Support Category-Oigital Supported/Customer Installed

License-Single-use license, binaries, documentation, and support services

License--Single-use license, binaries, documentation, and support services

Note: The Professional Host Tool Kits are also available for VAX systems. However, this ordering information is not
included in this catalog.

Personal Computers

5-1 3

Professional 325 & 350 Personal Computer
Order Code Suffixes
The following suffixes replace the "xx" in the Professional Host Tool Kit order numbers above. These suffixes
designate the license agreement (and support arrangements) and the distribution media (or right to copy) as follows:

5-14

-AD

Single-use license, binaries on 800 BPI magtape, documentation, and support services

-AH

Single-use license, binaries on RL02 disk cartridge, documentation, and support services

-AM

Single-use license, binaries on 1600 BPI magtape, documentation, and support services

-AG

Single-use license, binaries on TU58 cassette tape, documentation, and support services

-HD

Update license, documentation, and no support services; 800 BPI magtape

-HH

Update license, documentation, and no support services;RL02 disk cartridge

-HM

Update license, documentation, and no support services; 1600 BPI magtape

-HG

Update license, documentation, and no support services;TU58 cassette tape

Personal Computers

Personal Computers Catalog

The new Personal Computers Catalog contains descriptions of the software packages available for Digital's Personal
Computers. Consult your Digital Sales Representative for more information.

Personal Computers

5-1 5

6 Terminals & Printers
As the personal interface to your computer system, Digital's terminals and printers give you the features you need to
help you run at peak efficiency. Often you can eliminate bottlenecks by providing additional video terminals or a
higher-speed system printer, and you can facilitate recordkeeping by placing a hardcopy terminal close to a group of
users. Because they are so easy to use, versatile, and highly reliable, these terminals and printers can make you
more productive, too.
The ASCII asynchronous VT100 family of video terminals provide an impressive list of standard features -features
like nonvolatile setup memory, a detachable keyboard, 80- or 132-character line widths, selectable smooth or jump
scrolling, and split-screen capability. Communications speeds go up to 19,200 baud. One of these video terminals
is sure to meet your needs, whether they be text editing, word proceSSing, program development, graphics, or
personal computing.
Digital also provides a complete line of hardcopy terminals including both receive-only (RO) and keyboard send/
receive (KSR) printing terminals. Each has its own unique combination of features and performance, so you can
choose exactly what you need-letter-quality printing, for instance, or multiple character fonts or even automatic
single sheet feed. All Digital hardcopy terminals share features that no one should do without-features like a choice
of character sizes, multiple baud rates for flexibility in communications, 1 32 print columns.
In addition to the character printers, you can also choose from a variety of lineprinters, with speeds up to 1,200
lines per minute, and a new laser page printer.

The VT100 Family of Video Terminals
Video Terminal Selection Chart
Model

Universal
VT100
Family
Features

Keyboard

Advanced
Video
Features

RT100-A,-B

ANSI Numeric
Flat Membrane
Mylar

OPT

RT102-A,-B

ANSI Numeric
Flat Membrane
Mylar

RT137

Keyboard
Type Bar
Code Template

OPT

VT100-A

ANSI
Numeric

OPT

VT100-W

Word
Processing

VT101-A

ANSI
Numeric

VT102-A

ANSI
Numeric

VT102-W

Word
Processing

VT12S-A

ANSI
Numeric

VT12S-W

Word
Processing

VT131-A

ANSI
Numeric

Graphics

Printer
Port

Local
Editing
Block
Mode

Personal
Computing

Industrial

Local
Echo

Async
Comm

Modem
Controls

Page

OPT

Full
Duplex

6·7

Yes

Half/Full
Duplex

Yes

6·7

OPT

Full
Duplex

6·7

OPT

Full
Duplex

6·5

OPT

Full
Duplex

6·5

Yes

Full
Duplex

6·5

Yes

Half/Full
Duplex

Yes

6·5

Yes

Half/Full
Duplex

Yes

6·5

Full
Duplex

6·8

Full
Duplex

6·8

Yes

Half/Full
Duplex

Yes

6·5

OPT

Terminals and Printers

6-3

The VT100 Family of Video Terminals
The VT100 family of video display terminals is designed to make the first-time user feel comfortable. A sculptured
typewriter-like detachable keyboard connects to the video display unit by means of a 1.9 m (6 ft) coiled cord. The
keyboard is used to set the terminal's functions. You can customize the display-set up tab stops, reverse the video
image, and change the cursor from underline to block-to suit your application.
The advanced video features, optional on some models, give you three additional capabilities. First, you get a
combination of 24 display lines and 132 columns. You also get space and connections for an extra character set
that resides in the terminal. And you can display any character in any combination of blinking, underlined, bold, or
reversed video.
The VT100 family terminals operate on full-duplex asynchronous communications lines and are equipped with a
standard RS232-C interface, but you can add a 20mA interface if you like.
If you don't see a time in the future when you'll need all the expansion capabilities of the VT100, the economical
VT1 01 , VT1 02, and VT1 31 can give you substantial savings and additional features. If you need a terminal that can
stand up to adverse conditions-a factory floor or warehouse, for instance-Digital offers you VT100-based
terminals in ruggedized versions-the RT100 and the RT102. For such powerful graphics capabilities as business
graphics, the VT125 provides a unique solution.
No matter what system you have, you've got a choice in the VT100 family. All members of the VT100 family share
the universal VT100 performance characteristics.

Universal VT100 Family Performance Characteristics:
• Baud rate: 50 to 19,200 b/s
• Format: 24 lines x 80 characters
• Characters: 7 x 9 dot matrix with descenders
• Character set: 94 displayable-character ASCII set and 32-character special line-drawing graphics set
• Double-width/double-size characters
• Standard numeric/function keypad
• Bidirectional vertical scrolling,
selectable, smooth or jump scrolling
• Split-screen capability
• Normal or reversed screen image
• Adjustable tabs
• Full-duplex operation
• Keyboard selectable features
• Cursor control keys
• ANSIIVT52 command modes
• Line drawing character set
• 20 character answerback message
• Selectable XON/XOFF buffer control
• Self-test diagnostics
• Non-volatile set-up memory

6-4

Terminals and Printers

The VT100 Family of Video Terminals

VT100 Video Terminal
The VT100 is Digital's most basic and adaptable video terminal. Since additional space and power are built in, you
can choose from a variety of upgrades and configurations that let you build a VT100 to your own specifications. If
you add the advanced video option, you'll get the ability to display any character blinking, bold, underlined, or with
its video image reversed (these features are standard on the VT1 02 and VT131). This basic terminal allows you to
add graphics capability (which is standard on the VT125) at a later date.
With the word processing version, you get the advanced video features and gain keyboard compatibility with
DECword/DP and the DECmail electronic mail system.

VT101 Video Terminal
The VT1 01 video terminal offers the universal VT100 features and performance characteristics plus local echo. This
local echo feature allows the user to attach the VT1 01 to non-Digital computer systems. Digital's host computers,
which operate full duplex, echo characters as they are received, providing added assurance that the computer has
correctly received the characters that were typed. In systems that do not incorporate this feature, the characters
must be placed on the screen as they are being typed. The VT101 is a totally self-contained and highly reliable
terminal with the lowest monthly maintenance cost of any Digital video terminal.

VT102Video Terminal
The VT1 02 terminal is a VT100 video terminal with built-in advanced video and printer port features that provide a
wider variety of functions at a lower cost. The advanced video features make it easier to format documents, to
prompt the user, to point out exceptions, or to provide guidance. Advanced editing features that allow character and
line insert and delete are standard. The printer port is used for hardcopy printing without host intervention. The
terminal and output device share one communication line so that they can communicate without taking up valuable
CPU time.
The VT102 terminal can communicate in full-duplex (two-way simultaneous) or half-duplex (one-way transmiSSion)
mode, with local echo, using one of five modem-control selections. This provides optimum communication
versatility-so the terminal can talk to a number of devices.
The word processing version increases the VT102's capabilities by giving you keyboard compatibility with
DECword/DP and the DECmail electronic mail system.

VTl31 Video Terminal
The VT131 video terminal has full VT102 capability plus local editing and block mode transmission. Local editing
allows the operator to enter and edit a full screen of data before transmitting it as a block of data to the host. The
VT131 can be used in interactive mode on Digital computer systems and in block mode on non-Digital systems.
Note: Block mode transmission is not supported on PDP-11 operating systems.

Terminals and Printers

6-5

The VT100 Family of Video Terminals
Additional Performance Characteristics:

Ordering Information:

• Advanced video features: 24 lines x 132 characters
and normal or reverse video, blinking, underline, and
bold characters selectable on a character-by-character
basis (on the VT1 02, Rn 02, VT131 )
• Format: 14 lines x 132 characters, selectable (on the
VT100 and VT1 01)
• Enhanced terminal editing features: insert line, delete
line, insert character, and delete character (on the
VT1 02, Rn 02 and VT131)
• Local print functions without host intervention (on the
VT1 02, Rn 02 and VT131)
• Printer port for text output (on the VT1 02, Rn 02 and
VT131)
• Protected fields and block mode (VT131 )
• Half-duplex operation (on the VT1 02, Rn 02 and
VT131)
• Full-duplex local-echo operation (on the VT1 01,
VT1 02, RT1 02 and VT131)
• Modem controls (on the VT102, Rn 02 and VT131)

VT10o-AA(AB)

6-6

Terminals and Printers

Video display terminal

VT10o-WA(WB) Video terminal with advanced video features and word processing keyboard

VT101-AA(AB)

Video terminal with local echo

VT102-AA(AB)

Video terminal with local echo, advanced video, and printer port

VT1 02-WA(WB) VT1 02-AA(AB) video terminal with local
echo, advanced video, printer port, and
word processing keyboard

VT131-AA(AB)

Video terminal with local echo, advanced video, printer port, local editing,
and block mode transmission

The VT100 Family of Video Terminals

Ruggedized Terminals
The RT100 is a ruggedized version of the VT100 suitable for industriaJ environments. It is protected by a sturdy
sheet-steel case and heavy-duty filtration system. For added flexibility, it includes a hinged keyboard that allows you
to shelf-mount the terminal conveniently at eye level.
The RT102 terminal is a ruggedized version of the VT102. It provides the full functionality and compatibility of the
VT102, but is packaged to withstand hostile industrial environments. The RT102 has a mylar flat membrane
keyboard that is resistant to most liquids, grease, and oil. Both display and keyboard are housed in durable metal
enclosures with a ventilation fan. An easy-to-service, slide-out air filter greatly reduces dust and particulate
infiltration.
The RT137 Bar Code Terminal combines the features of our ruggedized RT100 terminal with bar code capability,
enabling it to handle factory data collection applications that require machine readable input. The terminal reads
Code 39, interleaved 2-of-5, and Code 11.
A bar code reader is deSigned as an integraJ part of the RT137 architecture. The RT137 keyboard is a metaJ
template keyboard which consists of bar code symbols representing alphanumeric characters and function key
equivalents. For scanning the bar code, a shock and vibration-resistant light pen is provided. As an alternative to the
light pen, a badge slot reader is available.

Ordering Information:
RT10D-AA(AB)

Industrial video terminal with RS232-C
interlace

RT1 OD-BA(BB)

20mA version of the above

RT1 02-AA(AB)

VT102-AA(AB) with EIA interlace enclosed in a sheet metal shell, membrane keyboard

RT1 02-BA(BB)

20mA version of the above

RT137-AA

RT100 console, bar code reader, bar
code keyboard, VT100 keyboard, light
pen. 120VAC/RS232-C.

RT137-BA

20mA version of the above

RT137-AE(BE)

RT1 00 console, bar code reader, bar
code keyboard, light pen (no VT100
keyboard)

RT137-AM(BM)

RT1 00 console, bar code reader.

RT137-AK(BK)

RT100 console, bar code reader, visible wand, RT1 00 keyboard (RT1 XXAC)

RT137-AC

Bar code keyboard

RT137-AD

Ught pen

RT137-SR

Badge slot reader

Terminals and Printers

6-7

VT125 Graphics Terminal

The VT125 combines the versatile features of the VT100 video terminal with graphics capability to become an easyto-use data processing and graphics terminal. The VT125 is a microprocessor-based alphanumeric video terminal
with data plotting extensions. The VT125 directly executes Digital's ReGIS (Remote Graphics Instruction Set).
ReGIS commands are easy-to-remember single mnemonics and are easily inserted in programs written in any
language, including BASIC, COBOL, and FORTRAN. With ReGIS you can produce bit map graphics and generate
vectors and curves simply and automatically, instantly transforming complex data into easily understandable charts,
graphs, and diagrams.
The VT125 comes with a black and white monitor. Two full graphics planes allow the terminal to display images one
at a time, two at a time (for comparison), or combined to achieve varying levels of gray.
The word proceSSing version of the VT125 graphics terminal has increased capabilities, which give you keyboard
compatibility with DECwordlDP and the DECmail electronic mail system.
You can use the VT125 to access your database. If you need hardcopy, use the integral printer port to attach an
LA 12 Correspondent, Letterprinter 100 terminal, or LA50 Personal Printer.

Performance Characteristics:
• Universal VT100 family features
• Format: 24 lines x 80 characters or 14 lines x 132
characters, selectable
• Advanced video features (Vf125-W): 24 lines x 132
characters, and normal or reverse video, blinking, underline, and bold characters selectable on a characterby-character basis

Graphics Features:
• Graphics resolution: 768 x 240 pixels
• Two full graphics planes
• Firmware for direct execution of ReGIS commands
• Printer port for graphics mode
• Visual attributes: Black and white output with four gray
levels

Ordering Information:
VT12S-AA(AB)

Video terminal with graphics capability
and printer port

VT12S-WA(WB) Video terminal with graphics, advanced
video features, word processing keyboard, and printer port

6-8

Terminals and Printers

VSll Color Graphics Display Systems

The VS11 is a high-performance, 16-color graphics system. It features a versatile graphics instruction set, bit-slice
architecture, switch-selectable resolution and intensity for interlaced or non-interlaced operation.
The basic elements of the system are an image processor, image memory and sync generator. The image
process6r cycle-fetches graphic instructions (primitives) from the host's memory, interprets them, and fills the image
memory with the appropriate data. The image memory is then scanned for display on the system monitor.
Two graphics software packages are available for the VS11 systems. Both are callable from FORTRAN. The first is
called the FORTRAN DRAW package, utilizing a direct hardware access utility library with over 40 subroutines. The
second package is VIGL, which is a high-level user-friendly graphics data analysis library. To order software, see
Section 7 - Software.
Note: For information on Q-bus applications, contact Digital's CSS (Computer Special Systems group) Product
Bulletin.
Note: To order software see Section 7 - Software.

Terminals and Printers

6-9

Video Terminal Options and Accessories

In addition to functional upgrade options, Digital carries a full range of accessories and supplies that are specifically
deSigned for use with the VT100 family of video terminals. These options have been tested to Digital standards so
you can be assured of their compatibility and reliability. Here is a selection of options and accessories:
VT1XX-AA

VT1XX-CA

VT1XX-AB

RT1XX-AE

VT1XX-AC

6-10

20mA interface adapter to convert
VT100 terminal from an RS232-C interface to a 20mA current loop interface
for communications lengths exceeding
15.2 m (50 ft). Includes BC05F-15
cable.
20mA interface adapter to convert
VT1 00/VT1 01 IVT1 02/VT125/VT131
from an RS232-C interface to a 20mA
current loop interface for communications lengths exceeding 15.2 m (50 ft).
Includes BC05F-15 cable.
Advanced video option for the VT1001
VT1 25. Provides four additional character attributes (bold, blink, underline, and
reverse video in any combination),
space and connections for an alternate
character set memory thus allowing additional character sets to reside in the
terminal, converts screen memory from
14 lines of 132 columns to 24 lines of
132 columns.
NorylTM plastic and Myiar™ membrane
keyboard fully compatible with the
VT100 architecture. The VT1 OO's keyboard functions are combined with a
membrane panel providing a sealed
unit. The Mylar membrane keyboard is
resistant to moisture, dust, grease and
oil. The RT1 XX comes with a standard
6-foot coiled cord to attach to the monitor. Prerequisite is any VT100 family
terminal.
Printer port option for connection of a
VT100 to a hardcopy printer. Enables
hardcopy printing off the video terminal,
thus sharing one communication line
between two peripherals. The printer
port also allows local print functions
without host intervention. Prerequisite:
VT1XX-AB

Terminals and Printers

VT1XX-CB

Graphics upgrade kit to convert VT100
to VT1 25 graphics terminal.

VT1XX-CE

Word processing upgrade kit to convert
VT100 and VT1 25 to word processing
models.

VT1XX-SA

TilUswivel base assembly providing an .
upward tilt of 1 50 and a downward tilt
of 7.5 0 , plus 180 0 swivel capability for
the VT100 family of video terminals.

VT1XX-ST

Five leg terminal stand with casters (~e
quires customer assembly). Can be
used for VT100 family terminals.

VT1XX-F

Anti-glare panel. Reduces glare, enhances character contrast, and' improves screen readability. Can be used
with VT100 family. Easy to install and
available in three colors:

VT1XX-FA
VT1XX-FB
VT1XX-FC
VT1XX-K

VT1XX-KA
VT1XX-KB
VT1XX-KC
VT1XX-KD
VT1XX-BA

Gray anti-glare panel.
Green anti-glare panel.
Bronze anti-glare panel.
Keypad overlays that identify special
function keys with preprinted plastic
overlays:
KED/EDT for numeric keypads.
FMS/FED for numeric keypads.
FMS/FDV for numeric keypads.
Clear blank overlays for numeric keypads with labels.
Blank full keyboard overlays for userdefined keys.

TMNoryl is a registered trademark of General Electric Co.
TMMyiar is a registered trademark of DuPont de Nemours & Co., Inc.

Configuring Information
International Power Cord Ordering Table
Model

U.S./GIA*

VT100

VT10o-AA(AB)
VT10o-WA(WB)
All have U.S. plugs.

United
Kingdom

Continental
Europe

Switzerland

Australia

Japan

N/A

VT101

VT101-AA(AB)
All have U.S. plugs.

VT101-A2
Includes 240V
power cord &
U.K. plug.

VT101-A3
Includes 220V
power cord &
Continental Europe
plug.

VT101-A4
Includes 220V
power cord
Swiss plug.

VT101-AS
Includes 250V
power cord &
plug.

VT101-AC
Includes 1 OOV
power cord
plug.

VT102

VT1 02-AA(AB)
VT102-WA(WB)
All have U.S. plugs.

VT102-A2
VT102-W2
Includes 240V
power cord &
U.K. plug.

VT102-A3
VT102·W3
Includes 220V
power cord &
Continental Europe
plug.

VT102-A4
VT102-W4
Includes 220V
power cord &
Swiss plug.

VT102-AS
VT102-WS
Includes 250V
power cord &
plug.

VT102-AC
VT102-WC
Includes 1 OOV
power cord &
plug.

VT131

VT131-AA(AB)
All have U.S. plugs.

VT131-A2
Includes 240V
power cord &
U.K. plug.

VT131-A3
Includes 220V
power cord &
Continental Europe
plug.

VT131-A4
Includes 220V
power cord &
Swiss plug.

VT131-AS
Includes 250V
power cord &
plug.

VT131-AC
Includes 1 OOV
power cord &
plug.

VT12S

VT125-AA(AB)
VT125-WA(WB)
All have U.S. plugs.

N/A

* General International Area. Those countries not included in the list above are members of GIA. For details as to
power plugs available for GIA countries, please contact your Digital representative.

NI A means not available.

Terminals and Printers

6-11

Configuring Information
Video Terminals
Model

20mA

Watts, Btu/hr

Height

Width

Depth

Weight

RT10Q-A,B

RT100-8

300,512

41.9/4.5 em
16.5/1.8 in

52.1 em
20.5 in

61.6 em
24.3in

39 kg
861b

RT102-A,B

RT102-8

150,341

41.9/4.5 em
16.5/1.8 in

52.1 em
20.5 in

61.6 em
24.3in

39 kg
861b

RT137-A,B

RT137-8

300,512

41.9/4.5 em
16.5/1.8 in

52.1 em
20.5 in

61.6 em
.24.3in

40 kg
881b

VT1OQ-A,W

OPT
(VT1XX-AA)

150,512

36.8/8.9 em
14.5/3.5 in

45.7 em
18 in

51.4 em
20.3in

18.6 kg
411b

VT101-A

OPT
(VT1XX-CA)

70,240

36.8/8.9 em
14.5/3.5 in

45.7 em
18 in

51.4 em
20.3 in

18.6 kg
411b

VT102-A,W

OPT
(VT1XX-CA)

150,512

36.8/8.9 em
14.5/3.5 in

45.7 em
18 in

51.4 em
20.3in

18.6 kg
141b

VT125-A

OPT
(VT1XX-CA)

150,512

36.8/8.9 em
14.5/3.5 in

45.7 em
18 in

51.4 em
20.3

18.6 kg
411b

VT131-A

OPT
(VT1XX-CA)

70,240

36.8/8.9 em
14.5/3.5 in

45.7 em
18 in

51.4 em
20.3 in

18.6 kg
411b

Additional Information:
• Prerequisite for a/l terminals: EIAICCITf serial line interface or equivalent.
• Communication cables: Communication cables are not provided with the VT100, RT1 00, VT1 01, VT102,
RT1 02, VT131, and VT125 terminals and must be ordered separately. The recommended cables are BC22D-xx
for local connection to a line unit and BC22B-xx for connection of the video terminal to a modem.
• Power cords: The VT1 01, VT1 02, and VT131 can be ordered with U.S. or European power cords (see
International Power Cord Ordering Table). The BC05F cable is recommended for the 20mA RT1 00 and RT1 02
interface.
• Receptacles: NEMA #L5-15R for 120VAC video terminals, #L6-15R for 240VAC models.

6-12

Terminals and Printers

Printers
Hardcopy Terminals Selection Chart
Model

LA12

Keyboard

Print Speed
& Quality

Graphics

Partsl
Form

Paper
Feed

Special
Features

Page

KSA
1 50 chis Draft
Embedded Num
OPT External
Num Keypad

Yes

Friction
Pin
Tractor OPT

Portable
Built-in Modem
or Acoustic
Coupler

6-17

LA50

100 chis Draft
50 chIs
Enhanced

Yes

Friction
Low Tear-off
Tractor

PC Compatible

6-14

LA100

KSA
orAO

240 chis Draft
80 chis
Enhanced
30 chIs Letter

Yes

Friction
Tractor
Sheet OPT

Plug-in Fonts
PC Compatible
Pro 300
Graphics
Available

6-16

LA120

KSA
orAO

1 80 chis Draft

6STD
9 OPT

Tractor Only

For High-duty
Cycle
Environment

6-18

LQP02

. 32 chis Letter

OPT with
CP/M
DAISY-AIDS·
Package

Friction
Sheet OPT
Tractor OPT

PC Compatible
Full-Character
Print

6-15

• DAISY-AIDS is a trademark of Escape Computing Software, Inc. See the Personal Computers Catalog.

Lineprinters Selection Chart
Model

Print
Speed

Print
Characters

Graphics

Technology

Page

LN01

1 2 pages/min

188

Non-Impact
Laser

6-21

LP25

3001/min
2151/min

64
96

Band

6-22

LP26

6001/min
4451/min

64
96

Band

6-23

LP27

12001/min
8001/min

64
96

Band

6-24

LSP25

3001/min
2151/min

64
96

Band

6-22

LSP26

6001/min
4451/min

64
96

Band

6-23

LXY12

3001/min
2401/min
1701/min
42.4cm/min
16.7 in/min

64 Uppercase
96 Upperllower case
Double height
Plotting

Yes

Matrix

6-19

LXY22

6001/min
4651/min
3201/min
84.6 cm/min
33.3 in/min

64 Uppercase
96 Upper/lower case
Double height
Plotting

Yes

Matrix

6-19

Terminals and Printers

6-1 3

LA50 Personal Printer

The LASO Personal Printer is a lightweight, desktop, dot-matrix printer designed for use with Digital's personal
workstations. Attach it to the printer ports on the VT100 family video terminals or to Digital's personal computers for
complete compatibility. It features a text mode, an enhanced print-quality mode, and graphics capability. The LASO
printer can use regular office stationery, fan-fold paper, or multipart forms· on a 25.4 cm (10 in) wide platen. For
multilingual purposes, a multinational character set (Digital-standard) is resident in this terminal. The printer is
customer-installable.

Performance Characteristics:

Ordering Information:

• Baud rate: 110 to 4,800 b/s
• Print speed: 100 characters/s (text mode),
50 characters/s (enhanced print mode)
• Print columns: 80 to 1 32
• Character set:
94 displayable-character ASCII set,
81 multinational set (Digital-standard),
JIS Katakana set option,
27 VT100 special graphics (line drawing) set
plus ANSI-compatible escape sequences
• Characters per inch: 10,12,16.5 single width,
5,6,8.25 double width
• Characters: 7 x 9 dot matrix impact printing in text
mode; 13 x 9 in enhanced print mode
• Unes per inch: 2,3,4,6,8,12
• Parity: Switch-selectable to odd, even, mark, or space;
7 or 8 bits per character (selectable)
• Print density: 144 or 180 dots/in horizontal (switchselectable) and 72 dots/in vertical (in graphics mode)

LASG-RA

Desktop printer with tractor feed,
110VAC power supply.

LASG-RB

Desktop printer with .tractor feed,
220VAC power supply.

LASG-RC

Desktop printer with tractor feed,
240VAC power supply.

• Digital recommends that multipart forms not exceed 0.028 cm (0.011 in) in thickness. This is usually equivalent to
a three-part form.

6-14

Terminals and Printers

LQP02 Full-Character Letter-Quality Printer

The LQP02 letter-quality printer is a desktop full-character impact printer that incorporates daisy-wheel print
technology. This highly reliable, customer-installable terminal will print high-quality hardcopy on regular office
stationery as well as fan-fold paper. Various character fonts can be used by simply changing printwheels. Daisy
wheels are inexpensive, easily interchangeable, and available in over 100 type styles and special purpose fonts.
Smart bidirectional printing increases speed, particularly over large areas of white space. It operates on full-duplex,
asynchronous communication lines and includes a universal power supply and a standard RS232-C interface.

Performance Characteristics:

Ordering Information:

• Baud rate: 110 to 9600 b/s
• Print speed: 32 characters/s (Shannon Text)
• Print method: Impact, daisy wheel
• Print columns:
1 32 at 1 0 ch/in
1 58 at 1 2 ch/in
• Character set: over 1 00 different, 7 -bit ASCII
• Characters per inch: 10/12 variable, software-selectable
• Unes per inch: 6 or 8 variable, software-selectable
• Variable horizontal tabs and margins
• Paper: Tractor-fed or single-sheet
• Ribbon: fabric or mylar
• Universal power supply, user-selectable
• Parity: Switch-selectable to odd, even, mark, or space;
7 bits per character

LOP02-AA(AD)

Letter-quality printer with Courier-10
font.

LOPX2-AA

Bidirectional forms tractor option for
use with fan-fold paper.

LOPX2-SF

Dual-tray cut-sheet feeder; feeds in
vertical or horizontal mode and collates
output.

LOPX2-FB(FD)

Acoustic cover for LQP02-AA(AD).

Terminals and Printers

6-15

LA100 Letterprinter 100jLetterwriter 100

The Letterprinter 100/Letterwriter 1 00 are desktop, microprocessor-controlled printers. The Letterprinter 1 00 is
the receive-only (RO) version, while the Letterwriter 100 is a keyboard send/receive (KSR) terminal. Highly versatile
and multimode, the Letterprinter 1 00 is ideal for use with video workstations and small business systems. These
printers offer two text modes- draft-quality and letter-quality-as well as bit map graphics. LA 1 ODs print on fan-fold
computer paper, roll paper, and office stationery. The user can select from a variety of resident type faces or a
greater selection of plug-in cartridges. The LA 1DO-PC model, deSigned for use with Digital's personal computers,
offers graphics compatibilty with Professional 300-series computers. (Note: The LA 1DO-PC model uses different
font cartridges than the other LA1 00 models.) These printers can handle a wide variety of applications in distributed
data proceSSing, word processing, graphic imaging, communications, and electronic mail.
The read-only Letterprinter 100 is really three printers in one: a draft printer, a letter printer, and a graphics
printer-with multiple fonts.
The KSR Letterwriter 100 is the system console, Digital's newest and fastest KSR printer/terminal.
The LA 1 00 printer operates on full-duplex asynchronous communications lines and each includes universal power
supply, standard RS232-C interface, and RS232-C null modem cable (BC22D-xx).

Performance Characteristics:
• Baud rate: 50 to 9600 b/s
• Print speed:
240 characters/s in draft printing,
30 characters/s in letter printing,
80 characters/s in memo printing
may be ordered as an option
• Slew speed: 12.7 cm/s (5 in/s)
• Print columns: 21 7
• Character set: 7 -bit ASCII for 9 countries,
plus ANSI-compatible escape sequences,
8-bit Digital-standard 1 69 multinational and
VT100 line drawing graphics (for LA 1OO-PC)
• Characters per inch: 5,6,6.6,8.25,10,12,13.2,16.5
• Characters:
7 x 9 dot matrix impact draft printing
33 x 9 dot matrix impact memo printing
33 x 18 dot matrix impact letter printing
132 x 72 dot matrix impact printing in graphics mode
• Unes per inch: 2,3,4,6,8,12
• Universal power supply
• Parity: Even, odd, or none; 7 or 8 bits per character,
selectable

Ordering Information:
LA100-BA(BB)

English language KSR printer with numeric keypad, tractors, ribbon, paper,
and BC22D-1 a cable.

LA100-CA(CB)

LA 1OO-BA(BB) plus multiple-font capability.

LA100-PC

RO printer for use with Digital's personal computers, includes 8-bit Digitalstandard 169 multinational character
set, U.S. Courier-10, multinational
Courier-10, VT100 line-drawing character set, Professional Computer (PC)
compatible graphics ratios, tractors,
built-in multiple-font option.

LA10D-ZA(ZB)

English language RO printer plus multiple-font adapter, tractors, ribbon cartridge, paper, paper-out switch, U.S.
and European power supply, Courier10 U.S. ASCII character set font ROM
chip, BC22D-25 Signal cable, Orator10 U.S ASCII character set font ROM
chip, and three user-specifiable font
ROM slots.

* All A models are 120VAC, all B models are 220VAC

6-16

Terminals and Printers

LA12 DECWriter Correspondent

The DECwriter Correspondent (LA 12) is a lightweight interactive terminal which prints on plain bond paper, as well
as fan-fold and roll paper. With the Correspondent, you can also print two-part forms. A variety of user-selectable
features allows the portable correspondent to be adapted to a number of applications in many locations. The
Correspondent is well-suited to all four major application categories: on-line timesharing, database information
retrieval, networking, or program development. You can select several integral communication modes-acoustic
coupler, direct connect modem, and direct-connect RS232-C port-to connect your terminal to a computer from
virtually any location. These flexible communication ports allow more location independence to the professional than
ever before.
For international use, the Correspondent is compatible with all Bell and European modem protocols. You can select
from ten international character sets. Communication cables are not included. The BC22D-XX is recommended.

Performance Characteristics:
• Baud rate: 50 to 9600 b/s
• Print speed: 150 characters/s (text mode)
• Slew speed: 5 in/s
• Print columns: 1 32
• Character set: 94-character ASCII set,
9 international sets,
VT100 special graphics,
APL character set
• Characters per inch: 5,6,6.6,8.25,10,12,13.2,16.5
• Characters: 9 x 9 dot matrix impact printing in text
mode
• Unes per inch: 2,3,4,6,8,12, user-selectable
• Universal power supply, user-selectable
• Parity: Switch-selectable to odd, even, mark, or space;
7 or 8 bits per character selectable
• Print density: 1 32 dots/in horizontal,
72 dots per inch vertical (graphics mode variable)
• Extensive self-contained user diagnostics

LA12-CB

LA 12 with integral 300 baud coupler
and EIA interface. Includes carrying
case.

LA12-0B

LA12 tabletop and console model, EIA
interface only.

LA12-0

Hardcopy terminal with RS232-C interface and accessories-paper roll 30.4
m (100 tt), ribbon cartridge, instruction
card, loop-back connector, and line
cord.

LA12-C

LA12-0 plus integral 300 baud acoustic coupler, carry case, shoulder strap.

LA12-B

LA12-0 plus 300/1,200 baud modem,
carry case, shoulder strap.

LA12-A

LA12-0 plus integral 300/1, 200 baud
modem, 300 baud acoustic 'coupler,
carry case, shoulder strap.

Ordering Information:

Upgrade Kits:

LA12-AB

LAX12-U2

Oial-through-the-keyboard 1200 baud
integral modem

LAX12-U4

300 baud acoustic coupler

LAX12-U5

Enhanced microcode

Portable hardcopy terminal with integral
1200 baud dial-through-the-keyboard
modem, 300 baud coupler and EIA interface. Includes carrying case.

Terminals and Printers

6-17

LA120 DECwriter III Printing Terminal

The freestanding DECwriter 11/ terminal is one of the sturdiest printers you can buy. It has been designed for the high
duty-cycle environment. You can choose between receive-only (RO) and keyboard send/receive (KSR) versions.
The LA 120 is optimized for 1200 baud communications, with capabilities for a dozen other rates from 50 to 9600.
Throughput is increased by combining bidirectional smart printing (seeks the terminal shortest path to next print
position) with a 1000 character buffer with fast horizontal and vertical skipping over white space. In addition, 45 setup features-like character size, line spacing, forms length, margins, and tabs-are easily selected from the keypad.
The LA 120 KSR printing terminal features a contoured, typewriter-styled keyboard with N-key roll-over. The LA 120
operates on five half- and full-duplex asynchronous communications lines, with a 30-character answerback for
security, and standard RS232-C/CCIIT interface. Includes universal power supply.

Performance Characteristics:
• Baud rate: 50 to 9,600 bls
• Print speed: 180 charactersls
• Unes per inch: 2,3,4,6,8,12
• Characters per inch: 5,6,6.6,8.25,10,12,13.2 or
16.5
• Characters: 7 x 7 dot matrix
• Character set: 7 -bit ASCII plus ANSI-compatible escape sequences
• Tabs: 217 horizontal, 168 vertical
• Font sizes: 8
• Une spacings: 6
• Parity: Odd, even, or none

6-18

Terminals and Printers

Ordering Information:
LA120-DA

DECwriter III KSR hardcopy terminal.

LA120-RA

DECprinter III RO hardcopy terminal.

LXV Graphics Lineprinters

"IL-..-..--

The LXY12 and LXY22 graphics lineprinters are versatile dot-matrix printers that combine the benefits of a line
printer and a plotter in one product. These printers are compatible with all other Digital lineprinters, requiring no
special software to use them as lineprinters.
These printers can be connected to the system using either an LP11 controller or a serial (RS232-C) port. The
LP11 controller offers the benefits provided by faster parallel throughput and full data transfer speeds. The RS232C interface provides remote connection to the CPU via a serial line interface and standard null modem cables.
Two software packages (PLXY and BCP) that increase the versatility of these graphics lineprinters are available.
These are further described in Section 7.
PLXY-11 Graphics Software Package gives RT11, RSX-11 M, RSX-11 M-PLUS, and RSTS/E users the ability to
produce graphs, charts, bar charts, designs, plots, and line drawings.
BCP Bar Code/Block Character Graphics Software Package gives RSX-11 M users the ability to produce CODE
39 barcode, block characters, horizontal and vertical thick and thin lines, horizontal and vertical bars, 0.25 cm (0.1
in) text characters and variable sized characters.

Performance Characteristics:
• Printing speed:
LXY12:
300 I/min (uppercase only)
240 I/min (underlines, upper/lowercase characters
with descenders)
170 I/min (double-height characters)
LXY22:
600 I/min (64 uppercase characters)
465 I/min (underlines, upper/lowercase characters)
320 I/min (double-height characters)
• Plotting speed:
LXY1 2: 42.4 cm/min (16.7 in/min)
LXY22: 84.6 cm/min (33.3 in/min)
• Character set: 96 ASCII standard (expansion to 192
characters optional)
• Paper slew speed:
LXY12: 20.3 cm/s (8 in/s)
LXY22: 40.6 cm/s (16 in/s)
• Buffer capacity: 1 32 characters
• Speeds based on parallel interface

Ordering Information:
LXY12-CA(CB)

300 I/min dot matrix graphics lineprinter, supplied with 7.6 m. (30 ft.)
cable, a pedestal with basket, paper
guide, and LP11 controller. UNIBUS interface.

LXY22-CA(CB)

600 I/min version of the above.

LXY12-DA(DB)

300 I/min dot matrix graphics lineprinter, supplied with cable, a pedestal
with basket, paper guide, and RS232
serial port.

LXY22-DA(DB)

600 I/min version of the above.

Software
BCP

Interactive package for printing bar
codes and block letters on the LXY 12/
LXY22 graphics lineprinters

PLXY-11

Graphics application development package for LXY1 2/LXY22 graphics lineprinters

Note: Software must be specified when ordering hardware. See Section 7 - Software for further descriptions of BCP
and PLXY-11 . Make your selection from the following chart.

Terminals and Printers

6-19

LXV Graphics Lineprinters
Applications Packages for LXY Graphics Lineprinters
Order Code

Product

RT-11

RSTS/E

RSX-11 M-PLUS

QJS05-AM,AH
(14.72.xx)

BCP

PLXY-11

6-20

RSX-11M

Terminals and Printers

QJS91-XM
(12.42.xx)

QJS92-XM
(14.16.xx)

QJS90-XM
(14.39.xx)

QJS95-XM
(14.71.xx)

LNO 1 Laser Printer

-::.:--~--<~
-...........

---...-..............~"".

'-...

-=-

G 111111111d.

'!I
"

The LN01 page printer is a high-quality nonimpact printer that employs laser technology. The LN01 provides the
speed of a lineprinter with exceptional print quality. Using electrophotographic imaging and xerographic printing, the
LN01 prints one page at a time, twelve pages per minute. The print resolution of 300 x 300 dots per square in
produces perfectly formed characters of even density and alignment. Since every page is an original, every copy is
as crisp and clear as the first.
The printer provides for the transfer of data via a parallel interface. Its quietness, high speed, high-resolution print
quality, and flexibility make the LN01 particularly well-suited for office environments, data centers, letter quality
requirements, and scientific markets.

Performance Characteristics:
• Printing speed: 12 pages/min maximum
• Character sets: 2 188-character fixed-space fonts
• Print modes: Portrait and landscape
• Print resolution: 300 x 300 dots per square in
• Print columns: Up to 132
• Unes per inch: 8.57
• Characters per inch: 13.6, 12.5 for Europe
• Paper handling: Cut-sheet plain paper,
2 250-sheet cassettes 1.1-1.6 kg (16-24Ib) paper
• Paper Sizes:
Standard: 21.6 x 27.9 cm (8.5 x 11 in)
Legal: 21.6 x 35.6 cm (8.5 x 14 in)
European: 21 x 29.7 cm (8.3 x 11.7 in)
• Noise Level: Less than 55 Dba

Ordering Information:
LN01-CA(CB)

Non-impact 12 page/min laser printer
with LP11 interface and 9.1 m (30 ft)
cable.

LN01-DA(DB)

Non-impact 12 page/min laser printer
with DMF32-compatible 9.1 m (30 ft)
cable.

Site Preparation Specifications:
• Height: 91.4 cm (36 in)
• Width: 65.5 cm (25.8 in)
• Depth: 66 cm (25.9 in)
• Weight (with pedestal): 136 kg (300 Ib)
• Watts: 1150
• Btu/hr: 3620
• Receptacles required: NEMA #5-15R(120VAC);
NEMA #6-15R(240VAC)

Terminals and Printers

6-21

LP25 300 L/Min Lineprinter

The LP25 band printers feature easily interchanged, user-replaceable font bands that include optional bands for a
compressed printing mode, and European and Japanese character sets. Two primary models are available; one for
64 character bands, and one for both 96 and 64 character bands. Use of a 64 character band on the 96 character
model enables automatic output foldover to 64 characters. The standard LP25 lineprinters are equipped with a
control unit, a 9.2 m (30 ft) cable, and a universal power supply. The long-line version of the 96/64 character
model, the LSP25-CA permits operation of the printer up to 152.5 m (500 ft) from the CPU. A 15.2 m (50 ft) cable
is supplied with the LSP25.

Performance Characteristics:

Ordering Information:

• Printing speed:
64-character set: 300 I/min
96-character set: 21 5 I/min
• Number of columns: 1 32
• Horizontal spacing: 0.25 cm (0.1 in), 10 ch/in or 15
ch/in compressed. Note: Compressed font decreases
throughput by 30%.
• Vertical spacing: 6 or 8 llin, switch-selectable
• Vernier adjustment for both horizontal and vertical paper tension
• Slew speed: 37.5 cm/s (15 in/s)
• Buffer capacity: 1 32 characters
• Program status display
• Self-test capability

LP11-AA

Band printer, 300 I/min for 64-character
ASCII set (UNIBUS).

LP11-BA

Band printer, 300 11m in for 64-character
set or 21 5 I/min for 96-character ASCII set (UNIBUS).

LPV11-AP

System option. Band printer, 300 I/min
for 64-character ASCII set (Q-bus).

LPV11-A

Upgrade option. Select one of the
following cabinet kits:

CK·LPV1 A-KA

Cabinet kit for MICRO/PDP-11 .

CK-LPV1 A·KB

Cabinet kit for PDP-11 123-S.

CK·LPV1 A·KC

Cabinet kit for PDP-11 123-PLUS.

LPV11-BP

System option. Band printer, 300 IImin
for 64-character set or 21 5 IImin for
96-character ASCII set (Q-bus).

LPV11-B

Upgrade option (see cabinet kits above).

LSP25-CA

U.S. prom set, 64 and 96 character
U.S.lU.K. bands, universal power supply,
15 m (50 tt) cable, 300/21511min.

Note: For further cabling information on the LSP25, see Digital's CSS (Computer Special Systems group) Product
Bulletin.

6-22

Terminals and Printers

LP26 600 L/Min Lineprinter

The LP26 band printers feature easily-interchanged, user-replaceable font bands with optional bands for American
and European character sets. They utilize a flat steel band with raised letters and a hammer bank with 1 32 hammers
(one for each column). As the selected character appears on the moving band, each hammer strikes one character
to produce a clear printed line. Two primary models are available; one for 64 character bands, and one for both 96
and 64 character bands. Use of a 64 character band on the 96 character model enables automatic output foldover
to 64 characters. The standard LP26 lineprinters are equipped with a control unit and a 9.2 m (30 ft) cable, as well
as universal power supply. The long-line version of the LP26-CA , the LSP26-CA, is available for operation of the
printer up to 152.5 m (500 ft) from the CPU. A 15.2 m (50 ft) cable is supplied with the LSP26.

Performance Characteristics:

Ordering Information:

• Printing speed:
64-character set: 600 Ilmin
96-character set: 445 IImin
• Number of columns: 132
• Horizontal spacing: 0.25 cm (0.1 in)
• Vertical spacing: 6 or allin, switch-selectable
• Vernier adjustment for both horizontal and vertical paper tension
• Slew speed: 37.5 cmls (15 in/s)
• Une advance time: 25 msec
• Buffer capacity: 1 32 characters, single-line
• Self-test capability
• Paper type: Pin-feed, continuous, fan-fold forms
• Copies: 1- to 6-part plus carbon paper
• Maximum paper thickness: 0.056 cm (0.022 in)
• Modular design for easy parts removal/replacement
during routine servicing and maintenance
• Reliable, medium-load performance

LP11-EA

Bandprinter, 600 I/min for 64-character
set (UNIBUS).

LP11-EB

Bandprinter, 600 I/min for 64-character
set or 445 I/min for 96-character set
(UNIBUS).

LPV11-EP

System option. Bandprinter, 600 I/min
for 64-character set (Q-bus).

LPV11-E

Upgrade option. See cabinet kit selection
for LPV11-F.

LPV11-FP

System qption. Bandprinter, 600 I/min
for 64-character set or 445 I/min for
96-character set (Q-bus).

LPV11-F

Upgrade option. Select one of the
following cabinet kits:

CK-LPV1 A-KA

Cabinet kit for MICRO/PDP-11 .

CK-LPV~ A-KB

Cabinet kit for PDP-11 123-S.

CK-LPV1 A-KC

Cabinet kit for PDP-11 123-PLUS.

LSP26-CA

U.S. prom set, 64 and 96 character
U.S'/U.K. bands, universal power supply,
15.2 m (50 ft) cable, 600/4451/min.

Note: For further information on the LSP26, see Digital's CSS (Computer Special Systems group) Product Bulletin.

Terminals and Printers

6-23

LP27 1200 L/Min Lineprinter

The LP27 is a 132-column, fully formed character, impact lineprinter. It includes both 64 and 96 character
American print bands as standard on all versions. Maximum print throughput is 1 200 lines per minute using the 64
character band or 800 lines per minute with the 96-character bafld.
The LP27 is designed for use on larger UNIBUS systems in a standard computer room environment. It uses
continuous, fan folded, pin feed forms (single part up to six part) in a wide range of widths 8.8 cm to 47.6 cm (3.5
to 18.75 in), lengths 7.6 em to 37.4 cm (3 to 14.75 in) and weights 6.8 kg bond to .05 cm card stock (151b bond
\
to .02 in card stock).
The LP27 is a heavy-duty lineprinter notable for its throughput, reliability, and its easy maintenance.

Performance Characteristics:

Ordering Information:

• Printing speed:
64-character set - 1200 I/min (maximum)
96-character set - BOO I/min
• Number of columns: 132
• Horizontal spacing: 10 ch/in
• Vertical spacing: 6 or Bllin,
switch-selectable
• Slew speed: 127 crnls (50 in/s)
• Une advance time: 14 msec maximum
• Buffer capacity: 132 characters,single-line
• Self-test capability: Yes (three modes)
• Paper type: Pin feed, continuous fan-fold forms
• Copies: One to six-part plus carbon paper
• Paper thickness: 6.B kg bond (151b bond) to
.05 cm card stock (0.02 in card stock)

LP27-UA(UB)

6-24

Terminals and Printers

LP27 with 9.5 m (30 tt) data cable and
controller. Shortline interface permits
operation up to 14.B m (49 ft) from
host processor. For more information
on print bands, see the DECdirect Catalog.

CRll Card Readers

The CR11 and CR11-B photoelectric card reader systems read hole-punched cards and feature two data formats
that are selectable under program control: nonpacked (standard Hollerith code) and packed (compressed Hollerith
code). A riffle air mechanism and a short, straight card track prevent card jams, and six attempts are made to read a
card before it is rejected. The card readers are self-contained tabletop units consisting of an input hopper for loading
cards, a photoelectric read station for reading data from cards, an output stacker for stacking cards after reading, a
motorized mechanism for moving the cards from the input hopper via the read station to the output stacker, a
controller, and 7.6 m (25 ft) cable.
The CR11 (A) is designed for laboratory and industrial applications; the CR11-BC(BD) is designed for engineering
and industrial applications.

Performance Specifications:

Site Preparation Specifications:

• Card speed:
CR11-285 cards/min
CR11-B-600 cards/min
• Card capacity:
CR11-550
CR11-B-1000
• Card type: Standard 1 2-row 80-column RS232-C
(Hollerith code) hole-punched cards
• Data formats: Nonpacked and packed (selectable under program control)
• Riffle air system
• Vacuum pick mechanism

CR11/CR11-A
• Height: 27.9 cm (11 in)
• Width: 48.9 cm (19.3 in)
• Depth: 35.6 cm (14 in)
• Weight: 27.2 kg (60 Ib)
• Watts: 600
• Btu/hr: 2,046
• Receptacles required:
NEMA #5-15R (120VAC)
NEMA #6-20R (240VAC)

CR11-BC/-BD

Ordering Information:
CR11

Tabletop card reader and controller;
120 VAC, 60 Hz.

CR11-A

Tabletop card reader and controller;
240 VAC, 50 Hz.

CR11-BC

Tabletop card reader and controller;
120 VAC, 60 Hz.

CR11-BD

Tabletop card reader and controller;
240 VAC, 50 Hz.

• Height: 41.3 cm (16.3 in)
• Width: 58.4 cm (23 in)
• Depth: 45.7 cm (18 in)
• Weight: 34 kg (75Ib)
• Watts: 700
• Btu/hr: 2,387
• Receptacles required:
NEMA #5-15R (1 20VAC)
NEMA #6-20R (240VAC)

Card Readers - Configuring Information

Model

Mounting
Requirements

DC Amps
Drawn@
+5V I +15V I -15V

Bus
Loads
Drawn

CR11

1 Quad slot

1.5/0.00 / 0.00

CR11-B

1 Quad slot

1.5/ 0.00 / 0.00

Height

Width

Depth

Weight

11 in.
(28 em)

19.3 in.
(49 em)

14 in.
(35.6 em)

60 Ibs.
(27.2 kg)

16.3 in.
(41.3em)

23 in.
(58.4 em)

18 in.
(45.7 em)

751bs.
(34 kg)

Terminals and Printers

6-25

Configuring Information
Hardcopy Terminals Configuring Information
Model

Mount

Watts, Btu/hr

Height

Width

Depth

Weight

LA12

Portable
Tabletop

60,188

14.4 em
5.7 in

46.4 em
18.3 in

39.4 em
15.5 in

8.2 kg
181bs

LASO

Tabletop

180W

12.7 em
5in

39.8 em
15.7 in

28.5 em
11.2 in

9.1 kg
20lbs

LA100

Tabletop
Pedestal OPT

100,188

17.8 em
7in

55.9 em
22 in

39.4 em
15.5 in

11.4 kg
251bs

LA120

Freestanding

153,520

85.1 em
33.5in

69.9 em
27.5 in

61 em
24in

46.3 kg
1021bs

LQP02

Tabletop
Pedestal OPT

120,410

18.8 em
7 in

63.5 em
25in

40.6 em
16 in

21.8 kg
481bs

Lineprinter Configuring Information
Model

Interface
Mounting
Code

DC/AC
Amps
Drawn

Bus
Loads
Drawn

Watts
Btu/hr

Height

Width

Depth

Weight

Panel
Units

@+SVDC/
@120VAC
LN01

1 Quad
Slot

1.5/9.6

1,150
3,620

91.4 em
36 in

65.5 em
25.8 in

66em
26 in

136 kg
300lbs

LP11-AA
-BA

1 Quad
Slot

1.5/3.0

350
1200

111 em
43.8 in

85em
29.9 in

85em
33.5 in

89 kg
1961bs

LP11-EA
-EB

1 Quad
Slot

1.5/4.5

475
1619

111 em
43.8 in

76em
30.3 in

85em
33.6 in

93 kg
2051bs

LP27-UA
-UB

1 Quad
Slot

1.5/9.2.0

1100
3600

124em
44.0in

90em
35.5 in

98em
38.5 in

256 kg
5671bs

LSP25-XX

1 Hex
Slot

1.7/3.0

375
1200

111 em
43.8in

7gem
31.1 in

85em
33.6 in

88 kg
1951bs

LSP26-XX

1 Hex
Slot

1.7/4.5

450
1619

111 em
43.8 in

7gem
31.1 in

85em
33.6 in

93 kg
2051bs

LXY12-CA
-CB

1 Quad
Slot

1.5/4.0

450

118.1 em

76.2 em

61.6em

90.7 kg

1535

46.5 in

30in

24.5 in

200lbs

450

118.1 em

76.2 em

61.6

90.7

1535

46.5 in

30in

24.5 in

200lbs

LXY22-CA
-CB
LXY12-DA
-DB

1 Quad
Slot

None

LXY22-DA
-DB

6-26

Terminals and Printers

None

7 Software
Software is the collection of written procedures and rules that control computer operations. The system software
always includes an operating system, which is the "intelligence" of the computer system. Usually, the system
software includes one or several language processors; it frequently includes specific applications as well.
As a set of organized programs, system software transforms your system hardware components into usable tools.
These programs include operations, functions, and routines that assist you in solving problems and producing
results. For example, some system programs store and retrieve data among the various peripharal devices. Others
perform difficult or lengthy mathematical calculations. Some programs allow you to create, edit, and process
application programs of your own. Still others handle entire applications for you.
The success of PDP-11 is built on the concept of architectural compatibility over the range of PDP-11 systems-from single-user systems in the business office to large systems that provide multiple services for universities or
corporations. PDP-11 processors support multiple operating systems so that the proper hardware, operating
system, and additional software can be combined to meet your specific application requirements, without altering
the basic architectural compatibility of the system.
The high degree of compatibility among PDP-11 programming languages, system programs, and information
management services makes it easy to interconnect your organization's operations. Digital's network products can
link together realtime, timesharing, and single-user systems. While a few of the characteristics of software may vary
from application to application, compatibility helps guarantee that programs can move among systems with a
minimum of trouble. For example, the FORTRAN IV programming language runs on several operating systems.
Consequently, a person who has learned it could, with little difficulty, write programs that would run in several
operating system environments. Likewise, a FORTRAN IV application program can be readily transported to any
Digital PDP-11 system that supports the FORTRAN IV language.

Software
There is a wealth of languages, utilities, and application software packages for PDP-11 s and the selection continues
to grow. The PDP-11 Software Source Book contains listings of more than 12,000 application packages. Spanning
a wide range of application areas, these programs are available from Digital and from commercial developers who
specialize in writing program packages for PDP-11 operating ~ystems.
Software available from Digital is reviewed in the section that follows. All PDP-11 operating systems and
programming languages are described. Product descriptions of Digital software packages are presented, including
packages for data management, word proceSSing, graphics, and applications development.

Software

7 -3

Software
Software Selection Chart
Operating System Software
Product

Description

Page

CTS-300

Extension of RT-11 for business applications

7-11

DSM-11

Multiuser timesharing for fast-access large-database applications on all PDP-11 s

7-13

RSTSIE

General-purpose multiuser interactive timesharing for all PDP-1 .1 s

7-14

RSX-11M

Small-to-moderate size realtime multiprogramming system

7-15

RSX-11 M-PLUS

Superset of RSX-11 M for larger memories, more advanced processors

7-16

RSX-11S

Memory-resident execute-only downline-Ioadable subset of RSX-11 M

7-16

RT-11

Small, single-user foreground/background system for realtime applications

7-10

UNIX

General-purpose multiuser interactive timesharing

7-12

MicrolRSX

Enhanced RSX-11 M-PLUS subset, general purpose realtime, multiuser
system for MICRO/PDP-11 s

7-17

Programing Languages
PDP-11 BASIC-PLUS-2

Block-structured interactive compiler for most DP applications

7-20

BASIC-11/RT-11

Interactive compiler for RT-11 systems

7-20

COBOL-81

Interactive compiler for business systems programming

7-21

CORAL-66

Block-structured language for realtime and process-control applications

7-21

DIBOL

Commercial applications language plus data entry screen formatting utility

7-21

FORTRAN IV

Compiled language for scientific applications, small memory environments

7-20

PDP-11 FORTRAN-77

Compiled language for file proceSSing, SCientific/engineering applications

7-20

PASCAL

Block-structured language for scientific/engineering applications

7-21

7 -4

Software

Software
Data Management Packages
DATATRIEVE-11

Interactive database query/report writing system for non-computer professionals

7-23

FM5-11

Digital's standard Forms Management application development package

7-23

QUILL

Query/sorting/report generation system for non-computer professionals

7-23

SORT-11

All-purpose data file sorting utility

7-23

Word Processing
DECtype

Word-processing for CTS-300

7-24

DECword/DP

Word-processing for RSTS/E timesharing users

7-24

Graphics Packages
BCP

Interactive package for printing bar codes and block letters on the LXY11 /LXY22
Graphics Lineprinters

7-25

DECgraph

Interactive business graphics package for RSTS/E

7-25

PLXY-11

Graphics application development package for LXY11 /LXY22 Graphics Lineprinters

7-24

RGL

Graphics package for RT-11 and RSX-11 M

7-25

VIGL

Graphics subroutine for VS 11

7-25

Applications Development Packages
ADE

Tool for non-programmmers to develop simple business applications

7-26

MENU-11

Package for creating customized menu-driven interfaces to RSTS/E systems

7-26

MicroPower/Pascal

Modular operating system for developing realtime microcomputer applications

7-17

Professional Tool Kit

Package for developing Professional 300 Personal Computer applications

7-26

PROVUE

Display control system for process monitoring

7-26

RTEM

RT emulator for RSX

7-26

Software

7-5

PDP-ll Operating Systems

An operating system is a collection of programs that manages a computer's hardware and software resources to
provide efficient computer operation. The operating system organizes the central processor and its peripherals into
useful tools for applications. Operating systems coordinate the execution of programs on the computer. They can
also have a set of utilities and routines which manage resources such as printers and terminals, detect errors in
programs, maintain user accounts, protect information, warn the operator of failures--and much more.
In general, an operating system is designed with a particular group of users in mind. Each operating system,
therefore, acquires a unique set of characteristics reflecting the needs of such users. The basic distinction among
PDP-11 operating systems is the processing method each system uses to execute tasks. The selection of an
operating system(s) will reflect the following processing options:
• Single-user vs. multiuser
• Single-job vs. foreground/background
• Foreground/background vs. multiprogramming
• Timesharing vs. event-driven multiprogramming

A single-user operating system receives demands upon its resources from a single user at a time. It has only to
manage the resources based on these demands. As a result, single-user systems do not require account numbers
to access the system or data files. Nor do these systems usually provide protection for user programs. RT-11 is a
single-user operating system.

7 -6

Software

PDP-ll Operating Systems
A multiuser operating system receives demands for its resources from more than one individual and/or program. The
system must manage its resources based on these demands. For example, several users may want sole control of a
device at the same time. The system handles access to the device. In addition, because people may be using the
system for different purposes, privacy must be an option. As a result, a multiuser system normally has an account
system to manage different users' files. The RSTS/E, RSX-11 M, and RSX-11 M-PLUS systems are all multiuser
systems.
The RT-11 operating system can operate in two modes: as a single-job system or as a foreground/background
system. As a single-job system, one job at a time is executed in memory. As a foreground/background system,
memory for user programs is divided into two separate regions. Two independent programs can reside in memory,
one in the foreground region and one in the background region. The foreground region is occupied by a program
requiring fast response to its demands and priority on all resources while it is proceSSing. The foreground program
executes until it relinquishes control to the background program. The background region is available for a low-priority
program. The background program is allowed to execute until the foreground program again requires control. Thus,
two programs effectively share the resources of the system.
The basis of foreground/background processing is the sharing of a system's resources between two tasks. An
extension of foreground/background and multiuser processing is multiprogramming. In multiprogrammed processing,
many jobs compete for the system's resources. The RSX-11 family of operating systems employs multiprogrammed
proceSSing based on a priority-ordered queue of programs demanding system resources. Memory is divided into
several regions called partitions. All tasks loaded in the partitions can execute in parallel. Program execution, as in
the RT-11 foreground/background system, is event-driven. A task retains control of the CPU until it is interrupted by
a higher priority task or becomes unable to continue (for example, waiting for I/O or another resource). This family
now includes MICRO/RSX, designed for use on the MICRO/PDP-11 .
The RSTS/E and DSM systems also perform concurrent execution of many independent jobs. RSTS/E and DSM,
however, process jobs on a timesharing rather than an event-driven basis. Timesharing is another type of
multiprogramming. In a timesharing environment, each task is guaranteed a certain amount of CPU time. Jobs
receive time one after another in a round-robin fashion. The system manages timesharing proceSSing to obtain the
best overall response, depending generally on whether jobs are compute-intense or I/O intense. This type of
proceSSing is particularly suited for an interactive processing environment.
Operating systems vary greatly in the kinds of hardware with which they are compatible, the range of complexity of
tasks they handle, the degree of adaptability to special user purposes, and the programming languages which they
support. PDP-11 computers run under a variety of operating systems. However, some applications run under only
one operating system. Such applications require modification to run on other operating systems. Thus, it is important
to consider what operating system(s) are required to use the desired applications.
The operating systems that run on PDP-11 s offer various combinations of these proceSSing environments. These
systems are described in the following section.

Software

7 -7

Ordering Information
Operating Systems Selection Chart
Selection
Criteria

DS~11

Micro
Power/
Pascal

RSTSIE

RSX-11M

RSX-11 ~PlUS

RSX-11S

STD

STD
STD

STD

STO

STD
STD

STO
STO

STO

STO
STO
STD

STO
STD
STO
STO
STO

RT-11

UNIX

MicrolRSX

User Interface
DCl
MCR
CCl
User-wriHen

STD

STD
STO

Text Editors
KeyPad
Line

STO
STO

STO

Batch Processing

STD

STO
STO

File Management
Multi-key ISAM
Single-key ISAM
Sequential
Relative
Random

STO
STO
STD
STO
STD

STD
STD
STD
STO
STD

STO
STO
STO
STO
STO

STD

Programming languages
BASIC

OPT

BASIC-PlUS

STO

BASIC-PlU5-2

OPT

OPT
STO

C
COBOl-81

OPT

CORAL 66

OPT

DIBOl-11/DECFORM

OPT

FORTRAN IV

OPT

FORTRAN 77

OPT

STD

STO

MACRQ-11
Assembler

STO

MUMPS

STO

PASCAL

7 -8

OPT

Software

STO

OPT

OPT
STO
STO

RT-11 Operating System
The RT-11 operating system is a disk-based, single-user, realtime operating system designed for interactive
program development of online applications on UNIBUS- and Q-bus-based systems. Although it is a single-user
system, RT-11 supports both single job (SJ) and foreground/background (FB) modes of processing, as well as a
number of system jobs. In addition to a variety of system and program utilities, RT-11 supports a number of highlevel language processors including BASIC-11 and FORTRAN IV.
The emphasis in RT-11 is on efficient use of system resources, minimizing system requirements in the CPU and on
the mass storage devices, while maximizing system throughput. The RT-11 operating system offers the following
configurations:
SJ Monitor-Enables one job at a time to execute in memory. As distributed, SJ resides in approximately 6 KB of
memory and requires minimal overhead.

FB Monitor-operates a foreground job and a background job. The realtime job is accomplished in the foreground,
which generally has priority on system resources. Functions that do not have critical response time requirements,
such as program development, are accomplished in the background, which operates whenever the foreground job
cannot run. Within their priorities, both foreground and background are fully functional RT-11 programs with access
to system capabilities. Although they operate independently, foreground and background can communicate through
disk files and/or the message transmission facility.
Extended Memory (XM) Monitor- Version of the FB monitor for supporting systems with more than 64 KB of
memory. The XM monitor is distributed, therefore, system generation is not required. This feature is accessible
through those optional, high-level language processors that can automatically produce programs above 64 KB.
Some of the features of the RT-11 operating system include the following.

Flexible Realtime 110
Three modes of I/O operation are provided to satisfy a variety of input and output requirements. Synchronous I/O
suspends user program processing until the completion of an lID event. With asynchronous I/O, user program
processing continues until a user-defined point is reaChed. Processing is then suspended until the lID event is
completed. Event-driven I/O allows user program processing to continue until the I/O event completes. Processing
is then interrupted to service the completed I/O event.

Indirect Command Files and Batch Processing
The indirect command file featured under RT-11 further simplifies user-system interaction. Users can construct
indirect command files that contain strings of commonly issued keyboard monitor commands. By executing the
indirect file, users can invoke the stream of commands. RT-11 also includes a batch facility for processing jobs at a
later time without user intervention.

Programming Tools
Program development tools offered within RT-11 include a choice of three text editors, file and device maintenance
utilities, an online debugger, and a number of patch utilities. With DECnet-RT, Digital's advanced networking
software, RT-11 systems can be linked with other Digital operating systems for network operation.

Software

7-9

CTS-300 Operating System
CTS-300 is a disk-based, single-user or multiuser software system that was designed to support commercial
applications on smaller POP-11 s. CTS-300 applications are written in OISOL, Digital's business-oriented high-level
language. The system consists of the RT-11 operating system, a choice of three runtime systems, Single-User
OISOL (SUD), Time-Shared OISOL (TSO), Extended Memory TSO, and a number of utilities. Depending on the
applications, program development can be done in a timesharing environment that supports a number of users or
jobs simultaneously.
Some of the capabilities provided on CTS-300 are described below.

Run-Time Systems (RTS)
Single-user OISOL allows one OISOL user or job to be run on a system. It is deSigned for an entry-level system
running in 32 KS of memory. SUD runs on all RT-11 monitors (SJ, FS, XM).
Time-Shared OISOL allows one or two users or two to four jobs to run Simultaneously. It is designed for a mediumsized system running in 56 KS of memory. File-sharing facilities at the record level permit users to share and update
the same data files. TSO is an executive that is normally run on the SJ monitor generated for multiterminal support.
Extended memory TSO allows up to 12 OISOL users or up to 16 OISOL jobs to run simultaneously (up to 12 can be
attached to terminals with the rest running in a detached environment). XMTSO is deSigned for larger systems
running in 128 KS to 248 KS of memory. Using the XM monitor, XMTSO has the same features and capabilities
found in TSO. In addition, XMTSO offers multiuser program development.
The CTS-300 programming editor, OKEO, lets the user create and modify OISOL programs online. Concurrent
program development and application execution provide excellent flexibility. XMTSO runs in either the background or
foreground. In the latter case, the background partition is aVailable for program development.

Command Language
CTS-300 is designed for interactive use with keyboard commands that are consistent in format and easy to
understand. The high-level command language simplifies transition from source code to execution code, and also
features indirect command files that permit the user to invoke a series of commands with a single command.

Data Management Services
Data Management Services (OMS) for CTS-300 provide capabilities for handling sequential, random, or indexed
sequential access method (ISAM) structured files. Multivolume file support permits one file, extending over several
disk drives, to be processed sequentially or by keyed access, without requiring special programming.

7 -1 0

Software

V7M-ll UNIX Operating System
V7M-11 UNIX is an enhanced, supported native UNIX based on AT&T's Standard Version 7 UNIX Timesharing
System, Seventh Edition. It is a general purpose, interactive, time-sharing operating system that optimizes the
programmer's skill rather than the instruction set of a machine. All of the features found in Version 7 UNIX are found
in V7M-11. These include a hierarchical file system with demountable volumes, compatible file, device and
interprocess 110, asynchronous processes, a system command language selectable on a per-user basis, C
compiler, and FORTRAN 77.
V7M-11 UNIX also has incorporated Version 3.7 of the VI full screen editor from Berkeley UNIX, and a modified
version of the Berkeley User Overlay Scheme for large programs. Other enhancements include:
• Disk bad block replacement
• Fully automatic system generation
• System management commands
• Overlay kernel for use on CPUs without separate I and D space
• Crash dump analyzer

V7M-11 UNIX Operating System Ordering Information

90 Day Warranty

Media and Documentation
Floppies
RL02 Media
Magnetic Tape
(1600 BIN)

Maximum 6 Users
(MICRO/PDP-ll Only)
QJ085-DZ

Maximum 9 Users Maximum 16 Users

Maximum 32 Users
QJ088-DZ

QJ086-DZ

QJ087·DZ

QJ086-AH

QJ087·AH

QJ086-AM

QJ087·AM

QJ088·AM

QJ085-A3

Documentation Set Only

QJ085·GZ

QJ086·GZ

QJ087-GZ

QJ088-GZ

Software Product Description
(SPD) Number

16.51.xx

Software

7-11

DSM-ll Operating System
The DSM-11 operating system is a multiuser data management system that consists of an interactive high-level
programming language, Digital Standard MUMPS (Massachusetts General Hospital Multiprogramming System); a
data management facility; and a timesharing executive.
Many users can access DSM-11 Simultaneously and be relatively unaffected by the activities of other users.
Because DSM-11 is an online program development and data storage and retrieval system, a programmer can
rapidly write, test, debug, or modify a program and have a working application quickly established.
Digital Standard MUMPS, an extension of the American National Standard specification, is a high-level language
oriented towards solving database problems. It can be used by programmers with relatively little programming
experience. Implementation of the Digital Standard MUMPS language as an interpreter facilitates program development by eliminating the need to load editors, assemblers, and linkers.
The language's text-handling capabilities allow the inspection of any data item for content or for format. These
capabilities are useful for online data entry checking and correction. Other text-handling capabilities include the
ability to concatenate text strings and to segment text.
The DSM-11 hierarchical file structure allows users to design data file strategies to suit the needs of a particular
processing environment. Dynamic file storage with variable length string subscripts allows for easy modification or
expansion of the database.
Due to streamlined system installation and generation procedures, the DSM-11 system can be quickly adapted to
any supported hardware configuration.
Other features of the DSM-11 operating system are:
• High-performance database handler using memory-resident cache of disk data for data sharing among users.
• Distributed database management implemented using DMC11 IDMR11 high-speed data links.
• Online, high-speed database backup, disk media preparation and bad-block management, and tape-to-tape
copying.
• Automatic powerfail-restart capability.
• Hardware device error reporting, system patching utility, and executive debugger for system maintenance.

7 -1 2

Software

RSTSjE Operating System
The RSTS/E operating system is a multiuser, timesharing, and resource-sharing general purpose system. Its
capabilities include batch processing, program development, and multiterminal applications. RSTS/E allows concurrent word processing and data processing and provides a highly productive and secure environment. As a
timesharing system, RSTS/E provides excellent response time to users, who can number up to 1 27 at one time, and
to jobs, which can number up to 63 at one time.
These additional features are offered on RSTS/E operating systems.

Dynamic Allocation of System Resources
RSTS/E schedules CPU time and memory residency among jobs based upon their priority and processing
requirements. A round-robin scheduling method is used to select jobs from those with equal priority. Systems with
memory management can allocate enough address space for a job to run and can swap jobs out to disk storage
when memory is needed for another job. A job's size can be expanded dynamically subject to the limits imposed b¥
the system manager or another privileged user.

Privilege Capabilities and System Operation
RSTS/E gives each user access to all system resources and peripherals unless otherwise restricted by the system
manager or another privileged user. A privileged user has full access and control over system operations, including
starting up and shutting down the system, adding or deleting user accounts, and designating certain programs as
privileged.

Batch Processing
Users can submit batch jobs to perform tasks that require no terminal interaction or to run programs at a later time.
The user can specify the amount of CPU time for each batch job submitted and can specify termination conditions
by requesting error-level checking.

File System
The RSTS/E file system provides a variety of online capabilities. Files can be accessed randomly or sequentially,
can be created, updated, extended, or deleted, and can be sorted by the SORT-11 program. File access can be
limited on an individual, group, or system basis. Total or selective file backup and restoration can be done online.
RMS-11 is the main file and record access method available on RSTS/E. It supports sequential, relative, and
indexed file organizations. With the indexed file organization each indexed file can have one primary key and up to
254 alternate keys. Indexed files are restricted to either a fixed or a variable record format.
RSTS/E disk volumes, when used as file-structured devices, can be either public or private. A public volume is the
system disk or any volume-initialized public disk. All other volumes are deSignated private and can be used to limit
user access and ensure greater system security.
RSTS/E can minimize accesses to disk for frequently used data by keeping data in a software-maintained cache, a
specially deSignated area in system memory. The data retained in this cache can be restricted to disk directory
blocks or can include data from disk files.

User Interface
User commands are handled and interpreted by one of the runtime systems that acts as a command interface. The
four standard command monitors are BASIC-PLUS, a single-language system; RSX, which provides MCR, the
Monitor Console Routine; RT-11, providing RT-11 system commands; and the Digital Command language, DCL. All
of these interfaces interpret sets of system commands that enable the user to log on and off the system, manipulate
files, develop and test programs, and obtain system information.
The Concise Command Language (CCl) feature allows each installation's system manager to define additional
commands to run system utilities and user programs.

Programming Tools
Program development is facilitated by a selection of system utilities and text editors, and can be done on the BASICPLUS, RSX, or RT-11 runtime systems. These environments provide an assembler, a linker or taskbuilder, and a
librarian utility. The MACRO-11 Assembly Language provides full MACRO programming capabilities, including
MACRO libraries, conditional assembly directives, and pseudo-operations. RSTS/E uses resident libraries for
sharing of code that is common to more than one job.

Software

7 -13

RSX-ll M Operating System
The RSX-11 M operating system is a multiuser, multiprogramming, realtime operating system designed for a variety
of applications, including communications.
The event-driven and priority-structured scheduling mechanism allows the concurrent processing of realtime
activities and less-time-crtical tasks. The system has 250 software priority levels so a user can create, compile/
assemble, debug, and install tasks without affecting realtime task response. When a high priority event occurs, tasks
with lower priority are swapped out of memory so that higher priority tasks can be executed immediately.
RSX-11 M is not only designed for a variety of applications, but also for many users. The account structure,
maintained by the system manager, provides system users with their own unique User Identification Code (UIC),
password, directory for files, and a set of privileges for access to system commands and resources. Thus, both
experienced and new users are able to execute all necessary tasks without jeopardizing other's work on the
system.
RSX-11 M also contains a number of features that let the user generate a working system easily and rapidly. The
Autoconfigure task automatically determines the correct hardware configuration (including the processor type, the
CSR and vector addressses of the peripheral hardware devices, and any optional hardware present) for the system
on which SYSGEN is running. The Standard Function System option produces a mapped RSX-11 M operating
system with the maximum number of software options, including support for layered products, thus eliminating the
need for responding to a long list of questions.
The following briefly summarize other features offered on RSX-11 M.

Choice of Command Interface
All systems offer the traditional Monitor Console Routine (MCR) interface as well as the user-oriented, English-like
Digital Command Language (OCL). Users also have the option to write their own Command Line Interpretors (CUs)
to suit their specific application.

Indirect Command Processor
An indirect command file created by a terminal user, contains system commands that will be executed automatically
by the system without further user intervention. Indirect command files save the user time and keystrokes by
invoking repetitive or frequently used command procedures and system operations.

Programming Tools
Tasks can be written in MACRO-11 assembly language ahd in the following optional languages: FORTRAN-??,
FORTRAN IV, COBOL-81, BASIC-PLUS-2, DIBOL, PASCAL, and CORAL 66. Sharable system libraries and usercreated libraries are supported for easy access to commonly used system routines. To assist in program
development, RSX-11 M includes both the EDlline-oriented and EDT character-oriented text editors, utilities, symbol
cross-reference program, interactive debugger, and task memory dump facilities.

Data Management
The RSX-11 M file system provides automatic space allocation and file structures for all data on block-structured
devices. Features include file protection, volume protection, and logical device aSSignments. Multiheader file
support enables file size to be limited only by the capacity of the volume on which it resides.
The Record Management System (RMS) allows relative, sequential, and multikey indexed file organizations and
random, sequential, and record address access mode.

Memory Management
The RSX-11 M executive can dynamically allocate available memory in system-controlled partitions. Effectively, this
allows a task to be loaded anywhere in memory where there is room. When a task terminates, the space then
becomes available for another task. Memory management provides the most efficient use of system memory and,
therefore, faster task execution.

7-14

Software

RSX-ll M-PLUS Operating System
RSX-11 M-PLUS is a high- performance superset of the RSX-11 M operating system, designed to take advantage of
the expanded addressing capability of today's larger- memory PDP-11 processors. RSX-11 M-PLUS maintains the
superior reliability and successful architecture of RSX-11 M to ensure compatibility and ease of transition between
systems. This realtime, multiprogramming, multiuser operating system offers the'same features as RSX-11 M (see
previous description) Plus the additional system capabilities described below.

User Mode 110 Space
RSX-11 M-PLUS supports separate instruction and data space. This means that a user task has the ability to address
up to 64 KB of instr'uction and 64 KB of data simultaneously, giving a 128 KB total. I/O space simplifies the
development and enhances performance of large application programs by reducing the need for program overlays.

Multistream Batch Processing
A powerful batch processing facility is provided on RSX-11 M-PLUS in addition to the indirect command file
processing capability. Batch processing is a means of automatically passing commands and data for processing by
means of a virtual terminal. Batch-specific commands, MCR and DCL commands, and data are placed in a file and
submitted to the system for execution at a deSignated time (usually at night when there are fewer demands on the
system). Batch jobs do not require the physical presence of a user nor do they require a phYSical terminal to run.
Batch processing uses a virtual terminal that emulates a complete interactive terminal session from logging on to
logging off.

Accounting
For accounting purposes, the RSX-11 M-PLUS system itself creates and maintains records on the use of system
resources. These records are kept in an accounting log file. Accounting information is provided on users, the
system, and every task running in the system. The system manager can use these accounting logs to establish
programs for reporting on the use of system resources and for billing. Accounting also provides extensive
performance information on mass storage devices.

RSX-ll S Operating System
The RSX-11 S operating system is a memory-based subset of the RSX-11 M operating system. It provides a runtime
environment for execution of tasks on a memory-based processor. Memory-reSident application programs require
the support of a disk-based host system like RSX-11 M, RSX-11 M-PLUS, or VAXNMS for program development.
RSX-11 S has most of the RSX-11 M features and generation capability, and supports all of the peripheral devices
that are supported under RSX-11 M.
RSX-11 S includes:
• Monitor Console Routine
• Online Task Loader
• System Image Preservation Program
• File Control Services for record devices

Software

7 -1 5

MICRO/R5X Operating System
MICRO/RSX is an extended subset of the multiuser, multi-task RSX-11 M-PLUS operating system packaged on an
RX50 mini-floppy disk. Although primarily designed for use with the MICRO/PDP-11 , it also provides an ideal entry
level multiuser development system for the PRO 300 series of personal computers. The newest member of the
RSX-11 family, MICRO/RSX is a customer installed, easy-to-use system that can support up to ten users in both
rea/time and timesharing environments.
MICRO/RSX is divided into two separate packages. The Base Kit provides the full RSX-11-PLUS Executive,
appropriate utilities and device drivers, support for user mode program development in high level languages, and a
user documentation kit. The Advanced Programmer's Kit is an add-on to the base package and includes the
software and documentation necessary for MACRO privileged mode program development. This includes a MACRO
Assembler, a Librarian, and system libraries specifically designed for privileged mode programming.

MicroPower/Pascal Oper~ting System
MicroPower/Pascal is a modular operating system and software development package for microcomputer applications. It includes a high-performance optimizing Pascal compiler, a subset of the RT-11 operating system, and all the
tools you need to create, build, test,and debug concurrent realtime application programs. The user can create these
applications on a PDP-11 host system for execution on a different target microcomputer, which can be any Digital Qbus or Extended Q-bus processor from the FALCON SBC-11 121 to the PDP-11 123-PLUS. Each application is
constructed especially for its target system, with the exact set of operating system services needed.
MicroPower/Pascal is particularly suited for such dedicated, realtime microcomputer applications as process
control, instrumentation, and robotics. An optimizing compiler produces fast, compact object code compatible with
any Digital microcomputer. Micropower/Pascal includes the following features.

Two- Processor Development Environment
MicroPower/Pascal uses a two- processor development environment: a host PDP-11 running the RT-11 extended
memory (XM) operating system, where the Pascal compiler and development utilities reside and execute, and a
target Q-bus PDP-11 , where the application program resides and executes. This provides the most effective work
environment for developing target-system programs. A user can transport the final application program to the target
microcomputer by one of three methods: writing it into read-only memory (ROM), down-line loading it over a serial
line, or recording it on a floppy disk or tape cartridge to be bootstrapped on the target system.

Concurrent Execution Capability
Concurrent execution means the Pascal source code is structured into independent parts called processes, which
appear to execute simultaneously. Each process cooperates with all other processes in manipulating such shared
resources as memory and peripheral devices.

Customized System Routines
A modular runtime system software package that includes a library of executive service modules (modular operating
system) is one of the major components of MicroPower/Pascal. By selecting only the appropriate components of the
MicroPower/Pascal Runtime System software, and merging it with suitable user-written software, users can create a
highly streamlined software package for their applications. This application software can run stand-alone on the
target runtime system; no other operating system is needed. MicroPower/Pascal automatically selects those
operating system services the application requires from a library in the PDP-11 host computer and places them in a
executive module. By including only required system services, the module and the application it supports make the
most efficient use of the target runtime system hardware. Furthermore, the modular runtime system is rommable,
which eliminates the need for mass storage in the target system.

Note: For ordering information, consult the SPD for MicroPower/Pascal (19.12.xx).

7 -16

Software

Ordering Information
PDP-11 Operating System Ordering Information
CT5-300

DSM-11

Mi'iI0P~erl
asca

RSTSIE

RSX-11M

RSX-1!M
-PLU

RSX-11S

RT-11

Support

QJ3S4-AZ

QJ821-AZ

QJ029-AZ

QR430-AZ

QJ628-AZ

QRSOO-AZ

QJ628-AZ

QJ013-AZ

training
redits

None

4TC

None

3TC

None

Disk

QJ3S4-HH

QJ821-HH

QJ029-HH

QR430-HH

QJ738-HH

QRS03-HH

QJ642-HH

Tape

N/A

QJ821-HM

N/A

QR430-HM

QJ676-HM

QRSOO-HM

QJ642-HM

OY800-H3
QJ013-HH QY801-H3
(RXSO)
N/A

QJ3S4-GZ

QJ821-GZ

QJ029-GZ

QR430-GZ

QJ628-GZ

QRSOO-GZ

QJ642-GZ

QJ013-GZ QY800-GZ

~iaand

Doc Only

MicrolRSX

None

QY801-GZ
SPD
Number

12.9.xx

12.18.xx

19.12.xx

13.1.xx

14.3S.xx

14.70.xx

9.21.xx

12.1.xx

14.28.xx

PDP-11 Operating System General License
The PDP-11 Operating System General License is a package of license-only (DZ) options for seven PDP-11
Operating Systems. RT-11 , CTS-300, RSX-11 S, RSX-11 M, RSX-11 M-PLUS, RSTS/E, and DSM-11 . MicroPowerl
Pascal and UNIX are not included. This license is a 'right to copy' license and a customer must purchase (or have
previously purchased) a supported license for the operating system that is desired for copy and use.
Because it is a package, the customer has the right to copy all or any part of the package. For example: customers
could choose to copy only RSTS/E if all they wanted to run was RSTS/E; or if they were using both RSTS/E and
RSX-11 M PLUS, they could copy both. The general license package gives the customer the right to copy those
operating systems and install them on only one additional CPU, just the same as all other license-only options.
Refer to the Operating System Software Product Descriptions (SPDs) to determine the suitability of the systems in
this section for your intended application. In particular, compliance with the stated hardware requirements in the
SPD is a prerequisite for Installation and Warranty Period Services.

TRANSFERRING SOFTWARE TO MICRO/PDP-11
The removable media on a basic MICRO/PDP-11 system is the RX50 diskette. If there is a requirement to transfer
software between another PDP--11 (or VAX) and the MICRO/PDP-11 - as, for example, in transporting applications from the host to the target system - one of the optional mass storage devices must be present on both
systems.
It is expected that the majority of application developers, such as OEM's and DP departments of large
organizations, will retain an in-house MICRO/PDP-11 to check out their application and support the target
systems. In such cases, the in-house MICRP/PDP-11 is the only one that need have common media with the host
development system. Transfer of the application from the in-house MICRO/PDP-11 to the target system could
then be effected via RX50 diskettes.

Software

7 -1 7

languages and Applications

Additional Software for Digital Operating Systems
Most operating systems need additional software, such as programming languages and applications packages, to
perform more specialized tasks than the operating system can perform alone. PDP-11 programming languages and
applications are well-suited to the needs of industry, science, academia, and business. There is a wide range of
languages and applications available on PDP-11 operating systems to meet all programming needs--from system
software development to general purpose application program development. When choosing a language or
application package, various criteria can be evaluated based on individual needs and constraints. Among. these
criteria are relative performance, ease-of-use, price, portability, complexity, as well as specific functionality.
Some PDP-11 application packages are designed to give users with little computer familiarity the tools to perform
specific tasks. The DECword/DP word processing package and the DATATRIEVE-11 query and report system are
examples of such specialized packages. Other application products are designed for profeSSional programmers to
create new software for a much wider range of tasks. The programming languages and packages such as FMS-11
and the Professional Host Tool Kit fall into this category.
Programming languages have typically developed in response to specific functional needs. Some languages, such
as FORTRAN were originally intended for processing enormous amounts of numerical data through complicated
formulas at high speeds. Others, such as COBOL, were developed for commercial applications in which data
management played a major role. And still others, like Bi\SIC, were invented for used by students who were
unfamiliar with computers and needed a simple, easy-to-Iea.:n language related to everyday speech. While some of
these distinctions have become blurred over time, it is still true that certain kinds of problems are best approached
through specific languages. The descriptions in this section attempt to show the speCial strengths of each Digitalsupplied language in satisfying specific application needs.
With an appropriate selection of languages and applications packages, the PDP-11 system can satisfy the computer
needs of users of multiple levels of expertise and function.
7 -1 8

Software

Programming languages
PDp·ll BASIC·PLUS·2
PDP-11 BASIC-PLUS-2 is a high-level software implementation language derived from the original Dartmouth
BASIC. Like the original, BASIC-PLUS-2 is a highly approachable language, with an interactive user interface, online
help text, and simple English-like language elements. Unlike many other BASICs, though, BASIC-PLUS-2 is a
compiled language with modern block-structured programming constructs, sophisticated file access methods, and a
host of program development tools aimed at increasing programmer productivity. This combination makes BASICPLUS-2 practical for a wide range of uses, from developing data processing applications to training new programmers. Also, since BASIC-PLUS-2 is a close subset of VAX-11 BASIC. the two languages can be used together
in projects with a mix of PDP-11 and VAX systems.
BASIC-PLUS-2 provides sequential, relative, indexed, and record file address (RFA) file access via the RMS Record
Management System. Other features include a RUN command that allows immediate compilation and execution of
the program currently in memory; a LOAD command that places previously compiled BASIC-PLUS-2 modules in
memory for use by RUN; immediate-mode program debugging statements; the ability to omit line numbers and use
mnemonic statement labels; and 31-character variable and constant names.

BASIC·l1/RT·ll
BASIC-11/RT-11 is a conversational programming language that uses simple English-like statements and familiar
mathematical notations to perform operations. It provides an interactive programming environment specially adapted
for the RT-11 operating system.
BASIC-11/RT-11 is an incremental interpretive compiler with the following features: support for real, single- and
double-precision, integer, and string data types; immediate-mode statements for debugging and desk calculator
usage; sequential data storage using the RT-11 file system; string manipulation capabilities, including string arrays
and functions; disk virtual arrays for string, integer, and real data types; chaining with COMMON to accommodate
large programs; a CALL facility for invoking assembly language subroutines; and formatted output using the PRINT
USING statement.

PDp·ll FORTRAN· 77
PDP-11 FORTRAN-?? is much more than just a scientific and engineering language. It combines the efficient
numerical computation for which FORTRAN is known with provisions for keyed and sequential access to RMS
multikey ISAM files. This makes FORTRAN-?? ideal for writing programs that must manipulate and perform
calculations on masses of data, as in accounting or statistical packages.
FORTRAN-?? is built on the ANSI subset FORTRAN-?? X3.9-19?8 standard, with the following extensions: TYPE
and ACCEPT input/output statements; the BYTE data type; hexadecimal and octal constants; virtual memory arrays
(on systems equipped with memory management); and language elements to perform RMS multikey ISAM. To use
RMS-style elements, FORTRAN-?? programs make use of the RMS Object Time System (OTS); a File Control
Services OTS is also available. The compiler produces direct PDP-11 machine code optimized for execution-time
efficiency, especially when executed on systems equipped with a floating pOint processor.

FORTRAN IV
FORTRAN IV is an extended superset of the ANSI X3. 9-1 966 standard for this scientific and engineering
programming language. Its high-speed, one-pass optimizing compiler works very efficiently in small-memory
environments, making FORTRAN program development possible on smaller PDP-11 systems. Because it can
produce absolute binary code suitable for stand-alone PDP-11 systems or for loading into ROM or PROM memory,
Digital's FORTRAN IV is especially useful for such industrial applications as control programs for automated
equipment.
Other features of FORTRAN IV include the ability to use general expressions in all meaningful contexts; mixed-mode
arithmetic; the BYTE data type for character manipulation; commenting at the end of each source line; and listdirected input/output.

Software

7-1 9

Programming languages.
COBOl·81
The COBOL-81 language processor is an interactive high-performance compiler designed for PDP-11 business
systems programming where ANSI-74 standard COBOL features, compact code, and low memory usage are of
prime consideration. COBOL-81 shares a great deal of common syntax with VAX-11 COBOL. In most cases,
programs written in COBOL-81 can be compiled and executed using the VAX-11 COBOL compiler without sourcecode changes.
COBOL-81 runs on the full range of PDP-11 systems. It lets users begin with the smallest PDP-11 system and grow
to the largest VAX systems. The compiler takes full advantage of the PDP-11 's optional Commercial Instruction Set
(CIS) to generate even more efficient object code. The compiler's extensive library facilities and interactive Symbolic
Debugger help increase programmer productivity and enable the production of powerful application programs.

DIBOl·ll/0ECFORM
DIBOL-11, Digital's Business-Oriented Language, is a high-level language for commercial applications programming.
It is similar to COBOL in that it has a DATA DIVISION, a PROCEDURE DIVISION, and uses English-like procedural
statements (although more concise than those of COBOL). Unlike COBOL, DIBOL-11 is designed specifically for
I
creating interactive applications programs.
DECFORM, a powerful, easy-to-use data entry and file inquiry package, is included with DIBOL-11 for designing
screen formats for data entry. Using interactive video terminals, programmers can produce forms on the terminal
screen that closely resemble traditional printed forms. Thus· DIBOL-11 and DECFORM work together to help
programmers who are designing applications in data entry and retrieval (such as accounting).
Both DIBOL-11 and DECFORM have their own interactive debugging utilities to speed program development.
DIBOL-11 performs data manipulation, aritmetic expression evaluation, table subscripting, record redefinition,
external calls to other programs, and both sequential and random access to files. DECFORM features facilities for
defining data entry field protection, autoduplication, alphabetic or decimal checking, range checking, field totaling,
crossfield validation, and autoincrement of counters.

PDp·ll PASCAl/RSX
PDP-11 PASCAURSX is a high-level language for developing business, manufacturing, research, and education
programs. Its English-like commands, logical grammar, and block structure help developers produce programs that
have clear organization and linear flow.
PASCAURSX includes the features of the Level 0 ISO Specification for Computer Programming Language PASCAL
(Draft Proposal 7185), plus many powerful extensions to the basic PASCAL language. PDP-11 PASCAURSX runs
on all RSX-11 M and RSX-11 M-PLUS- based PDP-11 systems that have the Extended Instruction Set (EIS).
PASCAURSX has sequential or direct record access, plus fixed or variable-length records.

CORAl·66
CORAL-66 is the standard general purpose language prescribed by the British government for realtime and
process-control applications. A high-level block-structured language, it replaces assembly-level programming in
modern industrial and commercial applications. It is particularly useful for building software products that are
expected to be long-lived and that require flexibility and easy maintenance.
Features of CORAL-66 include BYTE, LONG (32-bit integer), and DOUBLE (64-bit floating-point) data types;
reentrant code at the procedure level; generation of code executable on any valid RSX-11 S operating system that
includes the Extended Instruction Set (EIS); conditional compilation; English-language error messages at compile
time and (optionally) at runtime; and a switchable option to select a target PDP-11 instruction set.

7 -20

Software

Ordering Information
Programming Languages Ordering Information
Product

Order Code (SPD Number)

PDP-11 BASIC-PLU5-2

BASIC-11/RT-11

RT-11

RSTS/E

RSX-11 MlM-PLUS

QJ916-AM,AH
QY916-AM,AH
(14.54.xx)

QJ918-AM,AH
QY918-AM,AH
(14.11.xx)

QJ913-AM,AH
(12.5.xx)

COBOL-81

QJ993-AM,AH
QY993-AM,AH
(13.16.xx)

QJ994-AM,AH
QY994-AM,AH
(14.26.xx)

CORAL-66

QP066-AM,AH
RSX-11 M only
(14.56.xx)

DIBOL-11

QP528-AM,AH
QY528-AM,AH
(14.8.xx)

QP540-AM,AH
QY540-AM,AH

QJ813-AM,AH
(12.10.xx)

QR435-AM,AH
(12.41.xx)

QP230-AM,AH
(14.63.xx)

PDP-11 FORTRAN-77

QR100-AM,AH
QY100-AM,AH
(14.49.xx)

QJ668-AM,AH
QY668-AM,AH
(14.31.xx)

PDP-11 PASCAURSX

QJ128-AM,AH
QY128-AM,AH
(14.18.xx)

FORTRAN IV

Note: Order codes beginning with the letters QY designate software for use on Q-bus systems.

Support Categories
PDP-11 BASIC-PLUS-2 and DIBOL-11 /DECFORM are Digital-SupportedlDigital -Installed products. CORAL-66 is
Customer-Supported. All other programming languages listed above are Digital-Supported/Customer-Installed.

Order Code Suffixes
The following sets of letters replace the "-XX" suffix in the above order codes to indicate the media on which the
product will be shipped plus any additional products or services included:
-AM

Single-use licence, binaries on 9-track magtape (1600 b/inJ, documentation, and support services

-AH

Single-use licence, binaries on RL02 disk cartridge, documentation, and support services

-AG

Single-use licence, binaries on TU58 DECtape II, documentation, and support services

-DZ

Single-use licence only; no binaries, no documentation, no support services

-GZ

Documentation-only kit

In general, products available for the RT-11 operating system can be ordered with the AH, AG, DZ, and GZ options.
Products available for the other operating systems can be ordered with the AM, AH, DZ, and GZ options. Exceptions
are noted where they occur.

For Further Information
Consult the Software Product Descriptions (SPDs) for additional information on ordering options, and support details
for each product.
Software

7 -21

Data Management Packages
FMS·ll
FMS-11 (Forms Management System) is used by application programmers to build interactive screen-oriented data
entry capabilities into their application programs. Used in conjunction with a standard programming language such as
FORTRAN, COBOL-81, or BASIC-PLUS-2, FMS-11 can be used for any data entry application in which paper forms
were traditionally used--inventory, payroll, bookkeeping, and patient admittance, for example. FMS-11 can aid
productivity at all levels: program designers are spared the complexities of creating custom terminal interfaces to
use special features of the VT100; program developers can debug and correct forms quickly with FMS-11 's own
forms-debugging and editing utilities; and the application's end-user gets an intelligent data-entry system that
minimizes keystrokes and catches most common typing errors.
Components of the FMS-11 package are: the Form Editor for layout and modification of video forms on a VT100
screen; the Video Keypad Editor for general purpose text editing of standard ASCII files; the Form Utility for
manipulation of FMS forms descriptions during debugging; the Form Driver for performing screen proceSSing at
application runtime; and, on RT-11, the Application Run-Time Supervisor for running application programs independently of programs running on other system terminals.

DATATRIEVE·ll
DATATRIEVE-11 is an interactive query, report-writing, and data maintenance system designed to put easy access
to system databases in the hands of noncomputer professionals. It is loaded with online prompting, help, and tutorial
features that help computer novices "do it themselves," relieving DP staff from long schedules of small projects.
DATATRIEVE-11 is especially useful for users who make frequent and constantly-changing requests for data. from a
large, established database, such as business analysts and middle-level management. It can also be used to build
and maintain small personal databases.
DATATRIEVE-11 uses the RMS-11 Record Management System to access data records in sequential, relative, or
indexed files. Users can specify selective data retrieval, sorting, formatting, updating, and generation of printed
reports. Frequently used sequences of commands can be stored in a data dictionary for later use and for sharing
among other users. An Application DeSign Tool (ADT) interactively steps novice users through the process of
creating domain and record definitions.

SORT·ll
SORT-11 is an efficient all- purpose data sorting utility for files formatted by the RMS-11 Record Management
System. It is flexible enough to meet the wide range of sorting needs encountered in everyday system use, from
simple reordering of a mailing list by name or ZIP code to sorting massive data sets. It is especially useful for
programmers and system administrators in charge of accessing and maintaining RMS-11 databases.
SORT-11 can accept files containing binary, EBCDIC, or ASCII data, in sequential, relative, or indexed-sequential file
formats. The user can select sorting by any key field, in either ascending or descending order, using any of four
sorting processes: Record Sort, which manipulates records in their entirety; Tag Sort, which produces a reordered
file by manipulating only the key position of each record; Address Routing Sort, which produces one file for the data
and multiple address files that are used to access the data in the desired sequences; and Index Sort, which
produces a separate index file that contains for each record its SORT key field and a pointer to the record's location
in the data file.

QUILL
QUILL is an easy-to-use layered software package deSigned to run on the CTS-300 operating system. With simple
English-like commands, users can take advantage of its three output capabilities: terminal queries, report generation
on a printer or disk, and list documents on DECtype-300. QUILL's commands generate automatic output, in a format
that can be reused, against current, up-to-date data.
QUILL uses Dictionaries to describe data files. These Dictionaries support CTS-300 fixed length sequential and
ISAM file structures. Each physical field has a logical field name associated with it. The Dictionary structure also
supports password and field protection, multiple Dictionaries for a single data file, overlaid fields, Dictionary
identification from a relative Dictionary, and maintenance routines to create, modify, copy, delete, and print
Dictionaries. Arithmetic, relational, or boolean expressions can be used with names in the Dictionary to locate
records within a data file.
QUILL features ascending and descending sort of up to eight individual fields. Its default structure provides standard
output formats. Capabilities for customized formats are available.
Interactive and batch modes of operation can be called by a menu. A help facility that can be tailored is also
provided.

7-22

Software

Word Processing
DECWord/DP
DECword/DP gives fully featured word processing to RSTS/E users. It can be run from any VT100 terminal on a
RSTS/E system, and gives end-users the type of text-manipulation features usually associated with stand-alone
word processors. DECword/DP is suitable for RSTS/E users who need to prepare occasional memos and short
reports. For high-volume word processing, users' needs will be much better served by one of Digital's more
specialized product-such as the DECmate II personal computer.
DECword/DP provides such industry-standard features as menu-driven function selection, cut and paste, forward
and reverse scrolling, global search and replace, and automatic word wrap. It also offers a variety of advanced
features: automatic footnoting, spelling-error detection, list processing, and computer-aided instruction for using its
software.

DECtype
DECtype is a full-featured word processing package deSigned to run on the CTS-300 and VMS operating systems,
permitting concurrent word and data processing in a multiuser environment. DECtype provides industry-standard
features such as menu-driven operation, cut and paste, forward and reverse scrolling, search and replace, automatic
word wrap, subscripts, superscripts, headers and footers.
In addition, DECtype provides a basic four- function editor math utility, user-defined keys for predetermined
repetitive operations, and abbreviation and paragraph libraries, as well as the ability to cancel an editing session
without changing the document.
DECtype gives the user full control of printers. Users can remove documents from the print queue, change the print
priority of a document, view the list of documents in the queue and view the status of all defined printers.

Graphics Packages
PLXY·ll Graphics Package
PLXY-11 is a software package designed to provide RT-11, RSX-11 M, RSX-11 M-PLUS, and RSTS/E applications
programmers access to the plotting capabilities of Digital's LXY12/LXY22 graphics lineprinters. Using the PLXY-11
graphics subroutines, programmers can create software that prints out representations of data in graphs and charts
with clear alphanumeric labeling. This makes PLXY-11 useful for equipping scientific, engineering, statistical, and
econometric application programs with graphics.
To use PLXY-11, the programmer writes FORTRAN programs that call the appropriate subroutines in the PLXY-11
library. These subroutines convert the program's graphics requests into a series of vectors stored in an intermediate
file. This file is submitted to the PLXY-11 post-processing task, which converts its vector data into raster format
suitable to the LXY 12/LXY22 graphics lineprinters. The user then transfers this converted file to the printer/plotter
via a standard file-transfer utility such as PIP, where it is printed out by the system LP11 lineprinter driver.
(Note: PLXY-11 is shipped with the LXY11 and LXY21 lineprinter/plotters. To order, use the option numbers given
in the Printer/Plotter Ordering Information.)
-DZ

Single-use licence only; no binaries, no documentation, no support services

-GZ

Documentation-only kit

In general, products available for the RT-11 operating system can be ordered with the AH, DZ, and GZ options.
Products available for the other operating systems can be ordered with the AM, AH, DZ, 'and GZ options. Exceptions
are noted where they occur.

For Further Information
Consult the Software Product Descriptions (SPDs) for additional information on ordering options, and support details
for each product.

Software

7-23

Graphics Packages
DECgraph-ll
DECgraph-11 is an interactive business graphics application for the RSTS/E environment. Through the use of
illustrated menus, a non-technical user can easily input the data to be graphed, design the graph descroption, and
combine the data and description to create a graph file for displan on the terminal or printer. Because the data,
design, and graph files are maintained independently, it is possible to use modified or new data with a previously
designed graph, or to use the same data for a different type of graph.
DECgraph-11 uses the graphic capabilities of the VT1 25 and graphic mode printers. Graphic images can be
represented in black and white formats with the use of selected fill and line patterns.
Another feature of DECgraph-11 is a program interface, which allows it to be integrated with other applications. For
example, it could be integrated with DATATRIEVE-11 to provide graphics output for DATATRIEVE-11 applications.
The prerequisites are any valid RSTS/E system with 400 free blocks of disk space and 28 KW of dedicated main
memory; a VT125 video terminal with ROM version 102; an LA1 00, LA50, or LA12; and RMS support.

RGL
RGL (ReGIS Graphics Library) is a set of FORTRAN subroutines providing full data plotting and flexible picturedrawing capabilities for the VT125 video terminal. The RGL subroutines are callable from any RT-11 , RSX-11 M, or
VAX/VMS programming language (e.g., FORTRAN, BASIC, PASCAL) and support the ReGIS firmware included with
the VT125 terminal. Picture-drawing features of RGL include user-defined multiple subscreens, shading, line
patterns, writing modes, and picture objects such as boxes, arcs, circles, and regular polygons. RGL also provides a
method for storing and later recalling screen images. Data plotting capabilities allow the user to define verious types
of graph "papers": linear, logarithmic, polar, or probability. RGL provides numeric and alphanumeric labeling and
scaling of axes. The plotting subroutines are divided into static and dynamic segments. Static routines display all the
user's data in one call. Dynamic routines allow point plotting (data added to a previously displayed "paper") and
continuous display mode, where data can be scrolled left or right. RGL is Digital-supported and customer-installed.

BCP Graphics Software
The BCP Bar Code/Block Character software package lets RSX-11 M users print out industry-standard Code 39 bar
codes, block characters, and vertical and horizontal lines and dashes on Digital's LXY12/LXY22 graphics lineprinters. The package provides quick and easy production of labels for warehouse, stockroom, and other inventory
tracking operations.
The package's interactive user program lets users enter data to be coded for immediate printout of bar codes and
block-lettered labels. A library of graphics routines are also provided that can be combined with applications
programs written in PDP-11 FORTRAN-77, for fully automated label generation. Both parts of the package require
that the RSX-11 M system on which they run have FORTRAN-77 plus a minimum 40 KB of memory.

(Note: BCP is shipped with the LXY11 and LXY21 lineprinter/plotters. To order, use the RSX-11 M option numbers
given in the Printer/Plotter Ordering Information.)

RSX-ll M VlGL
RSX-11 M VIGL is a library of FORTRAN callable graphic subroutines that provide the RSX-11 M user with access to
the graphic capabilities of the VS11 /VSV11 graphics subsystem.
RSX-11 M VIGL graphic facilities provided by the VIGL subroutine library allow the user to create FORTRAN
applications programs. The subroutines convert graphics requests into display lists containing VS 11 /VSV11 specific
graphic instructions and utilize the VS11IVSV11 Driver to send these display lists to the VS11/VSV11 graphic
subsystem.
The minimum system requirements are any valid RSX-11 M system configuration that includes VS11 /VSV11
hardware, a minimum of 64K words of main memory in addition to that required by the operating system, and a
minimum of 40,000 blocks of disk space. The prerequisite software is an RSX-11 M Operating System with a
VSV11-M Driver, and FORTRAN IV/IAS-RSX or PDP-11 FORTRAN-77/RSX. RSX-11 M VIGL is Digital-supported
and customer-installed.

7 -24

Software

Applications Development Packages
Professional Tool Kit
The Professional Tool Kit lets programmers use PDP-11 RSX-11 M and RSX-11 M-PlUS systems (as well as VAX/
VMS systems) to develop application programs for Digital's Professional 300 Series Personal Computers. Using the
software and optional hardware in the package, application programmers using their current PDP-11 systems can
create and debug applications compatible with the Professional's P/OS menu-driven environment. This results in
higher programmer productivity, less required training time, and preservation of current system investments. The
Tool Kit is useful for software houses, DP departments, and other organizations that wish to produce applications
using all the unique features of the Professionals.
The Tool Kit includes the MACRO-11/Professional, BASIC-PlUS-2/Professional, DIBOUProfessional, COBOU
Professional and FORTRAN-??IProfessional programming languages; the RMS/Professional Record Management
System; FMS/Professional for forms-oriented video 1/0 management; the SORT/Professional record sorting utility;
the Professional Graphics Package for over 20 device-independent graphics commands; the Professional Diskette
Builder for end-user media distribution; and the Professional Debugger for use with BASIC-PlUS-2/Professional.
Applications are developed on the host PDP-11 system and then transferred to a Professional 350 system for
debugging.

ADE
ADE (Applications Development Environment), a programming tool specifically deSigned so nonprogrammers can
develop and run small, simple applications for use in small businesses, allows users with little or no computer
experience to perform such record keeping and bookkeeping tasks as maintaining and printing mailing lists,
inventory lists, time sheets, and budgets. ADE runs in the RSTS/E timesharing environment.
ADE presents on a user's video terminal electronic worksheets made up of rows and columns. Users work with
these worksheets by writing procedures-simple programs using English verbs. Procedures can store or retrieve
information from worksheets in tables kept in disk files; manipulate the entries in a worksheet; or print out reports.
An interactive help command, continuous display of available commands and messages at the bottom of the terminal
screen, and interactive command prompting step users through using ADE.

MENU-ll
MENU-11 allows application programmers to design customized interfaces between a RSTS/E system and its
users. RSTS/E's DCl command language environment can be sealed off from novice or infrequent users and
replaced with a set of interactive menus backed by help texts. Programmers design the menus and help texts, giving
users access to just those procedures and utilities needed in their work. This makes MENU-11 ideal for turning a
RSTS/E system into a "turnkey" application system, as well as for providing security on a system with many
inexperienced users.
MENU-11 consists of a set of programs that interact with RSTS/E and that control the display of menus to users
according to prepared command files. The command files specify the format and content of menus; the help text
associated with each menu option; the actions to be taken when an option is chosen (including conditional execution
of actions); the transfers between different menus; and the interactions with the user to gather more information.
Menu options can execute system commands, run application programs, and generally perform any action or series
of actions that is possible under RSTS/E.

PROVUE Color Graphics Display Management System
PROVUE is a powerful graphics display control system for use with PDP-11 computers. PROVUE surpasses
conventional color display systems by performing all picture handling and display tasks internally, leaving the user
free to concentrate on application software design. Created for process monitoring and control, and similar
applications, the comprehensive PROVUE software performs dynamic picture update, displaying in real time the
instantaneous state of the variables in the process being monitored. In addition, the system supports interactive
dynamiC alteration of the process variables.
A powerful on-line editor allows easy creation of mimics, graphics, character sets and special symbols, and provides
the techniques to combine these into easy-to-understand formats displayable in sixteen discrete colors. Blinking
may be used to highlight changing areas of the diagrams, alarm states, etc.
Depending on host computer size and configuration, up to five clusters of display stations can be supported, one
local and four remote, and each cluster can consist of up to four display stations.
Prerequisites:
Local configuration
Remote
tion

configura-

VS11 NSV11 Graphics Display Station{s)
PDP-11 123B cluster processor
VS11 NSV11 Graphic Display Station{s)
BA 11 -S expander box{ es)
Communications hardware
High-speed DMR11 , DMV11 , BC55N, DLV11
Low-speed DZ11 , DLV11 , BC22
Software

7-25

Applications Development Packages
RTEM·ll
RTEM-11 provides the RT-11 program development environment on RSX-11 M, RSX-11 M-PLUS, and VAX/VMS.
RTEM-11 runs in compatibility mode on VAX/VMS systems. It allows several users to develop RT-11 applications
concurrently on a host system. The number of users is dependent on CPU power and system activity. Application
programs can be created, edited, assembled, and linked on RTEM-11 and then executed on an RT-11 system. The
minimum memory requirement for RSX-11 M or RSX-11 M-PLUS Systems is 48 KB.

Support Categories
SORT-11 and DECword/DP are Digital-Supported/Digital-Installed products. The Professional Tool Kit and MENU11 are Customer-Supported. All other programming languages listed above are Digital-Supported/CustomerInstalled.

For Further Information
Consult the Software Product Descriptions (SPDs) for additional information on ordering options, and support details
for each product.

7-26

Software

Ordering Information
Applications Packages Ordering Information
Order Code
RT-11

Product

RSTS/E

RSX-11 M/M-PLUS

QR530-AM,AH
(13.11.xx)

ADE

BCP

(14.72.xx)

Note: To order BCP, see Sec. 6 under LXY Graphics Lineprinters.

DATATRIEVE-11

QP300-AM,AH
QY300-AM,AH
(12.48.xx)

DECgraph

QJA10-AM,AH
(15.24.xx)

QP301-AM,AH
QY301-AM,AH
(12.48.xx)

QJ038-AH,-AX
(13.15.xx)

DECtype

QR480-AM,AH
(13.14.xx)

DECWORD-DP

QJ713-AM,AH
(12.22.xx)

FM5-11

QJ716-AM,AH
(13.17.xx)

OJ715-AM,AH
(12.27.xx)

OR690-CH,CM
(12.60.xx)

MENU-11

(12.42.xx)

PLXY-11

(14.16.xx)

Note: To order PLXY-11 , see Sec. 6 under LXY Graphics Lineprinters.

(14.39.xx)
(14.71.xx)

Professional Tool Kit

QJ071-AM,AH
(40.2.xx)

PROVUE

QJS83-XM,XH
(14.33.xx)
(RSX-11 M only)

QUILL

RGL

CT5-300

OJA09
(12.55.xx)
OJ122-AH
(14.62.xx)

OJ123-AM,AH
(14.62.xx)
(RSX-11 M only)

RTEM

QJ291-AM,AH
(30.21.xx)

SORT-11

QP602-AM,AH
(12.7.22)

VIGL

QJS71-AX,OX
(14.19.xx)
(RSX-11 M only)

Software

7-27

Ordering Information
Order Code Suffixes
The following suffixes in the above order codes indicate the media on which the product will be shipped plus any
additional products or services included:
-AM

Single-use licence, binaries on 9-track magtape (1600 blin) , documentation, and support services

-AH

Single-use licence, binaries on RL02 disk cartridge, documentation, and support services

-DZ

Single-use license only; no binaries, no documentation, no support services

-GZ

Documentation-only kit

In general, products available for the RT-11 operating system can be ordered with the AH, OZ, and GZ options.
Products available for the other operating systems can be ordered with the AM, AH, OZ, and GZ options. Exceptions
are noted where they occur.

RGL Software Plus VT12S-AA
Distribution
Media

RT-11

RSX-11M

9-track
800 b/in
magtape

Vf125-HD(JD)

Vf125-LD(MD)

RK05 disk
cartridge

Vf125-HE(JE)

Vf125-LE(ME)

RL02 disk
cartridge

Vf125-HH(JH)

Vf125-LH(MH)

Vf125-LM(MM)

9-track
1600 b/in
magtape
RL01 disk
cartridge

Vf125-HQ(JQ)

RX02 floppy
diskette

Vf125-HX(JX)

RX01 floppy
diskette

Vf125-HY(JY)

7-28

Software

Vf125-LQ(MQ)

Ordering Information
RGL Software Plus VT100 to VT1 25 Upgrade or
VT1 05 to VT125 Upgrade
Distribution
Media

RT-11

RSX-11M

9-track
800 b/in
magtape

VT1XX-HD

VT1XX-LO

RK05 disk
cartridge

VT1XX-HE

VT1XX-LE

RL02 disk
cartridge

VT1XX-HH

VT1XX-LH

9-track
600 b/in
magtape

VT1XX-LM

RL01 disk
cartridge

VT1XX-HQ

RX02 floppy
diskette

VT1XX-HX

RX01 floppy
diskette

VT1XX-HY

VT1XX-LQ

Software

7-29

DIGITAL'S Software Binary License Agreements
Principles
Software is treated as proprietary information. Customers do not own it, but are licensed to use it under the terms
and conditions of software license agreements. Key pOints of DIGITAL's software binary license agreements are:
• Customers must have a binary license to use any of DIGITAL's binary software products.
• This license allows one customer to run one software product on the CPU it is first installed on.
• DIGITAL retains title and ownership.
• DIGITAL's licensing agreement does not allow the transfer of software from one end user to another or from one
CPU to another without prior permission from DIGITAL. Software may only be transferred to another party with
written permission from DIGITAL.
• A customer may reproduce the software, if necessary, but only for use on the specific CPU licensed to use it.
• The use of an update version of the software on the licensed CPU requires that the customer purchase a
software update option if out of warranty or not covered by a software service contract.
• The software may be used on another Single CPU on a temporary basis during a malfunction of the original CPU
which causes the software to be inoperable.
• Any modification to DIGITAL-licensed software doesn't exempt the software product from DIGITAl licensing or
sublicensing terms, conditions, or fees. Only those modifications that are not part of the original software are the
customer's property.

Software Ordering Options
DIGITAL-SUPPORTED Binary License Option
This is a standard binary license that includes media, manuals, documentation, and warranty packaged together. A
gO-day warranty, as specified in the Software Product Description (SPD) Addendum, is the support received (unless
different warranty conditions are specified in the SPD.) Main features of the warranty include: product updates,
technical information, telephone support, and on-site remedial support. Depending on complexity, DIGITALsupported products are designed as either DIGITAL-installed or Customer-installed.
DIGITAL-INSTALLED
DIGITAL provides installation services for products that are complex to install. Installation services include verification of complete product delivery and standard installation of the product. Hardware and the operating system are
installed together.
CUSTOMER-INSTALLED
Since many DIGITAL-supported software products require no special skills to install, the customer can install these
using the comprehensive, step-by-step documentation sets provided with them. The documentation sets detail all
procedures necessary for proper installation. Once the software products have been installed, they too qualify for
warranty service.
ADD-ON INSTALLATION FEE
With the exception of operating systems, customers who buy DIGITAL-Supported/DIGITAL-lnstalied products as
add-ons after the original system is installed will be quoted an installation fee.

CUSTOMER-SUPPORTED Binary License Option
This is a standard binary license which includes media, manuals, documentation but no warranty support. It is only
offered when a DIGITAL-supported license option is not offered.

LICENSE-ONLY Option
A license-only option is a standard binary license, but has no media, manuals, documentation or support. Software
products can be ordered at considerable cost reduction, but the customer must first purchase a license with media
for that particular software product. The license-only option is a one time right to copy. It is a license to run a single
software product on one additional CPU using a copy of the software the customer made from the original licensed
product. Customers may order additional copies of th~ documentation.

OUT-OF-WARRANTY Update Option
A customer with a binary license may order a product update for each licensed CPU. An additional license fee is
charged for each product update and for each'one-time right to copy the update for each previously licensed CPU.

7 -30

Software

PDP-ll Software Source Book-First Edition

Software Source Book
First Edition

The PDP-11 computer family has hundreds of application software programs solving real problems today. What are
those programs and how do you find the one you need? Find the answer in the first edition of the PDP-11 Software
Source Book. It's available now and contains more than 1 200 descriptions of application software currently running
on PDP-11s. Sources of descriptions come from outside vendors, Digital, DECUS, and the EAS (External
Application Software) Library.
The book is divided into three parts. Part I covers applications and groups software in categories such as
Accounting and Finance (108 products), Manufacturing (52), Health Care (47), Office Systems (26), Education
(69), and Engineering (93). Thirty categories of industries are included in Part I. Part II consists of three chapters
that deal with systems software -- Language Processors, Operating Systems and Communications, and Software
Tools and Utilities. Part III contains the cross-reference guides that make it easy for the user to find an application
package to fit a particular need.
The PDP-11 Software Source Book is free and intended for the decision-making Digital customer and prospective
customer of the PDP-11, including Micro/PDP-11. The book will be updated and published twice a year. The PDP11 Software Source Book is available through your literature contact.

Software

7-,31

8 Networks
As organizations acquire more and more computers, the need arises for these computers to talk to one another. A
computer network permits computers in different locations as well as computers built by different manufacturers to
exchange information.

Digital Network Architecture
The Digital Network Architecture (DNA), developed by Digital, defines an integrated set of networking capabilities.
DNA supports a broad range of compatible networking options that can link realtime systems, timesharing systems,
word processing systems, computational systems, and data processing systems together into one network. Such a
network can increase productivity and can give an organization greater control over day-to-day operations. By
speeding and organizing the flow of information in networks, management can help increase the efficiency of
departments and the company as a whole.
DNA's breadth of capabilities is unique in the industry. The layered structure of DNA allows inclusion of a new
communication technology, such as Ethernet, while preserving the application investment of Digital's customers.
Today DNA Phase IV supports DDCMP (Digital Data Communications Message Protocol) for point-to-point and
multipoint communications, Ethernet local area network protocols, and X.25 for communications over public packetswitching networks.

Networks
Local area networks (LANs) are networks that offer reliable high-speed communications channels, channels that are
optimized for connecting information processing equipment in a limited geographic area-an office, a bUilding, a
complex of buildings, or campus for example. LANs are optimized for high-speed (greater than one million bits per
second) data transfer. They are usually privately owned.
Ethernet is a local area network specification for communications protocols developed jointly by Xerox, Intel, and
Digital. Digital's Ethernet program for local area networking extends the possibilities for effective communication and
resource-sharing within the framework of DECnet. Digital has announced the availability of cables and cable
interface connectors, transceivers, and communication controllers. The intent is to build other capabilities needed to
link these networks with remote networks, public packet-switching networks, and SNA networks, all within the
framework of the Digital Network Architecture.

Communications Software
Digital's network software can be grouped in the following manner:
• DECnet for Digital-to-Digital system communication, either locally or remotely.
• Internets for connection of Digital systems to non-Digital systems.
• Packetnet for connection of systems utilizing a public packet-switching network.
When used in conjunction with the various communications hardware offerings, Digital's network software offers
powerful capabilities for integrating an organization's operations, whether it be a manufacturing company, a
university, an office, or an engineering application.

Networking Selection Chart

Network

Software Communications Products

Page

All DECnet Layered Software
DLX

8-4
8-5

DECnet-VAX
DECnet -RSX-11 M
DECnet-RSX-11 M-PLUS

8-4

DIGITAL-to-DIGITAL
Host Communication
Local Traditional

Local Area Networks

Remote

DIGITAL-to-nonDIGITAL
Host Communication

All DECnet Layered Software
DLX
RSX-11 PSI
VAX-11 PSI
TOPS-20 PSI

8-4
8-5

Allinternets
RSX-11 PSI
VAX-11 PSI
TOPS-20 PSI
DECnetiSNA Gateway

8-7
8-10

8-9

Networks

8-3

DECnet
DECnet is a family of software products that enable two or more Digital computer systems - the 16-bit PDP-11 s,
the 32-bit VAX computers, and the 36-bit DECsystem-1 Os and DECSYSTEM-20s - to form a network. At each
node DECnet acts as an interface between the node's operating system and the network. Each operating system's
DECnet software formQts data and procedures according to a set of protocols described in the Digital Network
Architecture (DNA) specifications. Each DECnet system then converts received data into formats for that operating
system. The DNA specifications are nonproprietary and may be ordered from Digital's Accessories and Supplies
Group (A&SG).
DECnet offers a wide range of networking functions over and above the data communications protocol which
support a wide range of application strategies: occasional update of remote files using remote resource sharing
facilities, and transfers of entire files from one system to another for intensive modification are just two of the
features which may be selected to help optimize productivity. The following is a summary of DECnet's features:
• Task-to-task communication - enables two programs to exchange information. These twa programs can be
running under different operating systems, they can be written in different languages .
• File transfer - exchange of sequential ASCII or binary files; DECnet handles compatibility issues among
operating systems. The transfer of filetypes other than sequential ASCII and binary may also be supported
between particular operating systems. Check with your Digital Network Specialist for details.
• Remote command file submission and execution - one system can direct another to execute a specified
program, either resident on the remote system, or sent to the remote system as a part of the request.
• Down/ine loading - programs or whole software systems can be developed on a node with the necessary
peripherals and transferred to another node for execution to a small memory-only system,for example.
• Network command termina/- a terminal user physically connected to one system can logically connect to
another system running the same operating system and act as if directly connected to that system.
• Adaptive routing - DECnet products communicate via a user-defined 'least cost' path and have the ability to
detect and automatically route around line or system failures .
• Network management - Tools for monitoring and controlling network operation. These tools include facilities for
tuning network parameters, for logging events, and for testing nodes, lines, modems, and communication
interfaces. For monitoring network operation or for testing a new network application, DECnet provides statistical
traffic and error information. Access to such network performance information allows potential problems to be
solved before they degrade network performance.

Configuring a OECnet Network
A DECnet network can be configured so that each network member is fully connected with every other member, or
so that some nodes communicate with other network nodes through intermediate or routing nodes. Adaptive path
routing means that the DECnet products in a routing network communicate via a user-defined "least cost" path, but
can also detect and route around line or system failures.
DECnet nodes can communicate with adjacent nodes over synchronous and asynchronous communications lines
and parallel interfaces. DECnet nodes can share a communication link in a multipoint configuration, thereby reducing
the high cost of multiple, directly connected communications lines. Microwave and satellite links (neither is available
from Digital) are also used to connect DECnet nodes.
DECnet-11 M and DECnet-11 M-PLUS (as well as DECnet-VAX and DECnet-20) nodes can communicate with each
other with full DECnet functionality across a public packet-switching network when used with the Packetnet System
Interface (PSI) products discussed later in this section.
The Software Product Descriptions (SPDs) should be consulted before ordering networking software and supporting
hardware. Your local Software Services Network Specialist will also be of assistance in confirming that your
proposed network configuration will meet your particular networking requirements.

OECnet
DECnet is a Phase IV network product that allows a suitably configured system to partiCipate as a routing or
non routing (end) node in DECnet computer networks. DECnet offers task-to-task communications, utilities for
network file transfer, homogeneous network command terminal support, and network resource capabilities, using
the Digital Network Architecture (DNA) protocols. DECnet communicates with adjacent nodes over synchronous and
asynchronous communication lines and parallel interfaces. Communication networks of over 1 000 nodes are
possible as is communication using the Ethernet specifications and protocols. Communication using X.25 circuits
over selected public packet-switching networks is also possible when configured with the appropriate PSI product.
Consult the Software Products Descriptions (SPDs) for more information on each DECnet product. Each DECnet
product offers its own level of functionality and its own set of features to the user. Users should also note that the
functions available depend, in part, on the configuration of the rest of the network.

8-4

Networks

DECnet
DLX Software Interface
RSX DLX-11 is a low-overhead software communication line interface that provides users of Digital microcomputers
access to Phase III DECnet networks. The product is available on the RSX-11 M system for interfacing with a
DECnet-11 M or DECnet-11 M-PLUS Phase III node.
RSX DLX-11 supports a single physical line in a point-to-point or multipoint connection. A user-written MACRO-11
program at each end of the line controls the communication line directly. The integrity and sequentiality of data sent
over the line are maintained by the use of DECnet Digital Data Communication Message Protocol (DDCMP).

DECnet Product Capabilities
DECnet PRODUCTS
(SPD NUMBER)
CAPABILITY

-VAX

-11M-PLUS
-11S
IE
(10.74.xx) (10.66.xx) (10.73.xx)

-lAS
(10.74.xx)

(25.3.xx)

-20
(23.2.xx)

COMMANDI
BATCH FILE
SUBMISSION

COMMANDI
BATCH FILE
EXECUTION

REMOTE FILE
ACCESS

-RT
(10.72.xx)

-11M
(10.75.xx)

PROGRAM-TOPROGRAM.

NETWORK
COMMAND
TERMINAL1

FILE
TRANSFER

DOWN-LINE
SYSTEM
LOADING

DOWN-LINE
TASK
LOADING

NOTES:
1 Terminals on these systems can log onto other homogeneous systems in the network. DECnet-11S does not support

connection from remote command terminals.
2 Requester-only function.
3 Server-only function.
4 Offers local users network access to remote file systems. Does not allow users on remote systems to access local

files.

Networks

8-5

Internets
The connection of Digital systems with computers built by other manufacturers is supported by a family of products
called Internets. Digital's protocol emulator (PE) products provide a way for Digital computers and terminals to
communicate with computers and terminals built by IBM, CDC, and UNIVAC by emulating those manufacturers'
terminal and line protocols. Thus Digital's equipment appears to the equipment with which it communicates to be
another supported device. Digital's wide range of Internet PEs gives you the freedom to choose mainframes and
minicomputers on the basis of your application needs with the assurance that a reliable link can be established
between these different systems.
Digital's Internet products are data transfer facilitators, not hardware emulators. They connect Digital computers with
non-Digital systems, providing a means for interchanging data with IBM, UNIVAC, CDC, and other host processors.
Digital's goal is to enable the exchange of data by using common communication protocols, not to provide plugcompatible replacements for terminal subsystems.

Digital-to-IBM Communication
Digital offers a full range of Digital-to-IBM Internet products. These products aid users in implementing cross-vendor
cooperative computing applications that span centralized and distributed processing environments. PDP-11 operating systems support program-to-program communication as well as 3270 terminal emulation and remote job entry
(RJE). Installation, troubleshooting, and network-control facilities help minimize the problems of bringing up and
maintaining effective internetwork operations.

2780, 3780, and HASP Protocol Emulators (Remote Job Entry BISYNC)
The RSTS/E 2780 Emulator emulates the communication protocol of an IBM 2780 device while running as a user
job under a suitably configured UNIBUS-based RSTS/E system. It will transmit files from any input medium (video or
hardcopy terminals, disks, tapes, and cardreaders) and receive files for any medium supported by RSTS/E. Files
can print on any lineprinter supported by a RSTS/E operating system, excluding the LS11 printer.
The 2780/3780 PEs are BISYNC RJE emulators that allow files to be transferred between PDP-11 systems and
IBM hosts supporting either the IBM 2780 or 3780 protocol. Multiple lines and multiple users are supported
concurrently through operator and program control.
Dedicated or switched point-to-point lines can be used. Autoanswer is supported for switched lines. Operator
control is performed using the standard Digital Command Language directives. Indirect command files can be used
to minimize operator interaction or to facilitate completely unattended operation. Monitoring functions include
continuously maintained traffic and error counters as well as on-demand status reporting. There are also troubleshooting facilities for loopback testing.
RSX-11 MilAS RJE/HASP performs the standard functions of an IBM HASP remote job entry workstation. Digital's
HASP product mimics the CRT and keyboard of the HASP workstation by offering remote console support. In
addition to using the features of the 2780 and 3780 emulators, the HASP PE user can communicate directly with
the IBM mainframe from a local terminal to control and check the status of jobs on the IBM host.
RJE/HASP provides multileaved (pseudosimultaneous, bidirectional) communication of up to seven input and seven
output data streams. Standard HASP protocol features include data compression of repeated sequential characters
including blanks, full EBCDIC transparency, multi/eaving, and support of printer vertical forms to skip to channel 1
(top of form). Communication line control is performed directly by one of the RJE/HASP tasks. Concurrent use of
the communications device by other RSX-11 M or RSX-11 M-PLUS tasks is precluded. Any mass storage or unit
. record device supported by RSX-11 M or RSX-11 M-PLUS can be used as a source or destination of data for a
HASP data stream.

3271 Protocol Emulator (Interactive BISYNC)
The RSX-11 and RSTS/E 3271 Protocol Emulators provide facilities for both program-to-program interactive
communication and data pass-through 3270 terminal emulation. The terminal emulator enables terminal users and
application programs to exchange data with a program running under IMS orCICS on an IBM 370 or 303X host. The
PDP-11 system appears to the host as an IBM 3277 Model 2 terminal and 3271 Model 2 control unit connected to
a multidrop synchronous line. The PE module supports up to 6 synchronous lines (coresidency of RSX-11 3271
and either RSX-11 DECnet or RSX-11 M/SNA PE is not supported).

8-6

Networks

Internets
RSX-11 M/SNA Protocol Emulator
The RSX-11 M/SNA Protocol Emulator provides an RSX-11 M system with the ability to participate in an IBM
Systems Network Architecture (SNA) network. RSX-11 M/SNA PE enables the RSX-11 M user application programs
to communicate with IBM application programs or system services on a task-to-task basis. Three modes of
application programming support are offered to fit varied customer expertise and requirements: Emulator Control
(EC), Extended Emulator Control (XEG), and Application Control (AG).
RSX-11 M/SNA PE supports up to 4 half-duplex or full-duplex synchronous lines at speeds up to 9600 bits/second.
The emulator will allow up to a maximum of 32 user sessions. The supported communications devices are DUP11 or
KMC11 with DUP11 s (coresidency with DECnet-11 M or with RSX-11 /3271 is not supported).

DECnet/SNA Gateway
Through the DECnetlSNA Gateway, a network of Digital systems can share information with a network of IBM
systems running under SNA.
With access routines for Remote Job Entry, 3270 Terminal Emulation, and/or the Application Program Interface,
users of Digital systems in a DECnet network can access corporate-based information needed for departmental or
divisional deciSion-making, transmit local data to a corporate database, and provide local access to applications
available within the SNA network. Not only is the Gateway's operation transparent to the users in the DECnet
environment, but as a shared network resource it eliminates the redundancy that would be necessary if each
DECnet node communicated directly with the SNA network.

UNIVAC Protocol Emulator
The UN1004/RSx/UNIVAC 1004 Terminal Emulator provides communication between a UNIBUS-based RSX-11M
system and a UNIVAC 1100 series, or other system using the UNIVAC 1004 RMS-1 communications protocol. The
software provides remote job entry (RJE) terminal emulation through which the user can send data in 80-column
card format and receive data in line or card format. UN1 004/RSX supports one synchronous communications circuit
to a host computer, a single switched or dedicated lease line, two-wire or four-wire common carrier facility at
transmission rates up to 4,800 bits per inch, and ASCII line communications code. Only full-duplex console
terminals can act as emulator terminals.

MUX200 Multiterminal Emulator
MUX200/RSX-IAS provides communication with a CDC 6000 CYBER series or other system using the 200 UT
Mode 4A communications protocol. The PDP-11 user can communicate at command level with a host system,
submitting jobs for batch processing and receiving results from the host. The software package can be configured
to support either ASCII or external BCD versions of the communications protocol.
MUX200/RSX-IAS enables several users to communicate simultaneously with a host system over a single line. The
PDP-11 system, while using a single physical drop, appears to the host as a number of multidrops and terminals on
the circuit.

Networks

8-7

Internets
The available Internet products are listed by SPD number. Consult DIGITA~s Software Product
Descriptions (SPDs) for more information.
IBM
2780

IBM
3780

RT-11

1O.16.xx

CTS-300

1O.16.xx

RSX-11M

1O.1.xx

RSX-11M-PLUS

1O.1.xx

1O.88.xx

RSTS/E 1

1O.SO.xx
1O.49.xx

1O.49.xx

1O.83.xx

VAX

27.7.xx

2S.7.xx

2S.21.xx

TOPS-10

30.23.xx
30.24.xx

30.24.xx

TOPS-20

30.23.xx
30.24.xx

30.24.xx

OPERATING
SYSTEM

IBM
HASP

IBM
3271

IBM
SNA

UNIVAC
UN1004

CDC
MUX-200

1O.S1.xx

1O.88.xx

14.4.xx

1O.79.xx

1O.77.xx

NOTE:
1 Not available for use with PDP-11123-PLUS systems.

8-8

Networks

30.1S.xx

1S.2.xx

Packetnet System Interfaces
Communication costs are usually not of major concern when the network's computers are located at the same site.
However, when you think about moving data between different locations, cities, or countries, communication costs
become a major concern. Leased lines can be expensive and not all organizations have sufficient data communications traffic to warrant leased line costs. Dial-up lines are cost-effective for low volumes of data transfer, but with
moderate data volume they become expensive as well. Public packet-switched networks (PPSNs) can provide the
best features of both methods.

PPSN Features
PPSNs offer the following advantages:
• Subscribers are permanently attached to the system via a leased line.
• The network guarantees a high level of end-to-end reliability.
• The network can compensate for the differences in transmission speeds between computers, and computers
and terminals.
• The subscriber pays for the amount of data transmitted, not for the line itself.
• Data packets from different users are interleaved by the network, allowing for more efficient use of the PPSN
line .
• Data packets can be routed along the first free line that becomes available. It is possible that the subcomponents
of a message can be routed along completely different lines.

X.2S Protocollnteriace
X.25 is rapidly becoming an accepted international telecommunications protocol as it is adopted by more and more
computer manufacturers. Any system on the network can send data to another system on the network. The PPSN
provides dynamic routing and insures data integrity.
Digital's PSI products support both the basic multivendor functional transfer of data and a higher level of support for
use between Digital systems across the network. Digital's PSI products have been designed and built to conform to
the June 1980 CCITT LAPS specification. Programs can exchange data with other programs, and connections can
be made over Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs) or Switched Virtual Circuits (SVCs).

Interactive Terminal Interface
Digital's PSI products support access by remote terminals according to CCITT recommendations X.3 and X.28
through a network-supplied Packet Assembler/Disassembler (PAD) to the RSX-11 system. Remote terminal users
have the same access privileges to RSX-11 programs as they would if they were local. Thus it is possible to run
applications programs across a network with no modification, unless the network itself imposes restrictions which
are beyond DIGITAL's control.
The PPSN guarantees data integrity across the network. Additionally, Digital's PSI products provide a subset of the
Digital Network Architecture (DNA) specified Network Management functions. Network control programs are
provided for loading and unloading the software, for defining the lines and network to which the system is
connected, and for display of various network information, i.e., error counters and numbers of packets received and
transmitted.
Use of RSX-11 PSI with DECnet-11 M and DECnet-11 M-PLUS allows packet-switched connections to be us~d as
replacement for traditional leased or dial-up circuits in a portion of, or in all of, a DECnet network.

Networks

8-9

Packetnet System Interfaces
RSX-11 PSI
RSX-11 PSIIM and RSX-11 PSIIM-PLUS allow suitably configured RSX-11 M and RSX-11 M-PLUS systems to
connect to public packet-switching networks (PPSNs) that conform to the CCIlT recommendation of June 1980.
These PSI products support task-to-task communication via the network, and remote terminal communication
through a packet assembler/disassembler (PAD) facility provided by the network. Terminals connected to a host
RSX-11 M or RSX-11 M-PLUS system cannot act as network terminals to other systems connected to the network.
Access to RSX-11 PSI/M or RSX-11 PSI/M-PLUS is supported for RSX-11 M user programs written in MACRO-11 ,
FORTRAN-IV, and FORTRAN-?? The communications discipline used is the CCIIT V.24 (RS232-C) at the
hardware level, the symmetric LAPS varient of the X.25 frame level protocol and the X.25 packet level protocol.
RSX-11 PSI/M and RSX-11 PSI/M-PLUS can coexist with, or operate as a layered product under DECnet-11 M or
DECnet-11 M-PLUS, allowing the use of DECnet facilities over PPSNs as well as private leased-lines or switched
telephone networks. The Packetnet System Interface supports a subset of DIGITAL's Network Architecture's
management features including loading and unloading software, defining lines, and providing access to error
counters and other maintenance functions.
RSX-11 . PSIIM and RSX-11 PSIIM-PLUS have been certified and are warranted on the following networks:
Transpac (France), Datex-P (Germany), PSS (United Kingdom), and Telenet (U.S.A.).

Data System

TELENET (U.S.)

RSX-11 PSI

VAX-11 PSI

TOPS-20 PSI

10.42.xx
10.43.xx

25.40.xx

21.22.xx

TYMNET (U.S.)

8-1 0

Networks

TRANS PAC (France)

DATEX-P (Germany)

PSS (U.K.)

DATAPAC (Canada)

DATANET 1 (Holland)

Ordering Information
Communications Software Ordering Information
Communications Software

DECnet

Order Code (SPD Number)
RSTS/E

RSX-11M

RSX-11 M-PLUS

RT-11

OP692
(10.73.xx)

OJ684
(10.75.xx)

OR580
(10.66.xx)

OJ687
(10.72.xx)

DLX-11 Software Interface

OJ689
(10.6.xx)

MUX200/RSX-IAS Multiterminal Emulator

OJ070
(10.77.xx)

RSTSlE-2780 Emulator

OPD10
(10.50.xx)

RSX-11 MIlAS RJElHASP

OJS60
(10.51.xx)

RSX-11 MlSNA Protocol Emulator

OJD69
(14.4.xx)

RSX-11 PSI

OJD91
(10.42.xx)

UN1004 RSXJUNIVAC 1004
Terminal Emulator

OJ170
(10.79.xx)

OJS62
(10.51.xx)

OJD92
(10.43.xx)

2780/3780 Protocol Emulators

ORD06
(10.49.xx)

OJD82
(10.1.xx)

3271 Protocol Emulators

ORD05
(10.83.xx)

OJD76
(10.88.xx)

OJD59
(10.16.xx)

Additional Information:
• Digital's PDP-11 networking software is offered on the following media:
-AD indicates 2032 b/cm (800 b/in) 9-track magtape
-AM indicates 4064 b/cm (1600 b/in) 9-track magtape
-AH indicates RL02 disk cartridge
-AV indicates RKO? disk cartridge
-AG indicates TUS8 DECtape
• Support Category: Digital-supported/Digital-installed.
• Ucense: Single-use license, binaries, documentation, support services for all media (-Ax extension in order
code).
• Documentation-only Kit: Order with -GZ extension.
• Ucense-only: For single-use license-only, no binaries, no documentation; no support services, order -DZ
extension.

Note:
Consult the Software Product Descriptions for more information on each product. The level of functionality for a
group of communications software varies depending on the operating system.

Networks

8-11

9 CUstomer Services
One of the major advantages of owning a computer system from Digital Equipment Corporation is the extent of the
customer services available. DIGITAL has hundreds of service centers located around the world as well as customer
education centers in many major cities. However, this section highlights the major categories of service offerings
available from DIGITAL's Field Service, Educational Services, and Software Services organizations.

Field Service
Hardware Services
Digital's Field Service organization offers a range of onsite and off-site post-warranty services. Over 16,000 Field
Service personnel in more than 400 locations worldwide with an inventory of over $500 million in parts are ready to
provide the support needed for continuous productivity.

On-Site Services
DECservice
DECservice is Digital's most comprehensive on-site maintenance program for customers requiring uninterrupted
system performance. This program provides a variety of services deSigned to ensure maximum system availability.
Included in the agreement are provisions for:
• Digital's commitment to fast response
• Continuous remedial maintenance service
• Planned priority escalation
• Extended preventive maintenance scheduling
• All parts, materials, and labor
• Engineering modifications
• An aSSigned Service Representative
• A comprehensive Site Management Guide

Basic Service
Digital's Basic Service is a comprehensive on-site maintenance program offering economy, attention to detail, and a
wide range of maintenance services. Maximum system availability is ensured by these provisions:
• Complete remedial maintenance
• Planned preventive maintenance
• All parts, materials, and labor
• Assigned Service Representative
• Comprehensive Site Management Guide
Although standard coverage for both of these on-site service plans is 8 hours a day, 5 days a week, customers can
opt to extend DECservice coverage to 12, 16, or 24 hours, including weekends and holidays.

Shared Maintenance
Shared Maintenance is a cooperative support program for customers with in-house service staffs. The program
backs up your service team with Digital's service representatives and network of resources. It ensures that Digital's
support is there when you need it the most - when your system is down.

Per Call Service
Per Call Service is offered to Digital's customers who wish to establish a non-contractual service alternative as either
a primary maintenance program or an enhancement to a self-maintenance effort. Contract customers can also use
Per Call Service as a supplementary service outside of contractual hours of coverage.

Customer Services 9-3

Field Service
Off·Site Services
Digital Servicenter
The Digital Servicenter (DSC) is a carry-in repair center for Digital's Terminals and Small Systems offering low-cost
repairs at over 145 convenient locations. At the DSC you receive the same quality service as you would at your
office with a guaranteed two-day turnaround on your equipment. At the DSC you may choose from contract (fixed
annual cost), per call (fixed labor charge plus parts), or parts exchange (pay only for the part you determine to be
bad).

Customer Returns Center
The Customer Returns Center (CRC) is dedicated to the off-site service needs of the self-maintenance customer.
CRC provides service on a wide range of products, available through contractual and non-contractual agreements.
In addition, the CRC honors the corporate return-to-factory warranty for all module types (excluding CSS) offered by
Digital. The CRC's standard service offering is DECmailer.

DECmailer
DECmailer is Digital's premium return-to-factory repair program. It provides qualified Digital customers with a fast,
easy, economical way of handling module and subassembly repair. The program features:
• A fast 5-day turnaround time
• Repair of over 11 00 parts

Media Maintenance Service
Digital's Media Maintenance Service is a comprehensive program which provides total media maintenance service
for your disk cartridges (RL01, RL02, RK05, RK06, RKO?). The program provides:
• Inspection of all disk cartridges
• Thorough cleaning of all cartridges
• All cartridges are labeled
• Installation of SHOCKWATCH warning device
• Cartridge warranty for life of your Field Service contract
• Free replacement of defective cartridges which are under this program
• Reduced downtime, increased system performance

Specialized Services To Protect Your Assets
Records Management
At our specially designed, secured national sites, we ~iII store your valuable media off-site while remaining available
to you? days a week, 24 hours a day. We provide the most advanced facilities, equipment, security, and support
available today.

Educational Services, Disaster Planning, and Consultation
Through education planning and consultation, Digital helps assure your peace of mind should a disaster strike. We
will consult with you, help you assess your need, and develop a contingency plan for system back-up. We will help
you determine the kind of support you will need to make certain you do not lose time or money in the event of an
emergency. We can also provide you with the direct support if you need it.
For further information on any of the aforementioned services, call toll free 1-800-DIGITAL.
SHOCKWATCH is a registered trademark of Media Recover.

9-4

Customer Services

Software Services
Software Services are available to support PDP-11 customers during any aspect of their system analysis, software
development, or implementation efforts. Services available start with the personal attention of a Digital software
consultant and continue with the distribution of up-to-date software and software information.
A software specialist often works with a Digital sales representative to evaluate a prospective user's needs prior to
purchase, recommend hardware/software solutions to problems, and give advice on the feasibility and costs of
proposed solutions.
Depending on the software purchased, specialists are available to install software and provide software warranty
support to assure that purchased software products perform according to Digital's commitments. Ongoing software
support is assured through a variety of post-warranty Software Product Services, which offer customers the
opportunity to keep their software up-to-date and running smoothly. A full range of Professional Software Services is
available to assist customers throughout the planning, implementation, and production phases of their systems.
For those PDP-11 software products that require Digital installation, a software specialist will install the software and
verify that the system is complete. Software warranty services include telephone assistance and on-site remedial
support, if necessary. Services also include automatic delivery of in-warranty Software Product and Documentation
Updates and the distribution of a periodic newsletter. Software Performance Reports are included under warranty
services, as well.

Software Product Services
Software Product Services (SPS) provide informational, preventive and remedial service to help customers after the
period of software warranty. These services provide updates to the latest software products, responses to reported
software problems, and technical publications that contain programming notes and documentation corrections.
The family of Software Product Services includes four levels of service: Software Product Updates, Self-Maintenance Service for Software, Basic Service for Software, and DECsupport Service for Software.

• Software Product Updates - Single major releases of software, including documentation. No services are
included (however, they may be purchased at per-call rates).

• Self-Maintenance Service for Software - Tools are provideQ to enable users to maintain their own system
software. These include Software Product and Documentation Updates, sent automatically as they are released;
newsletters containing information about new software developments and enhancements; and Software Performance Reports, a formal software problem reporting mechanism.
• Basic Service for Software - This service is appropriate for users who require some, but not total, support. It
includes all the elements of Self-Maintenance Service, plus telephone support for usage and remedial software
questions.
• OECsupport Service for Software - The most comprehensive software product service available. DECsupport
includes all the elements of Basic Service, plus preventive maintenance, delivery and installation of updates and
Program Change Orders, and on-site remedial support for critical situations.
A License-to-Copy Update Option is also available. This option allows customers to copy Software Product Updates
onto a single, additional CPU. It is suitable for customers who are running identical operating system software on
several similar CPUs, and who want to copy the updates only.

Professional Software Services
Digital's software professionals are specifically trained in Digital products and experienced in designing, coding and
modifying custom software as well as tailoring PDP-11 software to meet special needs. Software specialists are
available to provide system analysis, application design review and optimization, and system/application integration.
Resources are available to perform specific project tasks, supplement a customer's programming staff, or manage
projects from start to completion.
Varying types of expertise are available, ranging from programmer to project manager, depending on customer
requirements. Professional services are available at both resident and per-call rates, and also on a fixed-price per
project basis.

Customer Services 9-5

Software Services
DECstart Services
DECstart is a proven combination of direct assistance, documentation review, discussion and hands-on experience
provided on site by a Digital Software Specialist.
Users learn directly on their own systems and can put their knowledge to use immediately. The DECstart services
are conducted over a period of time to assure mastery of the system. Programmers and system managers are taken
step-by-step through the techniques required to effectively operate a particular system. DECstart enhances the
ability of users to keep their systems running smoothly by teaching them how to troubleshoot problems.
Digital's Software Services group meets customer needs by offering a wide range of options to supplement the
standard DECstart package. Optional services are priced according to the time they require, therefore an estimate
can be given for any requirement a customer may be conSidering. In addition, a Digital Software Specialist can draw
up a Customer Support Plan to help the user determine any further areas in which he or she might benefit from
additional services.

9-6 Customer Services

Educational Services
PDP-ll Customer Training
Digital provides comprehensive educational programs to train your personnel before, during, and after installation.
Instruction in system management, operations, hardware, and software is available in five formats:
• Lecture/Lab Instruction-Provides traditional classroom lectures and laboratory experiences at one of Digital's
26 Training Centers worldwide.
• Self-paced Instruction(SPI)-Self-Paced courses offer training materials that are portable, self-contained, and
modular in format. They are educationally designed so that students can progress at their own learning rate. SPI
courses are offered in three formats: Print-Text books or manuals; Audio-Visual-Cassettes and filmstrips; and
Computer-Based Instruction-Taught on the computer, by the computer.
• On-Site Training-On-site courses can be adapted to cover your particular application or operational needs in
depth. Every lecture course offered by Educational Services can also be taught at your job site .
• Exclusive Courses-lf you have a unique application, Educational Services can create an exclusive course
tailored to your needs.
• Technical and Management Seminars-Management seminars are specifically designed for non-technical
personnel to help them better understand data processing and how to use its capabilities. Technical seminars are
a series of state-of-the-art programs aimed at DP professionals and managers focusing on the newest applied
technologies.
For further details regarding dates, times, locations, and costs, as well as information about training credits available
to Digital customers, contact your nearest Digital Training Center or your Account Representative.

Customer Services

9-7

Appendix A
LSI-11 Option Conversion Table
Old Option

Upgrade Option

System Option

DLV11
DLV11-E
DLV11-EB
DLV11-ED
DLV11-EP

DLV11-MP
DLVE1-DP
DLVE1-DP
DLVE1-DP
DLVE1-DP

DLV11-J
DLV11-JA
DLV11-JP

DLV11-M
DLVE1-M
DLVE1-M + CK-DLVE1-D*
DLVE1-M + CK-DLVE1-D*
DLVE1-M + CK-DLVE1-D*
DLVJ1-M
DLVJ1-M + CK-DLVJ1-L*
DLVJ1-M + CK-DLVJ1-L*

None
DLVJ1-LP
DLVJ1-LP

DLV11-KA
DLV11-KB
DLV11-KC

DLVK1-H
DLVK1-H
DLVK1-H

None
None
None

DMV11-AA

DMV11-M + CK-DMV11-A*
DMV11-M + CK-DMV11-F*
DMV11-N + CK-DMV11-B*
DMV11-N + CK-DMV11-C*
DMV11-M + CK-DMV11-A*
DMV11-N + CK-DMV11-B*
DMV11-N + CK-DMV11-C*
DMV11-M + CK-DMV11-F*
DPV11-M
DPV11-M + CK-DPV11-A*
DPV11-M + CK-DPV11-A*
DUV11-M
DUV11-M + CK-DUV11-A*
DUV11-M + CK-DUV11-A*
DUV11-M + CK-DUV11-A*
DZV11-M
DZV11-M + CK-DZV11-D*
DZV11-M + CK-DZV11-D*
DZV11-M + CK-DZV11-D*

DMV11-AP
DMV11-FP
DMV11-BP
DMV11-CP
DMV11-AP
DMV11-BP
DMV11-CP
DMV11-FP

DRV11 + CK-DRV1B-K*
DRV11-B + CK-DRV1B-K*
DRV11-J + CK-DRV1J-K*

DRV11-LP
DRV11-BP
DRV11-JP

LPV11-A + CK-LPV1A-K*
LPV11-B + CK-LPV1A-K*
LPV11-E + CK-LPV1A-K*
LPV11-F + CK-LPV1A-K

LPV11-AP
LPV11-BP
LPV11-EP
LPV11-FP

RLV22-AK + CK-RLV1A-K*

RLV22-AP

RXV21-EA + CK-RXV2E-K*
RXV21-EC + CK-RXV2E-K*
RXV21-ED + CK-RXV2E-K*
KDF11-BE/BA + CK-KDF1B-K*
IBV11-A

RXV21-EP
RXV21-ES
RXV21-ET
N/A
N/A

DMV11-AB
DMV11-AC
DMV11-AP
DMV11-BP
DMV11-CP
DMV11-FP
DPV11-DA
DPV11-'DB
DPV11-DP
DUV11-DA
DUV11-DD
DUV11-DE
DUV11-DP
DZV11-A
DZV11-B
DZV11-C
DZV11-CP
DRV11-D
DRV11-B
DRV11-JA
LPV11-AA
LPV11-BA
LPV11-EA
LPV11-EB
RLV22-AK
RXV21-EA
RXV21-EC
RXV21-ED
KDF11-BP
IBV11-P

None
DPV11-AP
DPV11-AP
None
DUV11-AP
DUV11-AP
DUV11-AP
None
DZV11-DP
DZV11-DP
DZV11-DP

* Several cabinet kits are available. Use the following table to determine what letter replaces the asterisk.

Last Letter of Suffix

Cabinet Kit Where Used

Used with PDP-11 1238

Used with MICRO/PDP-11

Used with PDP-11 123-PLU8

Appendix A
UNIBUS Option Conversion Table
Old Option

Upgrade Option

System Option

DH11-M
DH11-AB
DH11-AC
DH11-AD
DH11-AE

'Obsolete
Obsolete
Obsolete
DH11-M + CK-DH11-A*
DH11-M + CK-DH11-D*

DH11-AP
DH11-DP

DL11-E
DL11-JA
DL11-L
DL11-LA
DL11-LB
DL11-W
DL11-WA
DL11-WB
DL11-WC

DL11-M + CK-DL11-A*
Obsolete
Obsolete
Obsolete
Obsolete
Obsolete
DL11-N + CK-DL11-H*
DL11-N + CK-DL11-D*
Obsolete

DMP11-M

DMP11-M + CK-DMP11-A*
DMP11-M + CK-DMP11-F*
DMP11-M + CK-DMP11-B*
DMP11-M + CK-DMP11-C*
DMP11-M + CK-DMP11':E*

DMP11-AP
DMP11-FP
DMP11-BP
DMP11-CP
DMP11-EP

DMR11-AB
DMR11-AC
DMR11-AE

DMR11-M + CK-DMR11-A*
DMR11-M + CK-DMR11-F*
DMR11-M + CK-DMR11-B*
DMR11-M + CK-DMR11-C*
DMR11-M + CK-DMR11-E*

DMR11-AP
DMR11-FP
DMR11-BP
DMR11-CP
DMR11-EP

DUP11-DA

DUP11-M + CK-DUP11-A*

DUP11-AP

DV11-M
DV11-BA
DV11-BB
DV11-BC

DV11-M
DV11-N (X2) + CK-DV11-A*
DV11-P (X2) + CK-DV11-A*
DV11-N + DV11-P + CK-DV11-A*

DV11-AP
DV11-1P
DV11-2P
DV11-3P

DZ11-A
DZ11-M
DZ11-B * *
DZ11-BA
DZ11-C
DZ11-D * *
DZ11-E
DZ11-EA
DZ11-F

DZ11-M + CK-DZ11-D*
DZ11-M + CK-DZ11-D*
DZ11-M + CK-DZ11-DD
DZ11-M + CK-DZ11-DE
DZ11-N + CK-DZ11-H*
DZ11-N + CK-DZ11-H*
DZ11-M (X2) + CK-DZ11-D* (X2)
Obsolete
DZ11-N (X2) + CK-DZ11-H* (X2)

DZ11-DP
DZ11-DP
DZ11-DP
DZ11-DP
DZ11-HP
DZ11-HP
DZ11-DP (X2)

RX211-BA
RX211-BC
RX211-BD

RX211-BK
RX211-BM
RX211-BN

DMP11-AB
DMP11-AC
DMP11-AE
DMR11-M

DL11-AP

DL11-HP
DL11-DP

DZ11-HP (X2)

* Several cabinet kits are available. Use the following table to determine what letter replaces the asterisk.

* * If you have an unsheilded cabinet and a DZ11-A(C), order a DZ11-S(D) to upgrade. If you have an old DZ11 with
unused distribution panel capacity, continue to order old options (see above). Once the available capacity is filled,
you should order new modules with the appropriate cabinet kits.

Last Letter of Suffix

Cabinet Kit Where Used

Any UNIBUS PDP-11 or VAX shielded cabinet

Any UNIBUS PDP-11 or VAX non-shielded cabinet

Note: (X2) means 2 units must be ordered to obtain 8 line interface equivalent to old option.

Index
Application Software
ADE . . .
BCP . . . . . . . .
DECgraph . . . . .
MENU-11 . . . . .
MicroPower/PASCAL.
PLXY-11 . . . . . .
Professional Tool Kit .
PROVUE.
RGL.
RTEM
VIGL.

7-26
7-25
7-25
7-26
7-17
7-24
7-26
7-26
7-25
7-27
7-25

Cables
Communication Cables .
Realtime I/O Cables

2-18
2-20

Card Readers
CR11 Card Reader.

. . . . . . . . . 6-25

Communication Options
Analog I/O
AAV11.
ADV11.
AXV11.
Digital I/O
DRV11.
DR11 .
DRS11.
DSS11 .
IEEE Interfaces
IEC . . . .
lEU . . . .
IEQ . . . .
Q-bus Communication Options
Asychronous
DLVE1
DLVJ1 . .
DLVK1 . .
DZV11 . .
Sychronous
DMV11 .
DPV11 . .
DUV11 . .
KMV11 . .
UNIBUS Communication Options
Asychronous Multiplexers
DZ11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DH11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Communications Microprocessors
KMS11 . . . . . . . .
Communications Controller
DEUNA.
DELNI .
DEREP .
Modems
DF02 . .
DF03 . .
Multipoint Parallel
PCL11-B . . .

2-21
2-21
2-21
2-20
2-20
2-20
2-20
2-22
2-22
2-22

· 2-9
· 2-9
· 2-9
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-11
2-11

2-13
2-13
2-16
2-17
2-17
2-17
2-17
2-17
2-16

Multipoint Synchronous
DMP11 . . . .
Realtime Clocks
KW11 . . . . . . .
KWV11 . . . . . . .
Single-line Asynchronous
DL11 . . . . . . . .
Single-line Synchronous
DMR11 . . . . . .
DUP11 . . . . . .
Statistical Multiplexers
DECmux
DFM . . . . . . .

2-15
2-22
2-22
2-12
2-14
2-13
2-16
2-16

Data Management Software
DATATRIEVE-11
FMS-11 .
QUILL . . . . .
SORT-11 . . . .

7-23
7-23
7-23
7-23

Disk Subsystems and Controllers
RA60 Removable Disk
RA80 Fixed Disk . . .
RA81 Fixed Disk. . .
RD51 Disk Drive. . .
RL02 Cartridge Disk .
RLV12 . . . . .
RLV22 . . . . .
RQDX1 . . . . . .
RUA80 Controller .
RUA81 Controller .
RX02 Floppy Disk .
RX50 Floppy Disk .
UDA50 . . . . . .

4-10
· 4-7
· 4-8
4-12
4-14
· 4-6
4-15
· 4-6
· 4-9
· 4-9
4-16
4-13
.4-4

Educational Services . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Environmental Products
Constant Voltage Conditioner
Ughtning Surge Suppressor .
Power Distribution System .

Expansion Boxes
Component
BA11-MA(MB).
BA 11-SA(SB) .
BA 11-SE(SF) .
BA23-A . . .
Q-bus
BA 11-SE(SF) .
UNIBUS
BA 11-KU(KV) .

2-26
2-27
2-25

· 3-9
· 3-9
· 3-9
· 3-9
· 2-7
· 2-7

Field Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Index
Languages
BASIC-PLUS-2
BASIC-11/RT-11
COBOL-81 .
CORAL-66 .
DIBOL-11
FORTRAN-77 .
FORTRAN IV
PASCAL.
Q-bus Board Processors
KDF11.
KDJ11 .
KXT11 .
Memory Options
Component Memory Options
MCV11.
MRV11.
MSV11.
MXV11.
Q-bus Memory Options
MCV11.
MSV11.
UNIBUS Memory Options
MS11
Microcomputer Development Tools.
MICRO/PDP-11
System Bases
11A23-F.
11A23-R.
11C23-F.
11C23-R.
Systems
SX-RA500.

7-20
7-20
7-21
7-21
7-21
7-20
7-20
7-21

· 3-5
· 3-5
· 3-6

· 3-8
· 3-8
· 3-8
· 3-8
· 2-6
· 2-6
· 2-7
3-10

1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10

RSX-11 M-PLUS .
RSX-11S.
RSTS/E
RT-11
UNIX.
Personal Computers
DECmate II
Hardware Options
Software Options
Professional 325 and 350
Hardware Options
Software Options
Rainbow 100
Hardware Options
PDP-11/23-PLUS
System Bases
11 T23-BK(BL)
11 V23-BE(BJ)
11 123-BC(BD).
11 123-BE(BF) .
11 123-SC(SD).
11/23-SE(SF) .
Systems
SX-RXMMA.
PDP-11/24
Building Blocks
SX-FX100
SX-FX200
Kernels
11 X24-FA(FB)
Rackmount Computer Models
11/24-CC(CD)
11/24-DC(OD).
Systems
SX-FXMMB.
SX-FXGMB.

Microprocessor Chips
DCJ11 .
DCK11.
DCT11.

· 3-4
· 3-4
· 3-4

Networking Software
DECnet
Software Products .
Internet.
Software Products .
Packetnet System Interfaces
Software Products .

.8-4
· 8-5
· 8-7
· 8-7
· 8-9
8-10

PDP-11/44
Building Blocks·
SX-40100
SX-40200
Kernels
11X44-FA(FB)
Rackmount Computer Models
11/44-DA(DB) .
Systems
SX-40MMB.
SX-40GMB.

Operating Systems
CTS-300.
DSM-11
MicroPower/PASCAL.
Micro/RSX
RSX-11M.

7-11
7-13
7-17
7-17
7-15

Lineprinters
LN01 Printer
LP25 Lineprinter.
LP26 Lineprinter.
LP27 Lineprinter.
LSP25-CA Lineprinter

7-16
7-16
7-14
7-10
7-12

· 5-7
· 5-8
5-10
5-12
· 5-5

1-12
1-12
1-16
1-16
1-18
1-18
1-12

1-36
1-36
1-32
1-26
1-28
1-40
1-42

1-38
1-38
1-34
1-30
1-44
1-46

6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-22

Index
LSP26-CA Lineprinter . .
LXY12 Uneprinter/Plotter .
LXY22 Uneprinter/Plotter .
Processor Options
Component Q-bus Processor Options
FPF11 . .
KEF11-AA . . . . . .
KTF11 . . . . . . . .
KXT11-A2 . . . . . .
Q-bus Processor Options
FPF11 . . . . . . . .
KEF11-AA . . . . . .
KEF11-BB . . . . . .
UNIBUS Processor Options
FPF11 . .
FP11-F. .
KEF11-AA
KEF11-BB
KE44-A

6-23 Tape Subsystems
TE16 Magnetic Tape .
6-19
6-19
TSV05 Magnetic Tape
TU58 Cartridge Tape .
TU77 Magnetic Tape .
TU80 Magnetic Tape .

· 3-7
· 3-7 Terminals
Hardcopy Terminals
· 3-7
LA 12 DECwriter Correspondent Printer .
· 3-7
LA50 Personal Printer . . . . .
LA 100 Letterwriter/Letterprinter .
· 2-7
LA 120 DECwriter //I Printer .
· 2-7
LQP02 Letter Quality Printer.
.2-7
Video Terminals
Accessories .
. 2-7
RT100.
· 2-7
RT102.
· 2-7
RT137.
· 2-7
VT100.
· 2-7
VT101 .
VT102.
Software
VT125 Graphics Terminal .
Application Software .
7-22
VT131 . . . . . . . .
7-23
Data Management Software .
7-20
Languages . . . . . . . .
Operating Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . · 7-6 Word Processing Software
DECwordlDP
Transferring Software to the MICRO/PDP-11 . 7-17
Processing Software. . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
DECtype . . . . . . . .
Software Services

. .

4-23
4-21
4-24
4-22
4-20

6-17
6-14
6-16
6-18
6-15
6-10
.6-7
.6-7
.6-7
· 6-5
.6-5
.6-5
· 6-8
· 6-5

7-23
7-23

· 9-5

Chart Index
Cable Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Ordering Information Charts
Applications Packages . .
Communications Software.
Configuring Charts
Operating Systems. . .
3-11
Component Processor & Memory Options .
Programming Languages
DECnet Communication Hardware
. 8-5
Disk Site Preparation. . . . . . . . .
4-18
Hardcopy Terminals . . . . . . . . .
6-26 Selection Charts
Board-Level Microprocessor.
Uneprinters. . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
Chip-Level Microprocessor
Q-bus Processor Options and Memories.
2-28
Disks . . . . . .
Q-bus Communication Options.
2-29
Hardcopy Terminals
Q-bus Disks. . . . . . . . . .
4-17
Uneprinters. . .
Q-bus Realtime Options. . . . .
2-31
MagnetiC Tapes. .
Magnetic Tapes. . . . . . . .
4-25
MICRO/PDP-11 . .
Magnetic Tapes Site Preparation.
4-25
Networking. . . .
PDP-11/24 Processor Options and Memories 2-28
PDP-11/23-PLUS .
PDP-11/44 Processor Options and Memories 2-28
PDP-11/24.
Power Cords . . . . . . . . .
6-11
PDP-11/44 . . .
UNIBUS Communication Options .
2-30
Software . . . .
UNIBUS Disks. . . . . .
4-1 7
Systems . . . .
UNIBUS Realtime Options.
2-31
Video Terminals.
Video Terminals. . . . .
6-11

7-27
8-11
7-17
7-22

.3-3
· 3-3
.4-3
6-13
6-13
4-19
· 1-5
· 8-3
· 1-5
1-22
1-22
.7-4
· 1-3
.6-3